TABLE OF CONTENTSchalmerscs.com/uploads/3/5/5/5/35559745/busd_-_walt... · 2021. 1. 5. · TABLE OF...

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

013100 013100.1

013300 014000 014200

017300 017329

017700

017839

Project Management and Coordination RFI Form Submittal Procedures Quality Requirements References

Execution Cutting and PatchingClose Out ProceduresProject Record Documents

vpetito

Typewritten Text

014500 Testing & Inspection Requirements for School Construction 014500.1 DSA 103 Form 014524 Import Materials Testing 015723 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT 013100-1 DIVISION 1 SUPPLEMENT

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings.

B. Contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific installing trade contractor.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, in web-based Project software directory, and in prominent location in built facility. Keep list current at all times.

1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Priority of Construction Space:

1. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

C. Condition of Contract Drawings for Mechanical and Electrical Work:

1. Drawings contain diagrammatic layouts and indicate general arrangement of systems, piping conduit, etc.

2. Prior to installation of material and equipment, review and coordinate Work with Architectural and Structural Drawings for exact space conditions; where not readily discernable request information from Architect before proceeding.

3. Check Drawings of all other trades to verify extent of material and equipment to be installed in spaces available and consider layout alternatives so that all requirements can be accommodated.


4. Coordinate installations with other trades to prevent conflict with Work of other trades andcooperate in making reasonable modifications in layout as needed.

D. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special proceduresrequired for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendeesat meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of theirWork is required.

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out withconsideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use oftemporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actuallyincorporated into, the Work.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents and it is not possible to request information at Project meetings, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs within 3 days of occurrence so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

3. Frivolous RFIs: The Contractor shall compensate the Owner for the Architect's time and expenses to process RFIs resulting from the Contractor's lack of studying and comparing the Contract Documents, coordinating their own Work, or repeating previous RFIs.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.2. Project number.3. Date.4. Name of Contractor.5. Name of Architect and Owner.6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.7. RFI subject.8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.12. Contractor's signature.13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,

Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Submitted by electronic mail (e-mail) in accordance with General Conditions and Special Conditions.

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.2. Provide attachments for software-generated forms n Adobe Acrobat PDF format.3. Provide photographs for software-generated forms in JPG format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect and Owner will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow 14 calendar days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect or Owner after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.


1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.b. Requests for approval of substitutions.c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which caseArchitect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect or Owner ofrequested additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or theContract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to theGeneral Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time orthe Contract Sum, notify Architect and Owner in writing within scheduled days ofreceipt of the RFI response in accordance with provisions in the GeneralConditions of the Contract for Construction.

1.6 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare asfollows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittalrequirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enablingnavigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required,

provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Preconstruction Conference: Owner will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conferencebefore starting construction, at a time convenient to Contractor and Architect, but no later than15 days after execution of the Agreement at the Project site or another location convenient tothe Owner and Architect.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at theconference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating tothe Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments.b. Tentative construction schedule.c. Phasing.d. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.e. Designation of key personnel and their duties.f. Lines of communications.g. Use of web-based Project software.h. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.i. Procedures for RFIs.j. Procedures for testing and inspecting.k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.l. Distribution of the Contract Documents.m. Submittal procedures.n. Sustainability requirements.


o. Preparation of record documents.p. Use of the premises and existing building.q. Work restrictions.r. Working hours.s. Owner's occupancy requirements.t. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.u. Procedures for moisture and mold control.v. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.w. Construction waste management and recycling.x. Parking availability.y. Office, work, and storage areas.z. Equipment deliveries and priorities.aa. First aid. bb. Security. cc. Progress cleaning.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meetingminutes.

B. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before eachconstruction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination withother construction.

C. Project Closeout Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a project closeoutconference, at a time convenient to Owner, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled dateof Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Projectcloseout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; majorsubcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting.Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to concludematters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents.b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance.c. Procedures for completing and archiving web-based Project software site data

files.d. Submittal of written warranties.e. Requirements for completing Sustainability and CGBC documentation.f. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.g. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.h. Requirements for demonstration and training.i. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment.k. Submittal procedures.l. Coordination of separate contracts.m. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.n. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.o. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.


D. Progress Meetings: Owner will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority ,Owner, and Architect, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concernedwith current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of futureactivities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall befamiliar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determinewhether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relationto construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will beexpedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whetherschedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activitieswill be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.2) Sequence of operations.3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts.4) Status of submittals.5) Status of CGBC documentation.6) Deliveries.7) Off-site fabrication.8) Access.9) Site use.10) Temporary facilities and controls.11) Progress cleaning.12) Quality and work standards.13) Status of correction of deficient items.14) Field observations.15) Status of RFIs.16) Status of proposal requests.17) Pending changes.18) Status of Change Orders.19) Pending claims and disputes.20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute themeeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Projectcoordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such asprogress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,and Architect, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with currentprogress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall berepresented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar withProject and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 013100


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

Request No. [XXXXX] Date [Month 00, Year]

Project Name [Project Name] To CannonDesign

Project No. [XXXXXX.XX] [Address]

Subject [Subject of RFI] [City, State, Zip]

Attention [CAC Name]

[[email protected]]

Specification

Section No.

& Paragraph

[Section No. & paragraph] Drawing

& Details

Affected

[Drawing & details affected]

WHY IS THIS INFORMATION BEING REQUESTED? (select one)

☐ Information necessary to complete shop drawing submittal

☐ Information necessary to complete field coordination / erection

☐ Other [Explain]

REQUEST (attached referenced documents)

[Write Request Here]

Attachments [Your Attachments Here]

Distribution [Your Distribution Here]

CONTRACTOR’S / BIDDER’S REPRESENTATION

Undersigned warrants that Contractor has thoroughly researched the documents, and the information requested does not exist or cannot be ascertained

from the information given in the documents.

Subcontractor’s signature and date

Contractor’s / CM’s signature and date


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT 013300-1 DIVISION 1 SUPPLEMENT

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1. Required Submittals: All required submittals are indicated in each specification section. Do not submit items unless they are required by Specification Section. Submittals which are not required may be discarded without review.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's 's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." 1. Provide sufficient information to permit complete review when project is submitted.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's 's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule, within 30 days of receipt of Notice to Award. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's 's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.


i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

5. Architect reserves right to withhold action on all submittals until complete submittals schedule has been submitted and approved.

6. Review of any submittal without submission and approval of submittal schedule does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide Action Submittal for approval. Failure to submit Submittals Schedule relieves Architect of all constraints on review periods.

B. Submittal Package: Assemble all Action Submittals for each specification section into a single package for delivery to Architect unless otherwise specified. Failure Contractor to assemble all Action Submittals in single package may result in Architect withholding action on submittal(s) until associated submittal(s) required by applicable specification section are received.

1. Closeout Submittals or Submittals for Work Performed by Separate Trades: Submit in separate package as applicable rather than in single Action Submittal package described above.

2. Transmittal: Submit each Submittal Package with the Submittal Identification Form as a transmittal for the package.

a. If a Contractor proposes to use a separate transmittal for the Submittals Package, the proposed transmittal must be reviewed by, and determined to be acceptable to, the Owner Architect prior to submitting first Submittal Package, and shall include not less than the following Items:

1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Name and address of Architect. 4) Name of Contractor. 5) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 6) Related physical samples submitted directly. 7) Indication of full or partial submittal. 8) Other necessary identification.

b. Include a completed Submittal Identification Form in all Submittal Packages in addition to any separate transmittal. Submittal Packages not including Submittal Identification Form will be returned as "Not Reviewed."

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. For samples, review time begins when both physical submittal and electronic Submittal Identification Form have been received by Architect.


1. Initial Review: Allow sufficient time for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Resubmittal Review: Allow sufficient time for review of each resubmittal. 3. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow sufficient time for initial review of each submittal.

4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow sufficient time for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

C. Sample Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Submittal Identification Form: All submittals shall be accompanied by a completed

Submittal Identification Form attached to this Section. Submittals lacking Submittal Identification Form will not be reviewed.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier

a. Include in file name project identifier, Specification Section number, and item number, followed by "RVW" with number of review, then title. (e.g. "PI-05 5100-001 RVW 01 SD-Metal Stairs – Stair 01 & 02" for first metal stair shop drawing for stair 01 and 02 review 01).

b. Project Identifier: .

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect .

4. Transmittal for Electronic Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Submittal Package paragraph in Action Submittals article.

a. Submittals not including Submittals Identification Form will be returned as "Not Reviewed."

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:

a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. e. Keynote or finish code.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

1. Deviations: Encircle or otherwise specifically identify deviations from Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.


2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted", and initialed by Architect

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted", and initialed by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, submit all submittals as PDF electronic files via email to Architect’s Construction Administrator Coordinator (CAC), with CC to Owner’s Representative and Architect. Include project name and Submittal Identification Number in subject line of email.

a. Architect will return annotated file.

2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable to Project.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications, including performance characteristics

written to match specified terminology for ease of comparison. c. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that

documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1) Preparation of substrates. 2) Required substrate tolerances. 3) Sequence of installation or erection. 4) Required installation tolerances. 5) Required adjustments. 6) Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring and controls.


g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. l. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. o. Availability and delivery time information. p. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings. q. Additional information as required by Specifications.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Submit Product Data as a PDF electronic file. 6. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information as a separate submittal

addressed to directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect.

a. Architect will not review MSDS sheets and will remove/discard them from the submittal.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control

wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring. p. Additional information as required by Specifications. q. Do not include the phrase "by others," except when relating to materials, products

or equipment not included under the Work of the Contract.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

a. Submittals shall be clear and legible. The Architect reserves the right to reject in full any submittal due to illegibility, as determined solely by the Architect, without any impact to the allowed review time. All dimensions and text shall be a minimum of 10pt or 0.389 inches in height. Drawings not conforming to this requirement will be rejected without review.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file, unless otherwise approved by Architect.


D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of thesecharacteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics betweensubmittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessoriestogether in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.b. Product name and name of manufacturer.c. Sample source.d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image fileillustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available forquality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample setsmay be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individualSpecification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition attime of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner'sproperty, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units orsections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three (3) full set(s) of available choices where color,pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected frommanufacturer's product line. Architect will return one (1) submittal set with optionsselected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, preparedfrom same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, andphysically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range ofcolor and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, thefollowing: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts orcontainers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showingcolor, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independenttesting and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three (3) sets of Samples. Architect will retain twoSample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one (1) returnedSample set as a Project Record Sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabricationtechniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are tobe demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent inmaterial or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets ofpaired units that show approximate limits of variations.

7. Field Samples: Erect at project site at location(s) acceptable to Architect.

a. Construct each field sample complete; including work of all trades required to finishthe Work.

b. When directed by Architect, demolish field sample and remove from Project Site,unless acceptable by Architect as part of the competed.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summaryindicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include thefollowing information in tabular form:


1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule as a PDF electronic file.

F. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

G. Certificates

1. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

2. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

3. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

4. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

H. Reports

1. All testing agencies shall be acceptable to DSA. 2. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

3. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

4. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. c. Time period when report is in effect. d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use.

5. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

6. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

7. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.


8. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

a. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

b. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

c. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. d. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. e. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements. f. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. g. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 and Section 014500.

J. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment.

K. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

L. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect .

1. Verify:

a. Field Measurements. b. Field Construction Criteria. c. Catalog Numbers and Similar Data. d. Quantities.

2. Contractor’s responsibility regarding errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Architect’s ’s review of submittals.

3. Contractor's responsibility regarding deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect's 's review of submittals, unless Architect gives written acceptance of specific deviations as approved by Owner.

4. When work is directly related and involves more than one trade, coordinate submittal with other trades and submit under one cover.

5. After a submittal has been submitted for review, no changes may be made to that Submittal other than changes resulting from review notes made by the Architect unless such changes are clearly identified and circled before being resubmitted. Any failure to comply with this requirement shall nullify and invalidate the Architect's 's review.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700.

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each Submittal Identification Form with Contractor's stamp certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.


3.2 ARCHITECT'S 'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval certification and will return them without action. 1. Where Contractor has obviously not reviewed submittal and merely stamped for

processing, Architect will return marked “Rejected” without further review.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will indicate on Submittal Identification Form for each submittal to indicate action taken, as follows:

1. "No Exceptions Taken":

a. No further review of submittal is required.

2. "Make Corrections Noted":

a. If Contractor complies with noted corrections, fabrication may proceed and resubmission is not required, unless otherwise noted.

b. If for any reason the Contractor cannot comply with the noted corrections, fabrication shall not proceed and Contractor shall resubmit, following procedures outlined hereinbefore.

3. "Revise and Resubmit":

a. Contractor shall revise and resubmit for review. Fabrication shall not proceed.

4. "Rejected":

a. Submittal is not in compliance with the Contract Documents and is not acceptable. Provide new submittal.

5. "For Record / Information Only":

a. Submittal has been received and will be retained for record keeping purposes.

6. "Not Required For Review":

a. Submittal is not required by Contract Documents and has not been reviewed.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

3.3 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS BY ORIGINAL SUBMITTER, AFTER ARCHITECT’S REVIEW

A. Make and distribute copies of submittal which have been accepted by the Architect to the following: 1. Contractor. 2. Related Contractor(s). 3. Supplier. 4. Fabricator. 5. Owner’s representative. 6. Job-site file (record copy).

B. Produce and distribute additional copies as required.




WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL QUALITY REQUIREMENTS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT 014000-1 014000-1 DIVISION 1 SUPPLEMENT

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Services of testing laboratories, Project Inspectors, and Special Inspectors as specified are intended for the Owner’s verification of the Contractor’s compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements or relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

4. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

5. The services and quantities of testing specified in this Section are approximate and may vary. Actual services and quantities of testing will be determined by the Owner, DSA and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and/or Architect and/or Architect, and/or and Commissioning Authority during the construction period.

6. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. See respective specification sections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.


E. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

I. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect or .

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Contractor's Quality Control Plan: For quality assurance and quality control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality control personnel.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

E. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.


F. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice of Award, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality assurance and quality control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager shall not have other Project responsibilities. 2. CQM-C certified.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring all testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.

2. Special tests and inspections required by DSA and other authorities having jurisdiction and indicated in Section 014523 and respective sections.

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.


11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements.

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. Comply with Section 013573.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.


G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by DSA and other authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to DSA and other authorities.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

g. When requested by the Architect, , testing agency, or Special Inspector, immediately provide copies of mill reports, cutting lists, material bills, shipping bills, time and place of shipment of materials to shop, and any relevant data on previous testing and investigations of materials.

h. Comply with Section 014339 and respective sections.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Commissioning Authority through with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified Project Inspector, Testing Agency, and Special Inspector to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made by Owner directly. . 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction due to the following reasons will be

charged to Contractor and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order:

a. Additional testing required after correction of defective materials or workmanship to verify compliance with Contract Documents.


b. Materials or practices not complying with the Contract Documents that could possibly result in defective work rendering it necessary or advisable to perform additional testing to determine if the work is acceptable.

c. Changes in source, quality or characteristics of materials. d. Site-cured cylinders requested by the Contractor. e. Additional reasons as specified in Section 014523.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by DSA and other authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

1. The Contractor shall bear all costs associated with retesting and reinspecting after the work has been corrected to further verify compliance with the Contract Documents.

D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect Commissioning Authority , and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect Commissioning Authority and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine from the Architect and the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.


G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Cooperation and access to the Work, including (but not limited to) cooperation with testing agency personnel and Special Inspectors by providing proper facilities for access including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, and hoisting facilities required for inspections in the shop or in the field.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections, including (but not limited to) providing access to the work to be inspected or tested, obtaining and handling samples at the Site, and facilitating inspections and tests.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site. 8. A complete set of shop drawings for the items being tested and inspected.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit schedule concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, , testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency and special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, as indicated in Section 014500, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Division of State Architect, other authorities having jurisdiction, Architect, Commissioning Authority, , and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect and Commissioning Authority, through, with copy to Contractor and to DSA and other authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, and 's reference during normal working hours.

1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to the satisfaction of the Architect.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Section 017329.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.




WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL REFERENCES PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT 014200-1 DIVISION 1 SUPPLEMENT

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

J. "Contract Limit": Space available for performing construction activities; the primary area of Work may be indicated by a Limit of Construction line on Drawings, but Work necessary to complete the Project can also occur beyond this limit. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

K. "Remove": Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

L. "Remove and Salvage": Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse.

M. "Salvage": Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere.

N. "Remove and Reinstall": Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

O. "Existing to Remain": Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

P. "Demolish": Tearing down, destruction, breakup, razing or removal of the whole or part of a building or structure, or a free-standing machinery or equipment that is directly related to the function of the structure.

Q. "Recycle": Recovery of demolition waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

R. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, the condition at which roofing is insulated and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures equivalent in weather protection to permanent construction.


1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;

www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com. 8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.abma.com. 9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org. 10. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act 11. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 12. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 13. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 14. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 15. AHJ – Authority Having Jusrisdiction 16. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 17. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 18. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 19. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 20. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 21. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org. 22. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 23. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 24. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. 25. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 26. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 27. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 28. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 29. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 30. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 31. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 32. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See

ASCE). 33. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;

www.ashrae.org. 34. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);

www.asme.org.

www.aabc.com

www.aamanet.org

www.aapfco.org

www.transportation.org

www.aatcc.org

www.americanbearings.org

www.abma.com

www.abma.com

www.concrete-pipe.org

www.aeic.org

www.afandpa.org

www.aga.org

www.aham.org

www.ahrinet.org

www.asphaltinstitute.org

www.aia.org

www.aisc.org

www.steel.org

www.aitc-glulam.org

www.amca.org

www.ansi.org

www.aosaseed.com

www.apawood.org

www.archprecast.org

www.api.org

www.asphaltroofing.org

www.asce.org

www.ashrae.org

www.asme.org


35. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org. 36. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. 37. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org. 38. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 39. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 40. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 41. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;

www.awmac.com. 42. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com. 43. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 44. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 45. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 46. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 47. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 48. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's

Association); www.bifma.org. 49. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 50. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);

www.bissc.org. 51. CBC – California Building Code. 52. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 53. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 54. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org. 55. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 56. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 57. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 58. CGBC – California Green Building Code. 59. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 60. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 61. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 62. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 63. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 64. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 65. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 66. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 67. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca. 68. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services);

www.csa-international.org. 69. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 70. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 71. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org. 72. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 73. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 74. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 75. DSA – Division of State Architect 76. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA). 77. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA). 78. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org. 79. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 80. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 81. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 82. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 83. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 84. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. 85. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. 86. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation);

www.fiba.com. 87. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation);

www.fivb.org.

www.asse.org

www.asse-plumbing.org

www.astm.org

www.atis.org

www.awea.org

www.awinet.org

www.awmac.com

www.awpa.com

www.aws.org

www.awwa.org

www.buildershardware.com

www.gobrick.com

www.bicsi.org

www.bifma.org

www.bissc.org

www.bissc.org

www.copper.org

www.electricity.ca

www.ce.org

www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com

www.cfsei.org

www.cganet.com

www.cellulose.org

www.cisca.org

www.cispi.org

www.chainlinkinfo.org

www.pbmdf.com

www.carpet-rug.org

www.coolroofs.org

www.crsi.org

www.csa.ca

www.csa-international.org

www.csinet.org

www.cedarbureau.org

www.cti.org

www.dasma.com

www.dhi.org

www.eciaonline.org

www.eima.com

www.ejma.org

www.esda.org

www.evo-world.org

www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org

www.fiba.com

www.fivb.org


88. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com. 89. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 90. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;

www.floridaroof.com. 91. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 92. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 93. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 94. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 95. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 96. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 97. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 98. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 99. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 100. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com. 101. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 102. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org. 103. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA). 104. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 105. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 106. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 107. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org. 108. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 109. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; http://www.iec.ch. 110. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 111. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of

North America); www.ies.org. 112. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 113. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 114. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 115. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 116. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 117. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);

www.intertek.com. 118. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and

Automation Society); www.isa.org. 119. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA). 120. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid

Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 121. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 122. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 123. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home. 124. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 125. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 126. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 127. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 128. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 129. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 130. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 131. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org. 132. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com. 133. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com. 134. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 135. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.;

www.mss-hq.org. 136. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 137. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International);

www.nace.org. 138. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 139. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.

www.fmglobal.com

www.fmglobal.com

www.floridaroof.com

www.fluidsealing.com

www.fscus.org

www.gypsum.org

www.glasswebsite.com

www.greenseal.org

www.pumps.org

www.hpva.org

www.hpwhite.com

www.iapsc.org

www.iasonline.org

www.iccsafe.org

www.icea.net

www.icpa-hq.org

www.icri.org

http://www.iec.ch/

www.ieee.org

www.ies.org

www.iest.org

www.igmaonline.org

www.igshpa.okstate.edu

www.iliai.com

www.intertek.com

www.isa.org

www.isfanow.org

www.iso.org

www.itu.int/home

www.kcma.org

www.lightning.org

www.mbma.com

www.metalconstruction.org

www.maplefloor.org

www.metalframingmfg.org

www.mhia.org

www.marble-institute.com

www.wmmpa.com

www.paintinfo.com

www.mss-hq.org

www.naamm.org

www.nace.org

www.nadca.com

www.naima.org


140. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 141. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org. 142. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 143. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 144. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 145. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 146. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 147. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 148. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 149. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 150. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org. 151. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA). 152. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 153. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 154. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 155. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 156. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 157. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 158. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 159. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org. 160. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 161. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 162. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 163. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 164. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 165. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 166. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology

Association); www.plasa.org. 167. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 168. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 169. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 170. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org. 171. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 172. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 173. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 174. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. 175. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See

ASCE). 176. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 177. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 178. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 179. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;

www.smacna.org. 180. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 181. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 182. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 183. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 184. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 185. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 186. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 187. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 188. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 189. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 190. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 191. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com. 192. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. 193. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA -

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org.

www.nbgqa.com

www.newbuildings.org

www.ncaa.org

www.ncma.org

www.nebb.org

www.necanet.org

www.nelma.org

www.nema.org

www.netaworld.org

www.nfhs.org

www.nfpa.org

www.nfrc.org

www.nhla.com

www.nlga.org

www.nomma.org

www.nrca.net

www.nrmca.org

www.nsf.org

www.nspe.org

www.nssga.org

www.ntma.com

www.nwfa.org

www.pci.org

www.pdionline.org

www.plasa.org

www.boltcouncil.org

www.rfci.com

www.redwoodinspection.com

www.sae.org

www.scte.org

www.sdi.org

www.steeldoor.org

www.sefalabs.com

www.siaonline.org

www.steeljoist.org

www.smainfo.org

www.smacna.org

www.smpte.org

www.sprayfoam.org

www.spib.org

www.spri.org

www.solar-rating.org

www.ssina.com

www.sspc.org

www.steeltank.com

www.steelwindows.com

www.swpa.org

www.tilt-up.org

www.tileusa.com

www.tema.org

www.tiaonline.org


194. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).

195. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 196. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 197. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 198. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 199. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 200. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 201. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 202. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 203. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 204. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org. 205. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. 206. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 207. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 208. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org. 209. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 210. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de. 2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. 5. CBC- California Building Code 6. DSA – Division of State Architect

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;

www.nist.gov. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies

Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research

Program; The National Academies; www.trb.org. 15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity

Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 17. USDOJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;

www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org. 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.

www.masonrysociety.org

www.tpinst.org

www.turfgrasssod.org

www.tileroofing.org

www.ul.com

www.uni-bell.org

www.usavolleyball.org

www.usgbc.org

www.usitt.org

www.wastec.org

www.wclib.org

www.wcmanet.org

www.wdma.com

www.wicnet.org

www.wsrca.com

www.wwpa.org

www.din.de

www.iapmo.org

www.iccsafe.org

www.icc-es.org

www.usace.army.mil

www.cpsc.gov

www.nist.gov

www.quicksearch.dla.mil

www.energy.gov

www.epa.gov

www.faa.gov

www.gpo.gov/fdsys

www.gsa.gov

www.hud.gov

www.eetd.lbl.gov

www.osha.gov

www.state.gov

www.trb.org

www.ars.usda.gov

www.usda.gov

www.ojp.usdoj.gov

www.usp.org

www.usps.com


D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design 2. CBC – California Building Code, Part 1 -12 as indicated. Title 24, CCR 3. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;

www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA

Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 5. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 6. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 7. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services;

www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design

Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.

8. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 9. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 10. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See

USAB).

E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.

2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com.

3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). 4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program;

www.cal-iaq.org. 5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov. 6. DSA – Division of State Architect; www.dgs.ca.gov/dsa, California 7. OSHPD – Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development, California 8. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov. 9. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development;

www.txforestservice.tamu.edu.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


www.gpo.gov/fdsys



www.dsp.dla.mil

www.gsa.gov

www.wbdg.org/ccb

www.access-board.gov

www.bearhfti.ca.gov

www.calregs.com

www.cal-iaq.org

www.cpuc.ca.gov

www.aqmd.gov

www.txforestservice.tamu.edu



WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TESTING & INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT 01 45 00 - 1 DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020

SECTION 01 45 00 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

FOR SCHOOL CONSTRUCTION

TESTS

The Owner will select an independent testing laboratory to conduct the tests. Selection of the material required to be tested shall be by the laboratory or the Owner’s representative and not by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s representative a sufficient time in advance of the manufacture of material to be supplied by him under the Contract Documents, which must be terms of the Contract be tested, in order that the Owner may arrange for the testing of same at the source of supply.

Any material shipped by the Contractor from the source of supply prior to having satisfactorily passed such testing and inspection or prior to the receipt of notice from said representative that such testing and inspection will not be required shall not be incorporated in the job.

The Owner will pay testing laboratory costs for all tests and inspections, but may be reimbursed by the Contracxor for such costs under the Contract documents.

TESTS REPORTS

One copy of all test reports shall be forwarded to the Division of the State Architect by the testing agency. Such reports shall include all the tests made, regardless of whether such tests indicate that the material is satisfactory or unsatisfactory. Samples taken but not tested shall also be reported. Records of special sampling operations as required shall also be reported. The reports shall show that the material or materials were sampled and tested in accordance with the requirements of Title 24 and with the approved spacifications. Test reports shall show the specified design strength. They shall also state definitely whether or not the material or materials tested comply with requirements.

VERIFICATION OF TEST REPROTS

East testing agency shall submit to the Division of the State Architect a verified report in duplicate covering all the tests which are required to be made by that agency during the progress of the project. Such report shall be furnished each time that work on the project is suspended, covering the test up to that time, and at the completion of the project, covering all tests.


INSPECTION BY THE OWNER

The Owner and his representatives shll be at times have access for the purpose of inspection to all parts of the work and to the shops wherein the work is in preparation, and the Contractor shall at all times maintain proper facilities and provide safe access for such inspection.

TESTING AND INSPECTION

The Owner shall have the right to reject materials and workmanship which are defective, or to require their correction. Rejected workmanship shall be satisfactorily corrected and rejected materials shall be removed from the premises without charge to the Owner. If the Contractor does not correct such rejected work within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the Owner may correct same and charge the expense to the Contractor.

Should it be considered necessary or advisable by the Owner at any time before final acceptance of the entire work to make an examination of the work already completed by removing or tearing out the same, the Contractor shall on requiest promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor and materials. If such work is found to be defective in any respect due to the fault of the Contractor or his subcontractor, he shall defray all expenses of such examinations and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the additional cost of labor and material necessarily involved in the examination and replacement shall be allowed the Contractor.

INSPECTOR – OWNER’S

An Inspector employed by the Onwer in accordance with the requirments of the California Code of Regulations, Title 24, will be assigned to the work. His duties are specifically defined in Title 24, Part I, Sec. 4-342.

The work of construction in all stages of progress shall be subject to the personal continuous observation of the Inspector. He shall have free access to any or all parts of the work at any time. The Contractor shall furnish the Inspector reasonable facilities for obtaining such information as may be necessary to keep him fully informed respecting the progress and manner of the work and the character of the materials. Inspection of the work shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to fulfill this Contract.

INSPECTOR – OWNER – FIELD OFFICE

The Contractor shall lprovide for the use of the Owner’s Inspector a temporary office to be located as directed by the Inspector and to be maintained until removal is authorized by the Owner. This office shall be of substantial waterproof construction with adequate natural light and ventilation by means fo stock design windows. The door shall have a lock. A table satisfactory for the study of plans and two chairs shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide and pay for adequate electric lights, private local telephone service with a loud exterior bell, and adequate heat for this field office until the completion of the Contract.


1. Excavations and Fills

CBC Appendix J

Site Compaction : 1803A.3

Compacted Fill Material : 1803.A.5

Inspection of Site Soil and Back Fill : 1704A.7

Inspecitn of Pier foundations : 1707A.8 1704A.9 1810A.4.12

2. Concrete

Materials:

Cement: ACI 318 SEC 3.2

Aggregate: ACI 318 SEC 3.3

Rebar: ACI 318 SEC 3.5

Quality:

Mix Proportions: 1905A.2 ACI 318 SEC 5.2

Strength Tests 1905A.6

Rebar Tests 1916A.2

Cement Tests 1916A.1

AGG Tests 1903A.4

Inspection:

Job Site Inspection 1907A (ACI 318 SEC 5.7)

Batch Plant 1704A.4.2

Rebar Welding 1903A.7, 1704A.3.1.3

Post Installed Anchors 1916A.7

Replacement Inspection 1704A.4.6


3. Steel

Materials:

Structural & cold Formed Steels 2203A.1

Testing & Inspections:

Steel 2212A.1

Fabrication 1704A.2

Welding (Shop & Field) 1704A.3.1

High Strenth Bolts 2212A.2

End Welded Studs 2212A.3

4. Wood

Materials:

Materials:

Lumber, plywood 2303

Wood I-Joists Inspection IR23-9.10 Sec 4.0

Glue Lam Beams Inspection 1704A.6.2

END OF SECTION

DSA 103-16: LISTING OF STRUCTURAL TESTS & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, 2016 CBCApplication Number:03-119964

School Name:Walt Disney ES

School District:Burbank USD

DSA File Number:19-16

Increment Number: Date Created:2020-11-12 12:52:15

DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)

DIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECT DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES STATE OF CALIFORNIAPage 1 of 20

2016 CBCIMPORTANT: This form is only a summary list of structural tests and some of the special inspections required for the project.

Generally, the structural tests and special inspections noted on this form are those that will be performed by the Geotechnical Engineer of Record, Laboratory of Record, or Special Inspector. The actual complete test and inspection program must be performed as detailed on the DSA approved documents. The appendix at the bottom of this form identifies work NOT subject to DSA requirements for special inspection or structural testing. The project inspector is responsible for providing inspection of all facets of construction, including but

not limited to, special inspections not listed on this form such as structural wood framing, high-load wood diaphragms, cold-formed steel framing, anchorage of non-structural components, etc., per Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 17A. (2016 CBC)

**NOTE: Undefined section and table references found in this document are from the CBC, or California Building Code.

KEY TO COLUMNS1. TYPE 2. PERFORMED BY

Continuous – Indicates that a continuous special inspection is required Periodic – Indicates that a periodic special inspection is required Test – Indicates that a test is required

GE – Indicates that the special inspection is to be performed by a registered Geotechnical Engineer (GE) or his or her authorized representative LOR – Indicates that the test or inspection is to be performed by a testing laboratory accepted in the DSA Laboratory Evaluation and Acceptance (LEA) Program Laboratory of Record (LOR). See CAC Section 4-335 PI – Indicates that the special inspection may be performed by a project inspector when specifically approved by DSA. SI – Indicates that the special inspection is to be performed by a Special Inspector (SI)

DSA 103-16: LISTING OF STRUCTURAL TESTS & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS (SOILS), 2016 CBCApplication Number:03-119964





DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


Geotechnical Reports: Project has a geotechnical report, or CDs indicate soils special inspection is required by GE1. GENERAL: Table 1705A.6

Test or Special Inspection Type Performed By

Code References and Notes

✔ a. Verify that: • Site has been prepared properly prior to placement of controlled fill and/or excavations for foundations. • Foundation excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material. • Materials below footings are adequate to achieve the design bearing capacity.

Periodic GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative. (See Appendix for exemptions.)

2. SOIL COMPACTION AND FILL: Table 1705A.6



✔ a. Perform classification and testing of fill materials. Test LOR* * Under the supervision of the geotechnical engineer.

✔ b. Verify use of proper materials, densities and inspect lift thicknesses, placement and compaction during placement of fill.

Continuous GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative. (Refer to specific items identified in the Appendix for exemptions where soils SI and testing may be conducted under the supervision of a geotechnical engineer or LOR's engineering manager. In such cases, the LOR's form DSA 291 shall satisfy the soil SI and test reporting requirements for the exempt items.)






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


✔ c. Compaction testing. Test LOR* * Under the supervision of the geotechnical engineer. (Refer to specific items identified in the Appendix for exemptions where soils testing may be conducted under the supervision of a geotechnical engineer or LOR's engineering manager. In such cases, the LOR's form DSA 291 shall satisfy the soil test reporting requirements for the exempt items.)

3. DRIVEN DEEP FOUNDATIONS (PILES): Table 1705A.7



a. Verify pile materials, sizes and lengths comply with the requirements.

Continuous GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative.

b. Determine capacities of test piles and conduct additional load tests as required.

Test LOR* * Under the supervision of the geotechnical engineer.

c. Inspect driving operations and maintain complete and accurate records for each pile.


d. Verify locations of piles and their plumbness, confirm type and size of hammer, record number of blows per foot of penetration, determine required penetrations to achieve design capacity, record tip and butt elevations and record any pile damage.


e. Steel piles. Provide tests and inspections per STEEL section below.

f. Concrete piles and concrete filled piles. Provide tests and inspections per CONCRETE section below.






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


g. For specialty piles, perform additional inspections as determined by the registered design professional in responsible charge.

* * * As defined on drawings or specifications.

4. CAST-IN-PLACE DEEP FOUNDATIONS (PIERS): Table 1705A.8



✔ a. Inspect drilling operations and maintain complete and accurate records for each pier.

Continuous GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative. (See Appendix for exemptions.)

✔ b. Verify pier locations, diameters, plumbness, bell diameters (if applicable), lengths and embedment into bedrock (if applicable); record concrete or grout volumes.


✔ c. Confirm adequate end strata bearing capacity. Continuous GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative. (See Appendix for exemptions.)

✔ d. Concrete piers. Provide tests and inspections per CONCRETE section below.

5. RETAINING WALLS:








DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


✔ a. Placement of soil reinforcement, drainage devices and backfill.

Continuous GE* Placement, compaction and inspection of backfill per Section 1705A.6.1 for fills supporting foundations (Section 2 above). * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative.

b. Segmental retaining walls; inspect placement of units dowels, connectors, etc.

Continuous GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative. See DSA IR 16-3.

✔ c. Concrete retaining walls. Provide tests and inspections per CONCRETE section below.

d. Masonry retaining walls. Provide tests and inspections per MASONRY section below.

6. OTHER SOILS:



a. Soil Improvements Test GE* Submit a comprehensive report documenting final soil improvements constructed, construction observation and the results of the confirmation testing and analysis to CGS for final acceptance. * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative.

b. Inspection of Soil Improvements Continuous GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative.

c.

DSA 103-16: LISTING OF STRUCTURAL TESTS & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS (Concrete), 2016 CBCApplication Number:03-119964





DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


7. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Table 1705A.3, ACI 318-14 Sections 26.12 & 26.13



Material Verification and Testing:

✔ a. Verify use of required design mix. Periodic SI Table 1705A.3 Item 5, 1910A.1 (1909.2.3 for DSA-CC)

✔ b. Identifiy, sample, and test reinforcing steel. Test LOR 1910A.2 (1909.2.4 for DSA-CC); ACI 318-14 Section 26.6.1.2. DSA IR 17-10.16 (See Appendix for exemptions.)

✔ c. During concrete placement, fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine the temperature of the concrete.

Test LOR Table 1705A.3 Item 6; ACI 318-14 Sections 26.5 & 26.12

✔ d. Test concrete (f'c). Test LOR 1905A.1.16 (1909.3.7 for DSA-CC); ACI 318-14 Section 26.12.

Inspection:

✔ e. Batch plant inspection: Continuous See Notes SI Default of 'Continuous' per 1705A.3.3; If approved by DSA, batch plant inspection may be reduced to 'Periodic' subject to requirements in Section 1705A.3.3.1, or eliminated per 1705A.3.3.2. (See Appendix for exemptions.)

✔ f. Welding of reinforcing steel. Provide special inspection per STEEL, category 19.1(d) & (e) and/or 19.2(g) & (h) below.

8. PRESTRESSED / POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE (in addition to Cast-in-Place Concrete tests and inspections):






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)




a. Sample and test prestressing tendons and anchorages.

Test LOR 1705A.3.4, 1910A.3 (1909.2.5 for DSA-CC)

b. Inspect placement of prestressing tendons. Periodic SI 1705A.3.4, Table 1705A.3 Items 1 & 9.

c. Verify in-situ concrete strength prior to stressing of post-tensioning tendons.

Periodic SI Table 1705A.3 Item 11. Special inspector to verify specified concrete strength test prior to stressing.

d. Inspect application of post-tensioning or prestressing forces and grouting of bonded prestressing tendons.

Continuous SI 1705A.3.4, Table 1705A.3 Item 9; ACI 318-14 Section 26.13

9. PRECAST CONCRETE (in addition to Cast-in-Place Concrete tests and inspections):



a. Inspect fabrication of precast concrete members. Continuous SI ACI 318-14 Section 26.13

b. Inspect erection of precast concrete members. Periodic SI* Table 1705A.3 Item 10;* May be performed by PI when specifically approved by DSA.

10. SHOTCRETE (in addition to Cast-in-Place Concrete tests and inspections):








DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


a. Inspect shotcrete placement for proper application techniques.

Continuous SI 1705A.19, Table 1705A.3 Item 7. See ACI 506.2-13 Section 3.4.

b. Sample and test shotcrete (f'c). Test LOR 1908A.5, 1908A.10 (1909.4 for DSA-CC)

11. POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS:



✔ a. Inspect installation of post-installed anchors See Notes SI* 1616A.1.19, Table 1705A.3 Item 4a (Continuous) & 4b (Periodic) (See Appendix for exemptions). ACI 318-14 Sections 17.8 & 26.13 * May be performed by the project inspector when specifically approved by DSA.

✔ b. Test post-installed anchors. Test LOR 1910A.5 (1909.2.7 for DSA-CC). (See Appendix for exemptions.)

12. OTHER CONCRETE:



a.

DSA 103-16: LISTING OF STRUCTURAL TESTS & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS (Steel and Aluminum), 2016 CBCApplication Number:03-119964





DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


17. STRUCTURAL STEEL, COLD-FORMED STEEL AND ALUMINUM USED FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES Table 1705A.2.1, AISC 303-10, AISC 360-10, AISC 341-10, AISC 358-10, AISI S100-07/S2-10

Material Verification:



✔ a. Verify identification of all materials and: Mill certificates indicate material properties that comply with requirements, sizes, types and grades comply with requirements.

Periodic * 2203A.1 (2203.1 for DSA-CC), Table 1705A.2.1 Item 3a-3c; AISI S100-07/S2-10 Section A2.1 & A2.2, AISI S200-12 Section A3, AISI S220-11 Section A4. *By special inspector or qualified technician when performed off-site.

✔ b. Test unidentified materials Test LOR 2203A.1 (2203.1 for DSA-CC).

✔ c. Examine seam welds of HSS shapes Periodic SI DSA IR 17-3.

Inspection:

✔ d. Verify and document steel fabrication per DSA-approved construction documents. Periodic SI Not applicable to cold-formed steel light-frame construction, except for

trusses (1705A.2.4).

18. HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTS: RCSC 2009

Material Verification of High-Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers:



✔ a. Verify identification markings and manufacturer's certificates of compliance conform to ASTM standards specified in the DSA-approved documents.

Periodic SI Table 1705A.2.1 Item 1, 2203A.1; RCSC 2009 Section 2.1. DSA IR 17-9






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


✔ b. Test high-strength bolts, nuts and washers. Test LOR 2213A.1 (2212.6.1 for DSA-CC). RCSC 2009 Section 7.2; DSA IR 17-8.16

Inspection of High-Strength Bolt Installation:

✔ c. Bearing-type (“snug tight”) connections. Periodic SI Table 1705A.2.1 Item 2a; RCSC 2009 Section 9.1. DSA IR 17-9

d. Slip-critical connections. * SI Table 1705A.2.1 Item 2b & 2c. RCSC 2009 Section 9.2 & 9.3. * “Continuous” or “Periodic” depends on the tightening method used, DSA IR 17-9 and 1705A.2.1.

19. WELDING: 1705A.2.5, Table 1705A.2.1 Items 4 & 5; DSA IR 17-3, AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8 for structural steel, AWS D1.2 for Aluminum, AWS D1.3 for cold-formed steel, AWS D1.4 for reinforcing steel. (See Appendix for exemptions.)

Verification of Materials, Equipment, Welders, etc:



✔ a. Verify weld filler material identification markings per AWS designation listed on the DSA-approved documents and the WPS.

Periodic SI DSA IR 17-3.

✔ b. Verify weld filler material manufacturer’s certificate of compliance.


✔ c. Verify WPS, welder qualifications and equipment.







DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


19.1 SHOP WELDING:



✔ a. Inspect groove welds, multi-pass fillet welds, single pass fillet welds > 5/16", plug and slot welds

Continuous SI Table 1705A.2.1 Item 5a1-4. Per AISC 360-10 (and AISC 341-10 as applicable). DSA IR 17-3.

✔ b. Inspect single-pass fillet welds ≤ 5/16”, floor and roof deck welds

Periodic SI 1705A.2.2, Table 1705A.2.1 Item 5a.5 & 5a.6. Per AISC 360-10 (and AISC 341-10 as applicable). DSA IR 17-3.

✔ c. Inspect welding of stairs and railing systems. Periodic SI 1705A.2.1. Per AISC 360-10 (and AISC 341-10 as applicable). AWS D1.1 & D1.3. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ d. Verification of reinforcing steel weldability other than ASTM A706

Periodic SI 1705A.3.1; verify carbon equivalent reported on mill certificates. AWS D1.4. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ e. Inspect welding of reinforcing steel. Continuous SI 1705A.3.1, Table 1705A.3 Item 2 and Table 1705A.2.1 Item 5b, 1903A.8. AWS D1.4. DSA IR 17-3.

19.2 FIELD WELDING:





✔ b. Inspect single-pass fillet welds ≤ 5/16” Periodic SI Table 1705A.2.1 Item 5a.5. Per AISC 360-10 (and AISC 341-10 as applicable). DSA IR 17-3.






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


✔ c. Inspect end-welded studs (ASTM A-108) installation (including bend test)

Periodic SI 2213A.2 (2212.6.2 for DSA-CC); per AISC 360-10 (and AISC 341-10 as applicable), AWS D1.1. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ d. Inspect floor and roof deck welds Periodic SI 1705A.2.2, Table 1705A.2.1 Item 5a.6; per AISC 360 (and AISC 341 as applicable) & AWS D1.3. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ e. Inspect welding of structural cold-formed steel Periodic SI* 1705A.2.5; AWS D1.3. * May be performed by the project inspector when specifically approved by DSA. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ f. Inspect welding of stairs and railing systems Periodic SI* 1705A.2.1; Per AISC 360-10 (and AISC 341-10 as applicable). AWS D1.1 & D1.3. DSA IR 17-3. * May be performed by the project inspector when specifically approved by DSA.

✔ g. Verification of reinforcing steel weldability Periodic SI 1705A.3.1; verify carbon equivalent reported on mill certificates. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ h. Inspect welding of reinforcing steel. Continuous SI 1705A.3.1, Table 1705A.3 Item 2 and Table 1705A.2.1 Item 5b, 1903A.8. AWS D1.4. DSA IR 17-3.

20. NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING:

Test or Special Inspection Type Performed By Code References and Notes

✔ a. Ultrasonic Test LOR 1705A.2.1 & 1705A.2.5. AISC 360-10 N5.5, AISC 341-10 J6.2. AWS D1.1 and D1.8. ANSI/ASNT CP-189, SNT-TC-1A. DSA IR 17-2.

✔ b. Magnetic Particle Test LOR 1705A.2.1 & 1705A.2.5. AISC 360-10 N5.5, AISC 341-10 J6.2. AWS D1.1 and D1.8. ANSI/ASNT CP-189, SNT-TC-1A. DSA IR 17-2.

✔ c. Shop Welding - Inspect Welding of Cold Formed Steel Test LOR






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


21. STEEL JOISTS AND TRUSSES:



✔ a. Verify size, type and grade for all chord and web members as well as connectors and weld filler material; verify joist profile, dimensions and camber (if applicable); verify all weld locations, lengths and profiles; mark or tag each joist.

Continuous SI 1705A.2.3, Table 1705A.2.3; AWS D1.1 and DSA IR 22-3 for steel joists only. 1705A.2.4; AWS D1.3 for cold-formed steel trusses.

22. SPRAY APPLIED FIRE-PROOFING:



a. Examine structural steel surface conditions, inspect application, take samples, measure thickness and verify compliance of all aspects of application with DSA-approved documents.

Periodic SI 1705A.14

b. Test bond strength. Test LOR 1705A.14.6

c. Test density. Test LOR 1705A.14.5

23. ANCHOR BOLTS AND ANCHOR RODS:






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)




✔ a. Anchor Bolts and Anchor Rods Test LOR IR 17-11 Sample and test anchor bolts and anchor rods not readily identifiable.

✔ b. Threaded rod not used for foundation anchorage.

Test LOR Sample and test threaded rods not readily identifiable per procedures noted in IR 17-11

Other Steel

Test or Special InspectionType Performed

ByCode References and Notes

a.

DSA 103-16: LISTING OF STRUCTURAL TESTS & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS (Other), 2016 CBCApplication Number:03-119964





DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


26. OTHER:



a. Load test for identified product(s): Test LOR 1709A.2 and 1709A.3. Testing is not required for: 1) a product with a valid evaluation service report per DSA IR A-5, or 2) a product that can be justified by structural calculation.

b. Installation torque for non-HS bolts Continuous SI* Applicable to communication towers identified as Essential Service Facility Projects (ESFP). Calibrated wrench use required, verified by SI during installation. *EXCEPTION: Non-ESFP may use PI without need for notification to DSA.

✔ c. High Strength Threaded Rod Test SI 2212A.1

Appendix: Work Exempt from DSA Requirements for Structural Tests / Special InspectionsApplication Number:03-119964





DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


Exempt items given in IR A-22 or the 2016 CBC (including DSA amendments) and those items identified below with a check mark by the design professional are NOT subject to DSA requirements for the structural tests / special inspections noted. Items marked as exempt shall be identified on the approved construction documents. The project inspector shall verify all construction complies with the approved construction documents.

SOILS:

1. Deep foundations acting as a cantilever footing designed based on minimum allowable pressures per CBC Table 1806A.2 and having no geotechnical report for the following cases: A) free standing sign or scoreboard, B) cell or antenna towers and poles less than 35'-0" tall (e.g., lighting poles, flag poles, poles supporting open mesh fences, etc.), C) single-story structure with dead load less than 5 psf (e.g., open fabric shade structure), or D) covered walkway structure with an apex height less than 10'-0" above adjacent grade.

2. Shallow foundations, etc. are exempt from special inspections and testing by a Geotechnical Engineer for the following cases: A) buildings without a geotechnical report and meeting the exception item #1 criteria in CBC Section 1803A.2 supported by native soil (any excavation depth) or fill soil (not exceeding 12" depth per CBC Section 1804A.6), B) soil scarification/recompaction not exceeding 12" depth, C) native or fill soil supporting exterior non-structural flatwork (e.g., sidewalks, site concrete ramps, site stairs, parking lots, driveways, etc.), D) unpaved landscaping and playground areas, or E) utility trench backfill.

CONCRETE/MASONRY:

1. Post-installed anchors for the following: A) exempt non-structural components (e.g., mechanical, electrical, plumbing equipment - see item 7 for "Welding") given in CBC Section 1616A.1.18 (which replaces ASCE 7-10, Section 13.1.4) or B) interior nonstructural wall partitions meeting criteria listed in exempt item 3 for "Welding."

2. Concrete batch plant inspection is not required for items given in CBC Section 1705A.3.3.2 subject to the requirements and limitations in that section.






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


3. Non-bearing non-shear masonry walls may be exempt from certain DSA masonry testing and special inspection items as allowed per IR 21-1.16. Refer to construction documents for specific exemptions accordingly for each applicable wall condition.

4. Epoxy shear dowels in site flatwork and/or other non-structural concrete.

5. Testing of reinforcing bars is not required for items given in CBC Section 1910A.2 subject to the requirements and limitations in that section.

Welding:

1. Solid-clad and open-mesh gates with maximum leaf span or rolling section for rolling gates of 10' and apex height less than 8’-0” above lowest adjacent grade. When located above circulation or occupied space below, these gates are not located within 1.5x gate/fence height (max 8'-0") to the edge of floor or roof.

2. Handrails, guardrails, and modular or relocatable ramps associated with walking surfaces less than 30” above adjacent grade (excluding post base connections per the 'Exception' language in Section 1705A.2.1); fillet welds cannot be ground flush.

3. Non-structural interior cold-formed steel framing spanning less than 15'-0", such as in interior partitions, interior soffits, etc. supporting only self weight and light-weight finishes or adhered tile, masonry, stone, or terra cotta veneer no more than 5/8" thickness and apex less than 20'-0" in height and not over an exit way. Maximum tributary load to a member shall not exceed the equivalent of that occurring from a 10'x10' opening in a 15' tall wall for a header or king stud.

4. Manufactured support frames and curbs using hot rolled or cold-formed steel (i.e., light gauge) for mechanical, electrical, or plumbing equipment weighing less than 2000# (equipment only) (connections of such frames to superstructure elements using welding will require special inspection as noted in selected item(s) 19, 19.1 and/or 19.2 located in the Steel/Aluminum category).

5. Manufactured components (e.g., Tolco, B-Line, Afcon, etc.) for mechanical, electrical, or plumbing hanger support and bracing (connections of such components to superstructure elements using welding will require special inspection as noted in selected item(s) for section 19, 19.1 and/or 19.2 located in the Steel/Aluminum category).






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


6. TV Brackets, projector mounts with a valid listing (see DSA IR A-5) and recreational equipment (e.g., playground structures, basketball backstops, etc.) (connections of such elements to superstructure elements using welding will require special inspection as noted in selected item(s) for section 19, 19.1 and/or 19.2 located in the Steel/Aluminum category).

7. Any support for exempt non-structural components given in CBC Section 1616A.1.18 (which replaces ASCE 7-10, Section 13.1.4) meeting the following: A) when supported on a floor/roof, <400# and resulting composite center of mass (including component's center of mass) ≤4' above supporting floor/roof, B) when hung from a wall or roof/floor, <20# for discrete units or <5 plf for distributed systems.

DSA 103-16: LISTING OF STRUCTURAL TESTS & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS(SIGNATURE), 2016 CBCApplication Number:03-119964





DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


Name of Architect or Engineer in general responsible charge:

Name of Structural Engineer (When structural design has been delegated):

Signature of Architect or Structural Engineer: Date:

Note: To facilitate DSA electronic mark-ups and identification stamp application, DSA recommends against using secured electronic or digital signatures.

DSA STAMP

11/12/2020

Vincent Petito

DSAD E P A R T M E N T O F G E N E R A L S E R V I C E S

DIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECTDSADIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECTDSADIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECTDSADIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECT

IDENTIFICATION STAMP DIV. OF THE STATE ARCHITECT

APP: INC:REVIEWED FOR

SS FLS ACS

DATE:

✔ ✔ ✔

03-119964

11/20/2020

DSA 103-16: LIST OF REQUIRED VERIFIED REPORTS, CBC 2016Application Number:03-119964





DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


1. Soils Testing and Inspection: Geotechnical Verified Report Form DSA 293

2. Structural Testing and Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291

3. Concrete Batch Plant Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291

4. Post-installed Anchors: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291, or, for independently contracting SI, Special Inspection Verified Report Form DSA 292

5. Shop Welding Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291, or, for independently contracting SI, Special Inspection Verified Report Form DSA 292

6. Field Welding Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291, or, for independently contracting SI, Special Inspection Verified Report Form DSA 292

7. High-Strength Bolt Installation Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291, or, for independently contracting SI, Special Inspection Verified Report Form DSA 292

8. Steel Joist Fabrication Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291, or, for independently contracting SI, Special Inspection Verified Report Form DSA 292

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL IMPORT MATERIALS TESTING PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT 01 45 24-1 DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020

SECTION 01 45 24

IMPORT MATERIALS TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the requirements for the sampling, testing, transportation and certification of imported fill materials to school sites.

B. This Specification defines:

1. CONTRACTOR requirements for use of imported materials on project sites.

2. CONTRACTOR requirements for stockpiling materials for use on project sites.

3. Testing requirements for all materials imported, stockpiled or generated for use on a project site.

4. CONTRACTOR testing and reporting requirements.

5. CONTRACTOR submittal requirements

C. Provisions of the General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this section.

1.02 OBJECTIVES

A. Ensure that fill materials imported to project sites are safe for students, staff and visitors.

B. Ensure that representative data be collected so that analytical determinations can be made in regard to the first objective.

C. Require CONTRACTOR to contract with and pay for the services of a licensed environmental professional (licensed State of California Professional Engineer [PE Civil], Professional Geologist [PG] or Registered Environmental Assessor II [REA II]) familiar with environmental site assessment and waste classification.

D. Require CONTRACTOR to contract with and pay for an independent, approved California Department of Health Services certified testing laboratory to perform sampling and testing of imported and site generated fill materials.

E. Require CONTRACTOR to pay all fees required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

F. Require CONTRACTOR to post bonds required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit to OWNER’S Authorized Representative (OAR):


1. A qualifications statement for CONTRACTOR’s independent California certified testing laboratory and required licensed environmental professional (California Professional Engineer [PE civil]), Professional Geologist [PG] or Registered Environmental Assessor II [REA II]) prior to the start of Work. CONTRACTOR’s licensed environmental professional must possess recent demonstrated environmental experience in soil sampling and waste classification.

a. Testing laboratory must be pre-approved by the Division of State Architect.

2. A draft import Sampling Strategy Plan (SSP) prepared by CONTRACTOR’s licensed environmental professional for review and concurrence by the OAR. The objective of the SSP is to obtain representative sample data. The Draft SSP must be submitted at least 72 hours prior to all proposed import sampling activities.

a. At a minimum, the Draft SSP shall include a site map which shows the location of the proposed import and the location and number of the proposed stockpile samples. The draft SSP shall also contain information pertaining to the total volume of the stockpile proposed for sampling and the rationale in support of the proposed sampling approach. Existing environmental documentation specific to the import site shall be utilized by the CONTRACTOR’s environmental professional to support the proposed sampling approach and analytical method suite. For new project sites, this information would include a DTSC approved site investigation report, e.g., Preliminary Environmental Assessment (PEA). It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to request this information in advance from the OAR if they do not already have access to a copy at the jobsite.

b. Lacking this information or rationale, samples shall be analyzed for all analytical methods described in Section 3.01. Guidance for the minimum number of samples per stockpile volume is provided in Table 1 (supplemental samples may be required by the OAR if pothole stockpile sampling is utilized.). In addition, the draft SSP shall contain all necessary contact information for the import site and a proposed schedule for the sampling activities.

c. To expedite the review process, the Draft SSP shall be submitted electronically to the OAR in MS WORD format.

d. Upon revision of the draft SSP by the CONTRACTOR’s licensed environmental professional and acceptance by the OAR, four revised copies of the final SSP will be provided to the OAR for distribution to OEHS and the project file.

3. A draft Certification/Sample Data Report prepared by CONTRACTOR’s licensed environmental professional for review and concurrence. At a minimum the draft Certification/Sample Data Report shall contain:

a. a site map showing the location of the stockpile and stockpile sample locations;


b. a detailed discussion and evaluation of the laboratory results;

c. a summary of findings and recommendations that provide a determination on the waste classification of the subject materials, based on the representative sample results;

d. recommendations for additional steps, if any;

e. a chain-of-custody forms and all laboratory data with respective QA/QC sheets.

f. To expedite the review process, the Draft SSP shall be submitted electronically to the OAR in MS WORD format.

g. Upon revision of the draft Certification Report by the CONTRACTOR’S licensed environmental professional and acceptance by the OAR, three copies of the final report will be submitted to the OAR.

4. The Environmental Compliance Manager shall confirm that the proposed waste classification for the proposed import material is appropriate.

5. Written documentation, in the form of a memo or e-mail from CONTRACTOR to OAR, prior to import, verifying that the hauling contract specifies “clean” trucks and that the actual haul trucks utilized for import activities will be clean of visible contamination or deleterious materials.

6. Written documentation that the trucks went directly from the source location to the recipient location with no detours or stops at other locations and that short loads were not augmented by other materials that were not tested as part of the final import SSP. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to document that no other trips or short-load augmentation occurred and submit to the documentation within five (5) business days of the completion of the import activities. All import transportation activities shall be conducted in accordance with all applicable (local, State, Federal) rules and regulations.

7. The independent approved testing laboratory shall perform the required tests and report results of all tests noting if the tested material passed or failed such tests and shall furnish copies to the IOR, Architect, OAR, DSA, Contractor, and others as required. Report shall state tests were conducted under the responsible charge of a licensed State of California professional engineer and the material was tested in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, Title 24, CCR and the DSA. Upon completion of the Work of this section, the independent testing laboratory and geotechnical engineer shall submit a verified report to DSA as required by Title 24, CCR.

8. Certification, in the form of haul tickets or completed waste manifests, documenting the volume and recipient of all import materials and activities. This documentation shall be coordinated through the OAR Environmental Compliance Manager.


a. For approved import to new project sites, unregulated facilities (landfill) or non-project sites, haul tickets may be utilized, but shall contain the following minimum information:

1) date of haul activity

2) address of source

3) address of recipient

4) load volume

5) time of departure from source

6) time of arrival at recipient site

7) signature of recipient or recipient’s agent

1.04 APPROVALS

A. NO import of earth or geotechnical grading or fill materials can occur at the project site without PRIOR approval by the OAR.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Imported

1. Soils: Soils proposed for import shall be tested pursuant to the requirements of this Section.

2. Gravels: Clean gravel, consisting of native rock from a commercial source, shall be tested pursuant to the requirements of this Section. Refer to Item 2.01.B, this Section, for the list of pre-tested sites

3. Sands: Clean sand from a commercial source shall be tested pursuant to the requirements of this Section. CONTRACTOR shall provide written documentation, which identifies the source, volume and proposed transport date(s) of the material for review. Refer to Item 2.01.B, this Section, for the list of pre-tested sites:

4. Miscellaneous Material: No miscellaneous material containing crushed concrete, asphalt, construction debris, or other potential deleterious materials may be utilized or imported to the project site for use as fill or grading material.

B. Pre-Tested Sites:

Vulcan Materials Company 1709 Sherbon Street Corona, CA 92879 Materials Tested: Sand, CAB, and 3/4 " Rock


LB Crushing Company 3100 Horseless Carriage Road Norco, CA Materials Tested: Sand El Toro Materials Rocky Road & Portola Parkway Lake Forest, CA Materials Tested: Sand Hanson Aggregates North America-Inland Plant 12000 Banyan Street Rancho Cucamonga CA 91730 Materials Tested: Sand Hanson Aggregates North America-Irwindale 13550 Live Oak Avenue Irwindale, CA 91706 Materials Tested: Sand Inland Empire Regional Composting Authority (IERCA) 12645 Sixth Street Rancho Cucamonga, CA 91739 Materials Tested: Top Soil and Mulch

C. Import of fill Materials:

1. Fees: CONTRACTOR shall pay as required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

2. Bonds: CONTRACTOR shall post as required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GRADING/EXCAVATION

A. If the Contractor encounters an area(s) with discolored, stained, and/or odorous soils or any other evidence of contamination during excavation/grading work, Contractor must immediately notify District Representative, cease work in the aforementioned area(s), and secure the area(s) with fencing, tape, stakes or other suitable means to prevent entry by personnel or equipment. In turn, the District Representative which will initiate a construction response to address the contamination, in accordance with pertinent regulatory requirements.

3.02 SAMPLING AND TESTING

A. CONTRACTOR shall contract with, and pay for, the services of a licensed environmental professional (licensed State of California Professional Engineer [PE Civil], Professional Geologist [PG] or Registered Environmental Assessor II [REA II]).


B. CONTRACTOR shall contract with, and pay for, an independent, approved California Department of Health Services certified testing laboratory to perform sampling and testing of imported, exported and site generated fill materials. [Note: Utilization of portable, onsite crushing equipment on the project site also requires prior notification and approval by the OAR].

C. All imported fill/grading material, unless otherwise specified in writing by the OAR, must be tested at the site of origin. Import testing and certification process shall include the following steps:

1. Stockpile all materials for sampling (standard stockpile or backhoe pothole stockpile). Crushed fill materials generated by CONTRACTOR at a project site must be segregated by material (e.g., separate stockpiles for concrete, asphalt, etc.).

2. Submit Draft SSP for review and concurrence by OAR.

3. Collect and analyze samples (see Table 1 for number of samples per volume) per SSP. Once fill materials for export have been stockpiled and tested, they may not be used onsite for any purpose without prior approval by the OAR.

4. Submit draft import sample data report for review and concurrence by the OAR.

5. Submit final import sample data report (Certification Report) to the OAR’s Environmental Compliance Manager for concurrence of proposed waste classification.

6. Submit required pre import documentation/record to the OAR (e-mail).

7. Submit post import certifications to the OAR.

8. In addition to the preceding, requirements, certifications and submittals as indicated in previous subsections above.

D. OWNER retains the right to refuse any fill material proposed for use at a project site.

E. Import fill materials shall be stockpiled by CONTRACTOR and are deemed acceptable for import or reuse only when it is demonstrated to the satisfaction of the OAR’s Environmental Compliance Manager that the subject materials meet the requirements of this Section (01440).

F. As described in Section 1.03B, lacking site-specific data or sample rationale to support a more focused analytical approach; the CONTRACTOR shall analyze all samples for the following substances according to the methods indicated below. Table 3 is a waste classification flowchart for use by CONTRACTOR’s environmental professional. In all cases, detection levels and quality assurance/quality control methods shall be in accordance with standard Method reporting limits and best laboratory practices and the following USEPA (EPA) methods:

1. Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons, utilizing EPA Method 8015M, for gasoline and diesel.

2. Volatile Organic Compounds, utilizing EPA Method 8260B/5035.


3. Polychlorinated biphenyls, utilizing EPA Method 8082.

4. Semi-Volatile Compounds, utilizing EPA Method 8270C.

5. Organochlorine Pesticides, utilizing EPA Method 8081A.

6. Organophosphorous Pesticides, utilizing EPA Method 8141A.

7. Chlorinated Herbicides, utilizing EPA Method 8151A.

8. California Code of Regulations Title 22 (CAM 17) Metals, utilizing EPA Method 6010B/7470A.

9. Hexavalent Chromium, utilizing EPA Method 7199.

10. Arsenic/Thallium, utilizing EPA Method 6020.

G. Import fill material may be deemed defective for use by the OAR at the project site if any of the following results are obtained:

1. Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons are present at concentrations exceeding 100 milligrams per kilogram (mg/kg) for gasoline and 1,000 mg/kg for oil/diesel and long chain hydrocarbons.

2. Solvents and other volatile organic compounds are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

3. Polychlorinated biphenyls are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

4. Semi-volatile compounds are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

5. Organochlorine pesticides are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

6. Organophosphorous pesticides are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

7. Chlorinated herbicides are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

8. California Code of Regulations Title 22 (CAM 17) Metals at concentrations exceeding site-specific background.

9. Hexavalent chromium is present at concentrations exceeding 15 mg/kg.

H. In addition to screening for hazardous materials, the imported soil must be tested and certified to be free of:

1. Organics and debris;

2. Infestation by vermin or insects, in particular fire ants;


3. Boron.

I. Imported materials must be suitable for engineered fill, even if used at landscaping, free from large rocks.

J. Imported materials shall not have a high clay content and must meet the permeability requirements of the projects hardscape if there is such requirement.

K. Evaluate concentrations of metals in import fill by conducting the analysis set forth below.

1. Compare the maximum detected metal concentrations in import fill samples to the Threshold Criteria listed in Table 4. If any metal concentration exceeds its listed background value, the fill material fails and shall be deemed defective and unacceptable for use at the project site unless supported by a site specific health risk assessment.

2. In addition to section 3.01.G.1, import fill shall be deemed environmentally defective and unacceptable for use if any of the following results are obtained:

a. Arsenic concentrations exceed 12.0 mg/kg.

b. Lead concentration exceeds 255 mg/kg or fails TTLC/STLC.

c. Import materials at new project sites with total chromium concentrations greater than or equal to 100 mg/kg shall be tested for hexavalent chromium.

L. All import fill material shall be characterized, handled, and documented in accordance with applicable US EPA and State of California hazardous waste and hazardous materials regulations (See Table 2). For the purpose of this specification, “contaminated” shall mean any soil or geotechnical material at a concentration, which would require disposal at a regulated facility (i.e., California hazardous or RCRA hazardous). OAR must be notified at least 72 hours prior to the disposal of any hazardous waste or hazardous material. No material disposal or reuse can take place without prior written approval of the OAR.

M. Specification test results and OAR approvals shall be valid for a period of 120 days from the date of the subject testing unless a variance is requested by CONTRACTOR and approved by OAR. Previously approved materials shall not be utilized or disposed offsite after the 120 day limit without prior review and approval by the OAR.

N. Requests for variances to this Specification shall be submitted in writing to the OAR a minimum of two weeks in advance of need for review and approval. The request for variance must provide all available testing data, a rationale to support the request and have an active funding line (provided by OAR) to facilitate review by the OAR. OAR will review the request for variance and will provide its preliminary determination within two weeks. Certain requests may require final approval by the Department of Toxic Substances Control (DTSC).


O. Soils with concentrations above Section 01440 screening levels may, upon prior approval by the OAR, may be reused at other project sites if supported by a site-specific human health risk assessment.

P. Details of the samples and testing must be submitted to and approved by the OAR’s Environmental Compliance Manager before transportation.

Q. Haul Routes and Regulations/Restrictions: CONTRACTOR must comply with requirements of project EIR (CEQA) and authorities having jurisdiction over the project area and the proposed activities (e.g. Regional Water Quality Control Board, Department of Toxic Substances Control, etc.).

3.03 TRANSPORTATION

A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all fees required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

B. Contractor shall pay all fees for disposal and/or processing of contaminated and/or hazardous fill materials at a regulated facility.

C. CONTRACTOR shall post and pay for all bonds required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

TABLE 1: MINIMUM SAMPLING FREQUENCY

Volume (Cubic Yards)

Sampling Frequency

0 – 1,000 1 per 250 CY

1,001 - 5,000 4 samples per first 1,000 CY and 1 sample per each additional 500 CY

Greater then 5,000 12 samples for first 5000 CY and 1 sample per each additional 1,000 CY


TABLE 2 WASTE CHARACTERIZATION

Chemicals of Potential Concern

Hazardous Waste if Exceed

Criteria - TTLC Level* (mg/kg)

Additional WET

Leaching Tests if Exceed

Hazardous Waste

Criteria - 10 times

STLC Level** (mg/kg)

California-Regulated Hazardous

Waste - Soluble

Threshold Limit

Concentration -STLC

Level (mg/l)

Additional TCLP

Leaching Tests if Exceed Hazardous

Waste Criteria -

20 times TCLP Level**

(mg/kg)

Federally-Regulated (RCRA) Hazardous Waste - Toxicity

Characteristic Leaching Procedure - TCLP Level

(mg/l)

CAM 17 Metals

Antimony 500 150 15 NA NA

Arsenic 500 50 5 100 5 Barium 10,000 1,000 100 2,000 100 Beryllium 75 7.5 0.75 NA NA Cadmium 100 10 1 20 1 Chromium 2,500 50 5 100 5 Cobalt 8,000 800 80 NA NA Copper 2,500 250 25 NA NA Lead 1,000 50 5 100 5 Mercury 20 2 0.2 4 0.2 Molybdenum 3,500 3,500 350 NA NA Nickel 2,000 200 20 NA NA Selenium 100 10 1 20 1 Silver 500 50 5 100 5 Thallium 700 70 7 NA NA Vanadium 2,400 240 24 NA NA Zinc 5,000 2,500 250 NA NA

Chromium (VI) 500 50 5 NA NA


TABLE 3 – WASTE CLASSIFICATION FLOWCHART


TABLE 4: THRESHOLD CRITERIA FOR METALS IN SOIL - LOOK UP VALUES

CAM 17 Metals Soil Threshold Criteria (mg/kg) Basis

Antimony 28 NC Arsenic 11.3 BK Barium 2330 NC Beryllium 16 C Cadmium 1.4 C Chromium 106656 NC Cobalt 4266 NC Copper 2631 NC Lead 255 PbB Mercury 21 NC Molybdenum 356 NC Nickel 148 C Selenium 356 NC Silver 356 NC Thallium 4.7 NC Vanadium 498 NC Zinc 21331 NC

NC = noncancer health effects BK = background C = cancer risk PbB = blood lead levels

END OF SECTION

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL STORM WATER PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT POLLUTION PREVENTION CONTROL DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 01 57 23 -1

SECTION 01 57 23

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION CONTROL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following: 1. Requirements for compliance with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)

developed specifically for this Project are the responsibility of the Contractor. a. SWPPP satisfies the mandates of Federal Clean Water Act as enforced by State of

California Water Resources Control Board and its Regional Water Quality Boards. b. In accordance with the State Water Resources Control Board’s (SWRCB) General

Construction Activities Storm Water Permit, Order No. 2009-0009-DWQ, NPDES No. CAS000002, the SWPPP Major objective is to:

(1) Identify the sources of sediment and other pollutants that affect the quality of storm water discharges (2) Describe and ensure the implementation of BMPs to reduce or eliminate sediment and other pollutants in storm water as well as non-storm water discharges.

B. Related Sections 1. SWPPP requires compliance of all trades on Project that use or manipulate materials of any

nature which can potentially enter storm-water drainage system. 2. Representative materials controlled by SWPPP include erosion of native soils and fill

materials, groundwater, leakage or spills from construction vehicles and machinery, stored fuels, concrete truck washout, chemical treatments, curing, compounds, paints, plasters, paving materials, adhesives and sealants, trash and general construction debris, pesticides, fertilizers, and any other material which can be carried by running water or percolate into earth.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Closeout Submittals: Submit to owner documentation certifying compliance with the SWPPP, site monitoring reports, and notification of Agencies of completion of operations as required by the General Construction Permit.

B. Prepare and Submit Notice of Intent Application with the RWQCB.

C. Prepare and submit to owner 3 copies of the SWPPP plan. 1. The SWPPP must be prepared by A Qualified SWPPP Developer (QSD) certified by the

RWQCB, as required by the General Construction Permit. 2. Implementation and report processing of the SWPPP shall be conducted by a Qualified

SWPPP Practitioner as required by the General Construction Permit.

1.3 REGULATORY BACKGROUND

A. After January 1, 2001, as required by Federal Water Pollution Control Act (Clean Water Act) and regulations of U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and of State of California Water Resources Control Board, any construction activity of ONE acre or more must be covered by National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit.

B. The Act further decrees fines of as much as $27,500 per day per violation.

C. It is implicit that SWPPP satisfies requirements of NPDES permit.


D. If Owner is cited for violation of Clean Water Act due to failure of SWPPP to address requirement, Contractor shall be liable for any fines or penalties that might be imposed by regulatory agency, he shall be obligated to perform mandated corrective measures at his own expense.

E. If Owner, Architect, or Owner's Inspector becomes aware of violations of SWPPP, they will immediately inform Contractor in writing. Contractor shall immediately cease violation and shall restore site, at his own expense, to same conditions it was in before violation, to approval of Owner.

F. Should Contractor continue to violate requirements of SWPPP, or refuse to comply, or refuse to repair results of violation to Owner's approval, for purposes of this Contract it shall be considered as any other violation of Contract. Owner will take necessary measures as set forth in General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide all temporary and permanent storm water pollution prevention equipment, material, and facilities as required by or as necessary to comply with the SWPPP to meet the General Construction Permit requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 IMPLEMENTATION

A. Measures required in SWPPP shall be executed as dictated by SWPPP itself.

B. Contractor shall prepare and submit Notice of Intent to comply with terms of this General Permit prior to commencement of construction activity. 1. An annual fee of $700.00 or amount required by the agency, paid by Contractor shall

accompany Notice of Intent. Notice of Intent will not be processed if not accompanied by fee. 2. Send Notice of Intent and annual fee to:

State Water Resources Control Board (SWRCB) Division of Water Quality Attention: Storm Water Section, Permit Unit P.O. Box 1977 Sacramento, CA 95812-1977.

3. Copies of General Permit and Notice of Intent form may be obtained from California Regional Water Control Board, Santa Ana Region, 2010 Iowa Avenue, Suite 100, Riverside, CA 92507-2409, 951/782-4130.

4. Concurrent with commencement of construction activities, Contractor shall develop, implement and retain at project site, a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and a monitoring program and reporting plan in accordance with the General Permit.

5. The Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan and Monitoring Program Checklist is provided by

the CA SWRCB to aid in the preparation of the SWPPP. It can be obtained from:

SWRCB, Division of Water Quality 1001 I Street, Sacramento, California 95814 Or online from http://www.waterboards.ca.gov/water_issues/programs/stormwater/constpermits.shtml

C. Contractor shall be responsible for paying the necessary permit fees and complying with State Water Resources Control Board Order No. 2009-009-DWQ, implementing provisions of the Clean Water Act relating to storm water discharges.

D. Contractor must obtain the necessary permits from the State Water Resources Control Board and


develop and implement Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan in accordance with the State Water Resources Control Board requirements prior to commencing any portion of construction which will disturb land (i.e.; excavation, grading, etc.).

E. The plan shall address all potential sources of pollutants which may enter the storm water system, it must explain what steps will be taken during construction to minimize the risk of storm water contamination and must address management procedures to be utilized during construction to prevent pollution discharges such as spills, leaking, and dumping.

F. A copy of said plan shall be provided to owner and upon request contractor shall certify, in writing, compliance with the relevant rules, regulations and laws.

G. Additional information regarding State Water Resources Control Board requirements can be obtained from State Water Resources Control Board, Division of Water Quality, Attention: Storm Water Permit Unit, P.O. Box 1977, Sacramento, CA 95812-1977. Telephone Number (916) 657-1146.

H. During construction, make changes as necessary for proper functioning of SWPPP measures.

I. At completion of work, Contractor shall remove temporary SWPPP measures and dispose of any pollutants in legal manner offsite, or as otherwise required by SWPPP

3.2 PERFORMANCE

A. Minimum Water Quality Protection Requirements 1. The Contractor is required to meet the following minimum standards of good housekeeping:

a. Eroded sediments and other pollutants must be retained on site and may not be transported from the site via sheet flow, swales, area drains, natural drainage, or wind.

b. Stockpiles of earth and other construction-related materials must be protected from being transported from the site by wind or water.

c. Fuels, oils, solvents, and other toxic materials must be stored in accordance with their listing and are not to contaminate the soil nor the surface waters. All approved toxic storage containers are to be protected from the weather. Spills must be cleaned up immediately and disposed of in a proper manner. Spills may not be washed into the drainage system.

d. Excess or waste concrete may not be washed into the public way or any drainage system. Provisions shall be made to retain concrete wastes on-site until they can be appropriately disposed of or recycled.

e. Trash and construction-related solid wastes must be deposited into a covered receptacle to prevent contamination of rainwater and dispersal by wind.

f. Sediments and other materials may not be tracked from the site by vehicle traffic. The construction entrance roadways must be stabilized so as to inhibit sediments from being deposited into the public ways. Accidental depositions must be swept up immediately and may not be washed down by rain or by any other means.

B. Wet Weather Erosion Control Plan (WWECP) 1. The Contractor shall prepare a Wet Weather Erosion Control Plan (WWECP) and implement

Best Management Practices (BMPs) necessary.

C. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan 1. The Contractor shall prepare applicable sections and comply with The Stormwater Pollution

Prevention Plan (SWPPP). The contractor shall complete and submit the Notice of Intent to construct under the California Construction General Permit (NPDES). The Contractor shall implement Best Management Practices (BMPs) necessary to control stormwater pollution from sediments, erosion, and construction materials leaving the construction site.

2. The BMPs contained in the Development Best Management Practices Handbook – Part A, Construction Activities cover the following categories of construction activities: a. Site preparation/earth removal b. Underground structures


c. Aboveground structures d. Roadways, walkways and parking lots e. Planting and landscaping

3. The SWPPP document shall include the following information: a. The name, location, period of construction, and a brief description of the Project. b. Contact information for the Contractor, including name, address, and telephone

number. c. Name, location, and description of any environmentally sensitive areas located on or

adjoining the Project. d. A list of major construction materials, waste, and activities. e. A list of BMPs to be used to control pollutant discharges from major construction

materials, wastes, and activities. f. A site plan (a construction plan may be used) indicating the location of BMPs where

appropriate. g. A developer’s certification statement that all required and selected BMPs will be

effectively implemented. 4. Whenever the Contractor is required to get any type of permit from the Department of Building

and Safety (DBAS), the Contractor shall submit the SWPPP document to the DBAS for review and approval before obtaining the permit. If the Contractor does not need any type of permit from the DBAS, the Contractor shall submit the SWPPP document to the Architect for review and approval. At least one copy of the approved SWPPP shall be kept at the construction site and accessible to City inspectors.

5. The Contractor may prepare the SWPPP by following the format in Chapter 2 of the BMP Handbook. The publication is available from the following websites:

State Water Resources Control Board Website: http://www.swrcb.ca.gov/water_issues/programs/stormwater/gen_const.shtml#const_permit

California Stormwater Quality Association http://www.cabmphandbooks.com

END OF SECTION 01 57 23

http://www.swrcb.ca.gov/water_issues/programs/stormwater/gen_const.shtml#const_permit


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SHCHOOL EXECUTION PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT 017300-1 DIVISION 1 SUPPLEMENT

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by licensed land surveyor.

E. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities service Project site.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

C. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

4. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

5. Verify field dimensions. 6. Test surfaces where the surface dryness is in question with a current moisture-indicating

device.

D. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions and the responsibility for any corrective work required due to faulty base surfaces or improper conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.


B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect .

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Owner . Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Owners Project Inspector before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.


C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in

unoccupied spaces. 5. Install materials, products and equipment such that manufacturer’s labels do not appear

on exposed surfaces of the finished work, except in unfinished portions of the building such as mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Install materials, products and equipment so they are readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from Drawings may be made to accomplish required accessibility, but changes involving extra cost shall not be made without prior written approval.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.


H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.

1. Comply with Section 017700 for repairing or removing and replacing defective Work.

K. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Owner-Furnished Owner-Installed Products:

1. Products indicated as "O.F.O.I." (Owner Furnished, Owner Installed) will be furnished and installed by the Owner. Mechanical and electrical service lines and support systems for such products, where indicated, shall be included in the Contract Sum. Final connections from service lines to the equipment will be provided by the Owner, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.

C. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Place waste materials in containers provided for this purpose. 4. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

5. Provide sufficient quantity of waste containers on Site and on each floor of building and in each work area for collection of waste materials, rubbish and debris.


a. Refer to Section 017419 for additional requirements for waste containers for recycling of waste materials.

6. Lower waste materials from building in a controlled manner; do not drop or throw materials from heights.

7. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire

work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal:

1. Contractor shall remove waste and surplus materials without interference with others at least once per week or more often is waste and surplus materials interfere with the work of others or present a fire or safety hazard.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Contractor is responsible for protection and safekeeping of his materials, products, and equipment stored on the premises or incorporated into the construction until his contract is complete and accepted by the Owner.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Section 017329.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.


B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.




WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CUTTING AND PATCHING PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT 017329-1 DIVISION 1 SUPPLEMENT

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Contractor is responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching required to correct or modify newly installed construction, including but not limited to:

1. Coordination between all trades. 2. Performing sequential excavation and backfill. 3. Completing the Work or making its several parts fit together properly or integrate with other

Work. 4. Uncovering portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 5. Removing and replacing defective Work. 6. Removing and replacing Work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 7. Removing samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 8. Providing routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of materials such

as piping and electrical conduit.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Cutting and Patching Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Prior to submitting cutting and patching plan, review extent of cutting and patching anticipated, including potential conditions caused by construction issues, and review and examine procedures for ensuring satisfactory result from cutting and patching work. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cutting and patching to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Trade supervisor responsible for cutting operations. c. Trade supervisor(s) responsible for patching of each type of substrate. d. Mechanical, electrical, and utilities subcontractors' supervisors, to the extent each

trade is affecting by cutting and patching operations.

2. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.


A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit a plan describing procedures at least 15 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.


3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

a. For cutting and patching of newly installed construction, employ the original installer or fabricator for weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements, and sight exposed finished surfaces.

b. Include workmen qualifications for cutting and patching of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements, and sight exposed finished surfaces of existing construction being altered.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and

patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

6. Underground services and utilities include all subsurface conduit, piping, structures and control systems.

7. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

8. Enclosure Elements: Indicate measures regarding the integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements and systems.

9. Alternatives to Cutting and Patching: Include a description of alternatives to cutting and patching.

10. Notices: Notify Owner and separate contractor when cutting and patching affects newly installed construction not performed under this Project; include evidence of notification and written permission.

11. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching plan before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.

1. A structural element includes any load-bearing, lateral force-resistant member, and wind or seismic movement resisting construction.

2. Take precautions and exercise care to ensure Work is removed neatly and without movement or settlement to remainder of building. Contractor will be held liable for any damage, movement, settlement caused thereby or resulting therefrom.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Examples of operating elements include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Fire-suppression systems. 3. Plumbing piping systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems.


C. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Examples of miscellaneous elements include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Paving surfaces. 2. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 3. Site improvements such as railings, fencing, and other elements 4. Membranes and flashings. 5. Equipment supports. 6. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

F. Qualifications: Workmen to have minimum three (3) years of experience in working with materials being cut and patched.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials.

1. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

2. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

C. Materials used for sealing openings shall have a fire rating equal to or greater than the rating of the floor, ceiling or partition and shall comply with applicable codes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.


C. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

2. Restore Work and surfaces with new products in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Employ original Installer for cutting and patching of newly installed construction; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even new finish. b. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. c. For assemblies, entirely refinish. d. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing

materials. e. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

4. Openings created as a result of removal of materials must be patched to match adjacent construction as to materials and finishes, unless otherwise indicated.


3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.

B. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.




WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT 017700-1 DIVISION 1 SUPPLEMENT

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items (Punch List): Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: No later than 15 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list, reasons why the Work is incomplete, and when such items will be complete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 45 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

2. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

4. Deliver certificates of inspection confirming compliance with applicable codes and regulations for the following:

a. Elevators. b. Plumbing and drainage. c. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning.


d. Fire protection. e. Electrical.

5. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner . Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owners 's signature for receipt of submittals.

6. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, security, operation,

and maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 15 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 Demonstration and Training.

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will schedule inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect as Architects “Punch List”, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.6 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete all items listed in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 Payment Procedures. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial

Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements and requirements specified in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

4. Pest-Control: Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.


5. Submit final completion photographic documentation. 6. Project Record Documents: Submit documentation specified below for "Project Record

Documents."

B. Procedures Prior to Final Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Final Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videos.

2. Project Record Documents: Prepare Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs or digital recording, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Contractor shall take immediate action to complete all remaining work deemed necessary by Architect.

2. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

3. Should Architect be required to perform second inspection because of failure of Work to comply with original notification of Contractor, the Owner will compensate Architect for additional services, and deduct amount paid from final payment to Contractor.

1.7 FORMAT OF LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (CONTRACTORS PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect and Contractor. d. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. b. Subject to Architects approval, Contractor may use web-based project software

upload. Utilize software feature for creating and updating list of incomplete items (punch list).

1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.


C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: In addition to written paper originals, provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

a. Submit by uploading to web-based project software site .

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from

Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Remove labels that are not permanent.


i. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

k. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.

l. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

2. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

B. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a written report.

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.




PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-1

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT DIVISION 1 SUPPLEMENT

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents,including the following:

1. Record Drawings.2. Record Specifications.3. Record Product Data.4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints.2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and two sets of prints.2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one scanned PDF electronic file of Project's Specifications,including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic file of marked-up paper copy of eachProduct Data submittal.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as RecordProduct Data.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submitscanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of each submittal.

E. Certification: With each application for payment, provide written certification that Project RecordDocuments are current at time application is submitted.

F. Reports: Submit written report bi-weekly indicating items incorporated into project recorddocuments concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, fieldchanges, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: During construction, maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the ContractDrawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications areissued.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation variesfrom that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whetherindividual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information forpreparation of corresponding marked-up Record Prints.a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult

to identify or measure and record later.b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.



c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markupbefore enclosing concealed installations.

d. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.c. Depths of foundations below first floor.d. Locations and depths of underground utilities referenced to permanent surface

improvements.e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.g. Actual equipment locations.h. Locations of concealed internal utilities referenced to visible and accessible features

of the structure.i. Changes made by addendum.j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showingactual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. Use personnel proficient at recordinggraphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguishbetween changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted fromoriginal Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers,and similar identification, where applicable.

7. Update file within 72 hours of documents being issued or received.

B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawingswhere Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings aresuitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of acceptingan alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to recordthe actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newlyprepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting,organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORDDRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared record Drawings intomanageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identificationon cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheetidentification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."d. Name of Architect .



e. Name of Contractor.f. Signature of Contractorg. Contractors stamp, stipulating that submittals comply with specified criteria.

1.4 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installationvaries from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannotbe readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, andequipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary toprovide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted inoperation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings whereapplicable.

B. Format: Maintain record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.1. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD SPECIFICATIONS."d. Name of Architect.e. Name of Contractorf. Signature of Contractorg. Contractors stamp, stipulating that submittals comply with specified criteria.

1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project recorddocument purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; donot wait until end of Project.

B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installationvaries substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot

be readily identified and recorded later.2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where

applicable.

C. Format: Maintain record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title,

electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.2. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD PRODUCT DATA."d. Name of Architect.e. Name of Contractorf. Signature of Contractorg. Contractors stamp, stipulating that submittals comply with specified criteria.



1.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneousrecord keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or filemiscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as [PDF electronic file.1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section

number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in thefield office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project RecordDocuments for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean,dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project RecordDocuments for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Used


Permanent Modular Classroom Building Project

For

Walt Disney Elementary School

Specifications

Scope:

1-Two Story Permanent Modular Classroom Building1-Modular Elevator

Site Work

DSA Backcheck September 28, 2020

SPECIFICATIONS

Permanent Modular Classroom Building Project Walt Disney Elementary School

_______________________________________ ___________________________________________ VINCENT PETITO, AIA, ARCHITECT ROBERT GARRA, ELECTRICAL ENGINEER 444 South Flower Street, Suite 4700 444 South Flower Street, Suite 4700 Los Angeles, California 90071 Los Angeles, California 90071 License: C-14811 License: E-19272

PETITOVINCENT

NO. C-14811

REN.:

LIC

ENSED ARCH ITEC

T

ST

AT

EO F C A L I F O

RN

I A

06/30/21 Exp: 9/30/22





SS FLS ACS

DATE:

✔ ✔ ✔

03-119964

11/20/2020

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 00 01 10-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

00 00 03 Signature Sheet ............................................................................................................................. 01

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, TECHNICAL SPECS 01 45 00 Testing & Inspection Requirements for School Construction ..................................................... 04 01 45 24 Import Materials Testing .............................................................................................................. 12 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control .................................................................................. 04 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS– NOT USED DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE– NOT USED DIVISION 04 – MASONRY– NOT USED DIVISION 05 – METALS– NOT USED DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES – NOT USED DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION– NOT USED DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS – NOT USED DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 90 00 Painting and Coating..................................................................................................................... 07 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Signage .......................................................................................................................................... 06 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT – NOT USED DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 Roller Shades ................................................................................................................................ 07 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT – NOT USED DIVISION 21 – FIRE-SUPPRESSION - NOT USED DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING - NOT USED

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 00 01 10-2

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 00 11 Selective Removals, Relocations, & Rearrangements ................................................................. 06 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical .......................................................................................... 16 26 05 05 Electrical Inspections & Testing .................................................................................................. 18 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power ..................................................................................................... 08 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding ............................................................................................................... 10 26 05 29 Hangers & Supports ...................................................................................................................... 06 26 05 33 Raceways ...................................................................................................................................... 12 26 05 35 Boxes and Cabinets ....................................................................................................................... 08 26 05 48 Vibration & Seismic Controls ...................................................................................................... 08 26 05 53 Electrical Identification ................................................................................................................ 08 26 05 75 Conduit Rough-In Systems .......................................................................................................... 04 26 24 16 Panelboards ................................................................................................................................... 08 26 28 00 Protective Devices ........................................................................................................................ 08 DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS – NOT USED DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 00 Common Work Results for Electronic Safety & Security........................................................... 18

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 10 00 Site Clearing .................................................................................................................................. 05 31 20 00 Earthwork ...................................................................................................................................... 14 31 22 19 Finish Grading .............................................................................................................................. 03 DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving .............................................................................................................................. 09 32 13 13 Concrete Pavement ....................................................................................................................... 12 32 17 23 Painted Paving Marking ............................................................................................................... 03 32 18 16.13 Playground Protective Synthetic Grass Surfacing ..................................................................... 07 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates General ......................................................................................... 03 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation ..................................................................................................................... 18 32 90 00 Planting ......................................................................................................................................... 11 DIVISION 33 – SITE IMPROVEMENTS 33 10 00 Site Water Distribution Utilities ................................................................................................... 13 33 31 00 Site Sanitary Sewer Distribution .................................................................................................. 04 33 41 00 Site Storm Drainage Distribution ................................................................................................. 09

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

28 26 16 Rescue Assistance Two-Way Communication System - Audio Visual ..................................1028 05 00 Common Work Results for Electronic Safety & Security........................................................... 18 28 31 05 Fire Alarm System Extension ....................................................................................................... 08


SECTION 01 45 00 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

FOR SCHOOL CONSTRUCTION

TESTS

The Owner will select an independent testing laboratory to conduct the tests. Selection of the material required to be tested shall be by the laboratory or the Owner’s representative and not by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s representative a sufficient time in advance of the manufacture of material to be supplied by him under the Contract Documents, which must be terms of the Contract be tested, in order that the Owner may arrange for the testing of same at the source of supply.

Any material shipped by the Contractor from the source of supply prior to having satisfactorily passed such testing and inspection or prior to the receipt of notice from said representative that such testing and inspection will not be required shall not be incorporated in the job.

The Owner will pay testing laboratory costs for all tests and inspections, but may be reimbursed by the Contracxor for such costs under the Contract documents.

TESTS REPORTS

One copy of all test reports shall be forwarded to the Division of the State Architect by the testing agency. Such reports shall include all the tests made, regardless of whether such tests indicate that the material is satisfactory or unsatisfactory. Samples taken but not tested shall also be reported. Records of special sampling operations as required shall also be reported. The reports shall show that the material or materials were sampled and tested in accordance with the requirements of Title 24 and with the approved spacifications. Test reports shall show the specified design strength. They shall also state definitely whether or not the material or materials tested comply with requirements.

VERIFICATION OF TEST REPROTS

East testing agency shall submit to the Division of the State Architect a verified report in duplicate covering all the tests which are required to be made by that agency during the progress of the project. Such report shall be furnished each time that work on the project is suspended, covering the test up to that time, and at the completion of the project, covering all tests.


INSPECTION BY THE OWNER

The Owner and his representatives shll be at times have access for the purpose of inspection to all parts of the work and to the shops wherein the work is in preparation, and the Contractor shall at all times maintain proper facilities and provide safe access for such inspection.

TESTING AND INSPECTION

The Owner shall have the right to reject materials and workmanship which are defective, or to require their correction. Rejected workmanship shall be satisfactorily corrected and rejected materials shall be removed from the premises without charge to the Owner. If the Contractor does not correct such rejected work within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the Owner may correct same and charge the expense to the Contractor.

Should it be considered necessary or advisable by the Owner at any time before final acceptance of the entire work to make an examination of the work already completed by removing or tearing out the same, the Contractor shall on requiest promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor and materials. If such work is found to be defective in any respect due to the fault of the Contractor or his subcontractor, he shall defray all expenses of such examinations and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the additional cost of labor and material necessarily involved in the examination and replacement shall be allowed the Contractor.

INSPECTOR – OWNER’S

An Inspector employed by the Onwer in accordance with the requirments of the California Code of Regulations, Title 24, will be assigned to the work. His duties are specifically defined in Title 24, Part I, Sec. 4-342.

The work of construction in all stages of progress shall be subject to the personal continuous observation of the Inspector. He shall have free access to any or all parts of the work at any time. The Contractor shall furnish the Inspector reasonable facilities for obtaining such information as may be necessary to keep him fully informed respecting the progress and manner of the work and the character of the materials. Inspection of the work shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to fulfill this Contract.

INSPECTOR – OWNER – FIELD OFFICE

The Contractor shall lprovide for the use of the Owner’s Inspector a temporary office to be located as directed by the Inspector and to be maintained until removal is authorized by the Owner. This office shall be of substantial waterproof construction with adequate natural light and ventilation by means fo stock design windows. The door shall have a lock. A table satisfactory for the study of plans and two chairs shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide and pay for adequate electric lights, private local telephone service with a loud exterior bell, and adequate heat for this field office until the completion of the Contract.


1. Excavations and Fills

CBC Appendix J

Site Compaction : 1803A.3

Compacted Fill Material : 1803.A.5

Inspection of Site Soil and Back Fill : 1704A.7

Inspecitn of Pier foundations : 1707A.8 1704A.9 1810A.4.12

2. Concrete

Materials:

Cement: ACI 318 SEC 3.2

Aggregate: ACI 318 SEC 3.3

Rebar: ACI 318 SEC 3.5

Quality:

Mix Proportions: 1905A.2 ACI 318 SEC 5.2

Strength Tests 1905A.6

Rebar Tests 1916A.2

Cement Tests 1916A.1

AGG Tests 1903A.4

Inspection:

Job Site Inspection 1907A (ACI 318 SEC 5.7)

Batch Plant 1704A.4.2

Rebar Welding 1903A.7, 1704A.3.1.3

Post Installed Anchors 1916A.7

Replacement Inspection 1704A.4.6


3. Steel

Materials:

Structural & cold Formed Steels 2203A.1

Testing & Inspections:

Steel 2212A.1

Fabrication 1704A.2

Welding (Shop & Field) 1704A.3.1

High Strenth Bolts 2212A.2

End Welded Studs 2212A.3

4. Wood

Materials:

Materials:

Lumber, plywood 2303

Wood I-Joists Inspection IR23-9.10 Sec 4.0

Glue Lam Beams Inspection 1704A.6.2

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01 45 24

IMPORT MATERIALS TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the requirements for the sampling, testing, transportation and certification of imported fill materials to school sites.

B. This Specification defines:

1. CONTRACTOR requirements for use of imported materials on project sites.

2. CONTRACTOR requirements for stockpiling materials for use on project sites.

3. Testing requirements for all materials imported, stockpiled or generated for use on a project site.

4. CONTRACTOR testing and reporting requirements.

5. CONTRACTOR submittal requirements

C. Provisions of the General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this section.

1.02 OBJECTIVES

A. Ensure that fill materials imported to project sites are safe for students, staff and visitors.

B. Ensure that representative data be collected so that analytical determinations can be made in regard to the first objective.

C. Require CONTRACTOR to contract with and pay for the services of a licensed environmental professional (licensed State of California Professional Engineer [PE Civil], Professional Geologist [PG] or Registered Environmental Assessor II [REA II]) familiar with environmental site assessment and waste classification.

D. Require CONTRACTOR to contract with and pay for an independent, approved California Department of Health Services certified testing laboratory to perform sampling and testing of imported and site generated fill materials.

E. Require CONTRACTOR to pay all fees required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

F. Require CONTRACTOR to post bonds required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit to OWNER’S Authorized Representative (OAR):


1. A qualifications statement for CONTRACTOR’s independent California certified testing laboratory and required licensed environmental professional (California Professional Engineer [PE civil]), Professional Geologist [PG] or Registered Environmental Assessor II [REA II]) prior to the start of Work. CONTRACTOR’s licensed environmental professional must possess recent demonstrated environmental experience in soil sampling and waste classification.

a. Testing laboratory must be pre-approved by the Division of State Architect.

2. A draft import Sampling Strategy Plan (SSP) prepared by CONTRACTOR’s licensed environmental professional for review and concurrence by the OAR. The objective of the SSP is to obtain representative sample data. The Draft SSP must be submitted at least 72 hours prior to all proposed import sampling activities.

a. At a minimum, the Draft SSP shall include a site map which shows the location of the proposed import and the location and number of the proposed stockpile samples. The draft SSP shall also contain information pertaining to the total volume of the stockpile proposed for sampling and the rationale in support of the proposed sampling approach. Existing environmental documentation specific to the import site shall be utilized by the CONTRACTOR’s environmental professional to support the proposed sampling approach and analytical method suite. For new project sites, this information would include a DTSC approved site investigation report, e.g., Preliminary Environmental Assessment (PEA). It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to request this information in advance from the OAR if they do not already have access to a copy at the jobsite.

b. Lacking this information or rationale, samples shall be analyzed for all analytical methods described in Section 3.01. Guidance for the minimum number of samples per stockpile volume is provided in Table 1 (supplemental samples may be required by the OAR if pothole stockpile sampling is utilized.). In addition, the draft SSP shall contain all necessary contact information for the import site and a proposed schedule for the sampling activities.

c. To expedite the review process, the Draft SSP shall be submitted electronically to the OAR in MS WORD format.

d. Upon revision of the draft SSP by the CONTRACTOR’s licensed environmental professional and acceptance by the OAR, four revised copies of the final SSP will be provided to the OAR for distribution to OEHS and the project file.

3. A draft Certification/Sample Data Report prepared by CONTRACTOR’s licensed environmental professional for review and concurrence. At a minimum the draft Certification/Sample Data Report shall contain:

a. a site map showing the location of the stockpile and stockpile sample locations;


b. a detailed discussion and evaluation of the laboratory results;

c. a summary of findings and recommendations that provide a determination on the waste classification of the subject materials, based on the representative sample results;

d. recommendations for additional steps, if any;

e. a chain-of-custody forms and all laboratory data with respective QA/QC sheets.

f. To expedite the review process, the Draft SSP shall be submitted electronically to the OAR in MS WORD format.

g. Upon revision of the draft Certification Report by the CONTRACTOR’S licensed environmental professional and acceptance by the OAR, three copies of the final report will be submitted to the OAR.

4. The Environmental Compliance Manager shall confirm that the proposed waste classification for the proposed import material is appropriate.

5. Written documentation, in the form of a memo or e-mail from CONTRACTOR to OAR, prior to import, verifying that the hauling contract specifies “clean” trucks and that the actual haul trucks utilized for import activities will be clean of visible contamination or deleterious materials.

6. Written documentation that the trucks went directly from the source location to the recipient location with no detours or stops at other locations and that short loads were not augmented by other materials that were not tested as part of the final import SSP. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to document that no other trips or short-load augmentation occurred and submit to the documentation within five (5) business days of the completion of the import activities. All import transportation activities shall be conducted in accordance with all applicable (local, State, Federal) rules and regulations.

7. The independent approved testing laboratory shall perform the required tests and report results of all tests noting if the tested material passed or failed such tests and shall furnish copies to the IOR, Architect, OAR, DSA, Contractor, and others as required. Report shall state tests were conducted under the responsible charge of a licensed State of California professional engineer and the material was tested in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, Title 24, CCR and the DSA. Upon completion of the Work of this section, the independent testing laboratory and geotechnical engineer shall submit a verified report to DSA as required by Title 24, CCR.

8. Certification, in the form of haul tickets or completed waste manifests, documenting the volume and recipient of all import materials and activities. This documentation shall be coordinated through the OAR Environmental Compliance Manager.


a. For approved import to new project sites, unregulated facilities (landfill) or non-project sites, haul tickets may be utilized, but shall contain the following minimum information:

1) date of haul activity

2) address of source

3) address of recipient

4) load volume

5) time of departure from source

6) time of arrival at recipient site

7) signature of recipient or recipient’s agent

1.04 APPROVALS

A. NO import of earth or geotechnical grading or fill materials can occur at the project site without PRIOR approval by the OAR.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Imported

1. Soils: Soils proposed for import shall be tested pursuant to the requirements of this Section.

2. Gravels: Clean gravel, consisting of native rock from a commercial source, shall be tested pursuant to the requirements of this Section. Refer to Item 2.01.B, this Section, for the list of pre-tested sites

3. Sands: Clean sand from a commercial source shall be tested pursuant to the requirements of this Section. CONTRACTOR shall provide written documentation, which identifies the source, volume and proposed transport date(s) of the material for review. Refer to Item 2.01.B, this Section, for the list of pre-tested sites:

4. Miscellaneous Material: No miscellaneous material containing crushed concrete, asphalt, construction debris, or other potential deleterious materials may be utilized or imported to the project site for use as fill or grading material.

B. Pre-Tested Sites:

Vulcan Materials Company 1709 Sherbon Street Corona, CA 92879 Materials Tested: Sand, CAB, and 3/4 " Rock


LB Crushing Company 3100 Horseless Carriage Road Norco, CA Materials Tested: Sand El Toro Materials Rocky Road & Portola Parkway Lake Forest, CA Materials Tested: Sand Hanson Aggregates North America-Inland Plant 12000 Banyan Street Rancho Cucamonga CA 91730 Materials Tested: Sand Hanson Aggregates North America-Irwindale 13550 Live Oak Avenue Irwindale, CA 91706 Materials Tested: Sand Inland Empire Regional Composting Authority (IERCA) 12645 Sixth Street Rancho Cucamonga, CA 91739 Materials Tested: Top Soil and Mulch

C. Import of fill Materials:

1. Fees: CONTRACTOR shall pay as required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

2. Bonds: CONTRACTOR shall post as required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GRADING/EXCAVATION

A. If the Contractor encounters an area(s) with discolored, stained, and/or odorous soils or any other evidence of contamination during excavation/grading work, Contractor must immediately notify District Representative, cease work in the aforementioned area(s), and secure the area(s) with fencing, tape, stakes or other suitable means to prevent entry by personnel or equipment. In turn, the District Representative which will initiate a construction response to address the contamination, in accordance with pertinent regulatory requirements.

3.02 SAMPLING AND TESTING

A. CONTRACTOR shall contract with, and pay for, the services of a licensed environmental professional (licensed State of California Professional Engineer [PE Civil], Professional Geologist [PG] or Registered Environmental Assessor II [REA II]).


B. CONTRACTOR shall contract with, and pay for, an independent, approved California Department of Health Services certified testing laboratory to perform sampling and testing of imported, exported and site generated fill materials. [Note: Utilization of portable, onsite crushing equipment on the project site also requires prior notification and approval by the OAR].

C. All imported fill/grading material, unless otherwise specified in writing by the OAR, must be tested at the site of origin. Import testing and certification process shall include the following steps:

1. Stockpile all materials for sampling (standard stockpile or backhoe pothole stockpile). Crushed fill materials generated by CONTRACTOR at a project site must be segregated by material (e.g., separate stockpiles for concrete, asphalt, etc.).

2. Submit Draft SSP for review and concurrence by OAR.

3. Collect and analyze samples (see Table 1 for number of samples per volume) per SSP. Once fill materials for export have been stockpiled and tested, they may not be used onsite for any purpose without prior approval by the OAR.

4. Submit draft import sample data report for review and concurrence by the OAR.

5. Submit final import sample data report (Certification Report) to the OAR’s Environmental Compliance Manager for concurrence of proposed waste classification.

6. Submit required pre import documentation/record to the OAR (e-mail).

7. Submit post import certifications to the OAR.

8. In addition to the preceding, requirements, certifications and submittals as indicated in previous subsections above.

D. OWNER retains the right to refuse any fill material proposed for use at a project site.

E. Import fill materials shall be stockpiled by CONTRACTOR and are deemed acceptable for import or reuse only when it is demonstrated to the satisfaction of the OAR’s Environmental Compliance Manager that the subject materials meet the requirements of this Section (01440).

F. As described in Section 1.03B, lacking site-specific data or sample rationale to support a more focused analytical approach; the CONTRACTOR shall analyze all samples for the following substances according to the methods indicated below. Table 3 is a waste classification flowchart for use by CONTRACTOR’s environmental professional. In all cases, detection levels and quality assurance/quality control methods shall be in accordance with standard Method reporting limits and best laboratory practices and the following USEPA (EPA) methods:

1. Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons, utilizing EPA Method 8015M, for gasoline and diesel.

2. Volatile Organic Compounds, utilizing EPA Method 8260B/5035.


3. Polychlorinated biphenyls, utilizing EPA Method 8082.

4. Semi-Volatile Compounds, utilizing EPA Method 8270C.

5. Organochlorine Pesticides, utilizing EPA Method 8081A.

6. Organophosphorous Pesticides, utilizing EPA Method 8141A.

7. Chlorinated Herbicides, utilizing EPA Method 8151A.

8. California Code of Regulations Title 22 (CAM 17) Metals, utilizing EPA Method 6010B/7470A.

9. Hexavalent Chromium, utilizing EPA Method 7199.

10. Arsenic/Thallium, utilizing EPA Method 6020.

G. Import fill material may be deemed defective for use by the OAR at the project site if any of the following results are obtained:

1. Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons are present at concentrations exceeding 100 milligrams per kilogram (mg/kg) for gasoline and 1,000 mg/kg for oil/diesel and long chain hydrocarbons.

2. Solvents and other volatile organic compounds are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

3. Polychlorinated biphenyls are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

4. Semi-volatile compounds are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

5. Organochlorine pesticides are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

6. Organophosphorous pesticides are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

7. Chlorinated herbicides are present at concentrations exceeding the laboratory reporting limit.

8. California Code of Regulations Title 22 (CAM 17) Metals at concentrations exceeding site-specific background.

9. Hexavalent chromium is present at concentrations exceeding 15 mg/kg.

H. In addition to screening for hazardous materials, the imported soil must be tested and certified to be free of:

1. Organics and debris;

2. Infestation by vermin or insects, in particular fire ants;


3. Boron.

I. Imported materials must be suitable for engineered fill, even if used at landscaping, free from large rocks.

J. Imported materials shall not have a high clay content and must meet the permeability requirements of the projects hardscape if there is such requirement.

K. Evaluate concentrations of metals in import fill by conducting the analysis set forth below.

1. Compare the maximum detected metal concentrations in import fill samples to the Threshold Criteria listed in Table 4. If any metal concentration exceeds its listed background value, the fill material fails and shall be deemed defective and unacceptable for use at the project site unless supported by a site specific health risk assessment.

2. In addition to section 3.01.G.1, import fill shall be deemed environmentally defective and unacceptable for use if any of the following results are obtained:

a. Arsenic concentrations exceed 12.0 mg/kg.

b. Lead concentration exceeds 255 mg/kg or fails TTLC/STLC.

c. Import materials at new project sites with total chromium concentrations greater than or equal to 100 mg/kg shall be tested for hexavalent chromium.

L. All import fill material shall be characterized, handled, and documented in accordance with applicable US EPA and State of California hazardous waste and hazardous materials regulations (See Table 2). For the purpose of this specification, “contaminated” shall mean any soil or geotechnical material at a concentration, which would require disposal at a regulated facility (i.e., California hazardous or RCRA hazardous). OAR must be notified at least 72 hours prior to the disposal of any hazardous waste or hazardous material. No material disposal or reuse can take place without prior written approval of the OAR.

M. Specification test results and OAR approvals shall be valid for a period of 120 days from the date of the subject testing unless a variance is requested by CONTRACTOR and approved by OAR. Previously approved materials shall not be utilized or disposed offsite after the 120 day limit without prior review and approval by the OAR.

N. Requests for variances to this Specification shall be submitted in writing to the OAR a minimum of two weeks in advance of need for review and approval. The request for variance must provide all available testing data, a rationale to support the request and have an active funding line (provided by OAR) to facilitate review by the OAR. OAR will review the request for variance and will provide its preliminary determination within two weeks. Certain requests may require final approval by the Department of Toxic Substances Control (DTSC).


O. Soils with concentrations above Section 01440 screening levels may, upon prior approval by the OAR, may be reused at other project sites if supported by a site-specific human health risk assessment.

P. Details of the samples and testing must be submitted to and approved by the OAR’s Environmental Compliance Manager before transportation.

Q. Haul Routes and Regulations/Restrictions: CONTRACTOR must comply with requirements of project EIR (CEQA) and authorities having jurisdiction over the project area and the proposed activities (e.g. Regional Water Quality Control Board, Department of Toxic Substances Control, etc.).

3.03 TRANSPORTATION

A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all fees required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

B. Contractor shall pay all fees for disposal and/or processing of contaminated and/or hazardous fill materials at a regulated facility.

C. CONTRACTOR shall post and pay for all bonds required by authorities having jurisdiction over area.

TABLE 1: MINIMUM SAMPLING FREQUENCY

Volume (Cubic Yards)

Sampling Frequency

0 – 1,000 1 per 250 CY

1,001 - 5,000 4 samples per first 1,000 CY and 1 sample per each additional 500 CY

Greater then 5,000 12 samples for first 5000 CY and 1 sample per each additional 1,000 CY


TABLE 2 WASTE CHARACTERIZATION

Chemicals of Potential Concern

Hazardous Waste if Exceed

Criteria - TTLC Level* (mg/kg)

Additional WET

Leaching Tests if Exceed

Hazardous Waste

Criteria - 10 times

STLC Level** (mg/kg)

California-Regulated Hazardous

Waste - Soluble

Threshold Limit

Concentration -STLC

Level (mg/l)

Additional TCLP

Leaching Tests if Exceed Hazardous

Waste Criteria -

20 times TCLP Level**

(mg/kg)

Federally-Regulated (RCRA) Hazardous Waste - Toxicity

Characteristic Leaching Procedure - TCLP Level

(mg/l)

CAM 17 Metals

Antimony 500 150 15 NA NA

Arsenic 500 50 5 100 5 Barium 10,000 1,000 100 2,000 100 Beryllium 75 7.5 0.75 NA NA Cadmium 100 10 1 20 1 Chromium 2,500 50 5 100 5 Cobalt 8,000 800 80 NA NA Copper 2,500 250 25 NA NA Lead 1,000 50 5 100 5 Mercury 20 2 0.2 4 0.2 Molybdenum 3,500 3,500 350 NA NA Nickel 2,000 200 20 NA NA Selenium 100 10 1 20 1 Silver 500 50 5 100 5 Thallium 700 70 7 NA NA Vanadium 2,400 240 24 NA NA Zinc 5,000 2,500 250 NA NA

Chromium (VI) 500 50 5 NA NA


TABLE 3 – WASTE CLASSIFICATION FLOWCHART


TABLE 4: THRESHOLD CRITERIA FOR METALS IN SOIL - LOOK UP VALUES

CAM 17 Metals Soil Threshold Criteria (mg/kg) Basis

Antimony 28 NC Arsenic 11.3 BK Barium 2330 NC Beryllium 16 C Cadmium 1.4 C Chromium 106656 NC Cobalt 4266 NC Copper 2631 NC Lead 255 PbB Mercury 21 NC Molybdenum 356 NC Nickel 148 C Selenium 356 NC Silver 356 NC Thallium 4.7 NC Vanadium 498 NC Zinc 21331 NC

NC = noncancer health effects BK = background C = cancer risk PbB = blood lead levels

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01 57 23

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION CONTROL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following: 1. Requirements for compliance with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)

developed specifically for this Project are the responsibility of the Contractor. a. SWPPP satisfies the mandates of Federal Clean Water Act as enforced by State of

California Water Resources Control Board and its Regional Water Quality Boards. b. In accordance with the State Water Resources Control Board’s (SWRCB) General

Construction Activities Storm Water Permit, Order No. 2009-0009-DWQ, NPDES No. CAS000002, the SWPPP Major objective is to:

(1) Identify the sources of sediment and other pollutants that affect the quality of storm water discharges (2) Describe and ensure the implementation of BMPs to reduce or eliminate sediment and other pollutants in storm water as well as non-storm water discharges.

B. Related Sections 1. SWPPP requires compliance of all trades on Project that use or manipulate materials of any

nature which can potentially enter storm-water drainage system. 2. Representative materials controlled by SWPPP include erosion of native soils and fill

materials, groundwater, leakage or spills from construction vehicles and machinery, stored fuels, concrete truck washout, chemical treatments, curing, compounds, paints, plasters, paving materials, adhesives and sealants, trash and general construction debris, pesticides, fertilizers, and any other material which can be carried by running water or percolate into earth.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Closeout Submittals: Submit to owner documentation certifying compliance with the SWPPP, site monitoring reports, and notification of Agencies of completion of operations as required by the General Construction Permit.

B. Prepare and Submit Notice of Intent Application with the RWQCB.

C. Prepare and submit to owner 3 copies of the SWPPP plan. 1. The SWPPP must be prepared by A Qualified SWPPP Developer (QSD) certified by the

RWQCB, as required by the General Construction Permit. 2. Implementation and report processing of the SWPPP shall be conducted by a Qualified

SWPPP Practitioner as required by the General Construction Permit.

1.3 REGULATORY BACKGROUND

A. After January 1, 2001, as required by Federal Water Pollution Control Act (Clean Water Act) and regulations of U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and of State of California Water Resources Control Board, any construction activity of ONE acre or more must be covered by National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit.

B. The Act further decrees fines of as much as $27,500 per day per violation.

C. It is implicit that SWPPP satisfies requirements of NPDES permit.


D. If Owner is cited for violation of Clean Water Act due to failure of SWPPP to address requirement, Contractor shall be liable for any fines or penalties that might be imposed by regulatory agency, he shall be obligated to perform mandated corrective measures at his own expense.

E. If Owner, Architect, or Owner's Inspector becomes aware of violations of SWPPP, they will immediately inform Contractor in writing. Contractor shall immediately cease violation and shall restore site, at his own expense, to same conditions it was in before violation, to approval of Owner.

F. Should Contractor continue to violate requirements of SWPPP, or refuse to comply, or refuse to repair results of violation to Owner's approval, for purposes of this Contract it shall be considered as any other violation of Contract. Owner will take necessary measures as set forth in General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide all temporary and permanent storm water pollution prevention equipment, material, and facilities as required by or as necessary to comply with the SWPPP to meet the General Construction Permit requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 IMPLEMENTATION

A. Measures required in SWPPP shall be executed as dictated by SWPPP itself.

B. Contractor shall prepare and submit Notice of Intent to comply with terms of this General Permit prior to commencement of construction activity. 1. An annual fee of $700.00 or amount required by the agency, paid by Contractor shall

accompany Notice of Intent. Notice of Intent will not be processed if not accompanied by fee. 2. Send Notice of Intent and annual fee to:

State Water Resources Control Board (SWRCB) Division of Water Quality Attention: Storm Water Section, Permit Unit P.O. Box 1977 Sacramento, CA 95812-1977.

3. Copies of General Permit and Notice of Intent form may be obtained from California Regional Water Control Board, Santa Ana Region, 2010 Iowa Avenue, Suite 100, Riverside, CA 92507-2409, 951/782-4130.

4. Concurrent with commencement of construction activities, Contractor shall develop, implement and retain at project site, a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and a monitoring program and reporting plan in accordance with the General Permit.

5. The Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan and Monitoring Program Checklist is provided by

the CA SWRCB to aid in the preparation of the SWPPP. It can be obtained from:

SWRCB, Division of Water Quality 1001 I Street, Sacramento, California 95814 Or online from http://www.waterboards.ca.gov/water_issues/programs/stormwater/constpermits.shtml

C. Contractor shall be responsible for paying the necessary permit fees and complying with State Water Resources Control Board Order No. 2009-009-DWQ, implementing provisions of the Clean Water Act relating to storm water discharges.

D. Contractor must obtain the necessary permits from the State Water Resources Control Board and


develop and implement Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan in accordance with the State Water Resources Control Board requirements prior to commencing any portion of construction which will disturb land (i.e.; excavation, grading, etc.).

E. The plan shall address all potential sources of pollutants which may enter the storm water system, it must explain what steps will be taken during construction to minimize the risk of storm water contamination and must address management procedures to be utilized during construction to prevent pollution discharges such as spills, leaking, and dumping.

F. A copy of said plan shall be provided to owner and upon request contractor shall certify, in writing, compliance with the relevant rules, regulations and laws.

G. Additional information regarding State Water Resources Control Board requirements can be obtained from State Water Resources Control Board, Division of Water Quality, Attention: Storm Water Permit Unit, P.O. Box 1977, Sacramento, CA 95812-1977. Telephone Number (916) 657-1146.

H. During construction, make changes as necessary for proper functioning of SWPPP measures.

I. At completion of work, Contractor shall remove temporary SWPPP measures and dispose of any pollutants in legal manner offsite, or as otherwise required by SWPPP

3.2 PERFORMANCE

A. Minimum Water Quality Protection Requirements 1. The Contractor is required to meet the following minimum standards of good housekeeping:

a. Eroded sediments and other pollutants must be retained on site and may not be transported from the site via sheet flow, swales, area drains, natural drainage, or wind.

b. Stockpiles of earth and other construction-related materials must be protected from being transported from the site by wind or water.

c. Fuels, oils, solvents, and other toxic materials must be stored in accordance with their listing and are not to contaminate the soil nor the surface waters. All approved toxic storage containers are to be protected from the weather. Spills must be cleaned up immediately and disposed of in a proper manner. Spills may not be washed into the drainage system.

d. Excess or waste concrete may not be washed into the public way or any drainage system. Provisions shall be made to retain concrete wastes on-site until they can be appropriately disposed of or recycled.

e. Trash and construction-related solid wastes must be deposited into a covered receptacle to prevent contamination of rainwater and dispersal by wind.

f. Sediments and other materials may not be tracked from the site by vehicle traffic. The construction entrance roadways must be stabilized so as to inhibit sediments from being deposited into the public ways. Accidental depositions must be swept up immediately and may not be washed down by rain or by any other means.

B. Wet Weather Erosion Control Plan (WWECP) 1. The Contractor shall prepare a Wet Weather Erosion Control Plan (WWECP) and implement

Best Management Practices (BMPs) necessary.

C. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan 1. The Contractor shall prepare applicable sections and comply with The Stormwater Pollution

Prevention Plan (SWPPP). The contractor shall complete and submit the Notice of Intent to construct under the California Construction General Permit (NPDES). The Contractor shall implement Best Management Practices (BMPs) necessary to control stormwater pollution from sediments, erosion, and construction materials leaving the construction site.

2. The BMPs contained in the Development Best Management Practices Handbook – Part A, Construction Activities cover the following categories of construction activities: a. Site preparation/earth removal b. Underground structures


c. Aboveground structures d. Roadways, walkways and parking lots e. Planting and landscaping

3. The SWPPP document shall include the following information: a. The name, location, period of construction, and a brief description of the Project. b. Contact information for the Contractor, including name, address, and telephone

number. c. Name, location, and description of any environmentally sensitive areas located on or

adjoining the Project. d. A list of major construction materials, waste, and activities. e. A list of BMPs to be used to control pollutant discharges from major construction

materials, wastes, and activities. f. A site plan (a construction plan may be used) indicating the location of BMPs where

appropriate. g. A developer’s certification statement that all required and selected BMPs will be

effectively implemented. 4. Whenever the Contractor is required to get any type of permit from the Department of Building

and Safety (DBAS), the Contractor shall submit the SWPPP document to the DBAS for review and approval before obtaining the permit. If the Contractor does not need any type of permit from the DBAS, the Contractor shall submit the SWPPP document to the Architect for review and approval. At least one copy of the approved SWPPP shall be kept at the construction site and accessible to City inspectors.

5. The Contractor may prepare the SWPPP by following the format in Chapter 2 of the BMP Handbook. The publication is available from the following websites:

State Water Resources Control Board Website: http://www.swrcb.ca.gov/water_issues/programs/stormwater/gen_const.shtml#const_permit

California Stormwater Quality Association http://www.cabmphandbooks.com




WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PAINTING AND COATING PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT 09 90 00 -1 DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020

SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Exterior painting of permanent modular buildings, and other exterior painting scope as indicated in the contract documents.

B. Following items shall not be painted:

1 Brass valves, chromium or nickel-plated piping and fittings.

2 Boiler control panels and control systems.

3 Fabric connections to fans.

4 Flexible conduit connections to equipment, miscellaneous name plates, stamping, and instruction labels and manufacturer's data.

5 Flag, floodlight, parking light poles and loudspeaker poles, metal stairs, handrails and chain-link fence with a galvanized finish, unless otherwise noted.

6 Brass, bronze, aluminum, lead, stainless steel and chrome or nickel-plated surfaces. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Paint materials shall comply with the Food and Drug Administration’s (F.D.A.) Lead Law and the current rules and regulations of local, state and federal agencies governing the use of paint materials.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. List of Materials: Before submittal of samples, submit a complete list of proposed paint materials, identifying each material by distributor's name, manufacturer’s name, product name and number, including primers, thinners, and coloring agents, together with manufacturers’ catalog data fully describing each material as to contents, recommended installation, and preparation methods. Identify surfaces to receive various paint materials.

B. Material Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard colors samples for each type of paint specified. Once colors have been selected, submit Samples of each color selected for each type of paint accordingly:

1. Samples of Paint and Enamel must be submitted on standard 8 ½” x 11” Leneta Opacity-Display Charts. Each display chart shall have the color in full coverage. The sample shall be prepared from the material to be installed on the Work. Identify the school on which the paint is to be installed, the batch number, the color number, the type of material, and the name of the manufacturer.


2. Materials and color samples shall be reviewed before starting any painting.

C. For transparent and stained finishes, prepare samples on same species and quality ofwood to be installed in the Work, with written description of system used.


A. Certification of Materials: With every delivery of paint materials, the manufacturer shall provide written certification the materials comply with the requirements of this section.

B. Coats: The number of coats specified is the minimum number. If full coverage is not obtained with the specified number of coats, install additional coats as required to provide the required finish.

C. Install coats and undercoats for finishes in strict accordance with the recommendations of the paint manufacturer as reviewed by the Architect.

D. Paint materials shall comply with the following as a minimum requirement:

1. Materials shall be delivered to Project site in original unbroken containers bearing manufacturer's name, brand number and batch number.

2. Open and mix ingredients on premises in presence of the Project Inspector. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Storage and Mixing of Materials: Store materials and mix only in spaces suitable for such purposes. Maintain spaces clean and provide necessary precautions to prevent fire. Store paint containers so the manufacturer's labels are clearly displayed.

1.06 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Temperature: Do not install exterior paint in damp, rainy weather or until surface has thoroughly dried from effects of such weather. Do not install paint, interior, or exterior, when temperature is below 50 degrees F, or above 90 degrees F, or dust conditions are unfavorable for installation.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide a three year material warranty.

B. Installer shall provide a three year application warranty. 1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide at least one gallon of each type, color and sheen of paint coating installed. Label containers with color designation indicated on Drawings.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PAINT MATERIALS

A. Furnish the products of only one paint manufacturer unless otherwise specified or required. Primers, intermediate and finish coats of each painting system must all be the products of the same manufacturer, including thinners and coloring agents, except for materials furnished with shop prime coat by other trades.

B. Factory mix paint materials to correct color, gloss, and consistency for installation to the maximum extent feasible.

C. Paint materials to be minimum “Architectural Grade”.

D. Gloss degree standards shall be as follows: HIGH GLOSS 70 and above EGGSHELL 30 to 47 SEMI-GLOSS 48 to 69 SATIN 15 to 29

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers, unless otherwise noted:

1. Dunn-Edwards Corporation Paints

2. Frazee Paints and Wall coverings

3. Vista Paints

4. Sherwin Williams

5. ICI Paints

6. Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive paint finish. Surfaces which are not properly prepared andcleaned or which are not in condition to receive the finish specified shall be corrected before prime coat is installed.

B. New woodwork shall be thoroughly cleaned, hand sandpapered, and dusted off. Nail holes, cracks or defects in Work shall be filled. On stained woodwork, fill shall be colored to match stain. Filling shall be performed after the first coat of paint, shellac or varnish has been installed.

C. Plaster surfaces except veneer plaster shall be allowed to dry at least 3 weeks before

painting. Veneer plaster shall be allowed to dry sufficiently to receive paint as determined by moisture meter tests.

D. Metal surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, corrosion, oil, foreign

materials, blisters, and loose paint.


E. Do not install painting materials to wet, damp, dusty, dirty, finger marked, rough, unfinished or defective surfaces.

F. Concrete surfaces shall be dry, cleaned of dirt and foreign materials and in proper condition to receive paint. Neutralize spots demonstrating effects of alkali.

G. Mask off areas where necessary.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Backpainting: Immediately upon delivery to the Project site, finish lumber and millwork shall be backpainted on surfaces that will be concealed after installation. Items to be painted shall be backpainted with priming coat specified under "Priming".

B. Priming: New wood and metal surfaces specified to receive paint finish shall be primed. Surfaces of miscellaneous metal and steel not embedded in concrete, and surfaces of unprimed plain sheet metal Work shall be primed immediately upon delivery to the Project site. Galvanized metal Work and interior and exterior woodwork shall be primed immediately after installation. Priming of surfaces and priming coat shall be as follows:

1. Knots, Pitch and Sap Pockets: Shellac before priming.

2. Exterior Woodwork and Wood Doors: Prime with one coat of exterior waterborne emulsion wood primer.

3. Interior Woodwork: Where indicated to be painted, prime with one coat of waterborne wood primer.

4. Stain: Woodwork indicated to receive a stain and varnish finish shall be stained to an even color with water borne stain. On open-grained hardwood, mix stain with paste filler and completely fill pores in wood.

5. Galvanized Metal Work: Clean oil, grease and other foreign materials from surfaces. Install vinyl wash pretreatment coating. Follow manufacturer'sinstructions for drying time, and then prime with one coat of metal primer.

6. Unprimed Iron, Steel, and Other Uncoated Metals: Where specified to be painted, prime with one coat of metal primer.

7. Shop Primed Metal Items: Touch up bare and abraded areas with metal primer before installation of second and third coats.

8. Coats shall be installed evenly and with full coverage. Finished surfaces shall be free of sags, runs and other imperfections.


C. Allow at least 24 hours between coats of paint.

D. Rollers shall not be used on wood surfaces.

E. Each coat of painted woodwork and metal, except last coat, shall be sandpapered smooth when dry. Texture-coated gypsum board shall be sanded lightly to remove surface imperfections after first coat of paint has been installed.

F. Each coat of paint or enamel shall be a slightly different tint as required. Each coat of paint, enamel, stain, shellac, and varnish will be inspected by the IOR before next coat is applied. Notify the Project Inspector that such Work is ready for inspection.

1. Tinting Guideline: The first coat, primer/undercoat(s) to be untinted or tinted up to 50 percent lighter or darker (at the discretion of the installer) than the finish coat. The second coat (or third coat if a seal coat and undercoat have been specified) is to be factory tinted in the range of 10 percent to 15 percent lighter ordarker (at the discretion of the installer) than the finish coat. The final coat is to be factory tinted to the required color selected. These tinting guidelines shall be provided on all surfaces receiving paint.

G. Do not "paint-out" UL labels, fusible links and identification stamps.

H. Paint Roller, brush and spray.

1. Only Paint rollers shall be used on interior plaster, drywall, masonry/plaster and plywood surfaces, nap shall not exceed one half inch in length.

2. First coat on wood overhang and ceilings shall have material applied by roller and then brushed out in a professional manner to leave surface free of imperfections. Finish coat may be sprayed.

3. Other surfaces shall have all coatings applied with brushes of proper size.

4. Spray work is permitted only on radiators, acoustic plaster, masonry and plaster.

I. Where ceilings are specified to be painted, beams, cornices, coves, ornamental features, plaster grilles, etc. shall be included.

J. Ceilings shall be white, including classrooms, storage rooms, offices, arcades, etc. Boiler room and fan room ceiling color shall match adjacent walls.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Remove rubbish, waste, and surplus material and clean woodwork, hardware, floors, and other adjacent Work.

B. Remove paint, varnish and brush marks from glazing material and, upon completion of painting Work, wash and polish glazing material both sides. Glazing material, which is damaged, shall be removed and replaced with new material.

C. Clean hardware and other unpainted metal surfaces with recommended cleaner. Do not furnish abrasives or edged tools.


3.04 SCHEDULE

A. Exterior:

1. Woodwork: 3 coats.

a. First Coat: As specified in this section under Priming.

b. Second and Third Coats: Exterior house and trim enamel.

2. Wood Doors: 3 coats.


b. Second and Third Coats: Exterior gloss enamel.

3. Plaster and Stucco: 3 coats. Flat 100 percent acrylic.

a. Prime Coat: Alkali resistant primer/sealer.

b. Exterior 100 percent acrylic.

4. Concrete: 3 coats. Flat 100 percent acrylic.

a. First Coat: Concrete sealer.

b. Second and Third Coats: Exterior 100 percent acrylic.

5. Concrete Block: 3 coats. Flat 100 percent acrylic.

a. First Coat: Concrete block filler.

b. Second and Third Coats: Exterior 100 percent acrylic.

6. Metal: 3 coats. Shall be cleaned and pre-treated. Items to be painted include, but are not limited to: steel columns and miscellaneous steel items, gravel stops, metal doors and frames, hoods and flashings.


b. Second and Third Coats: Exterior gloss enamel. B. Mechanical and Electrical Work:

1. Except where interior mechanical and electrical Work to be painted is specified to receive another paint finish, Work occurring in finished rooms and spaces shall be cleaned, pre-treated, and painted with 3 coats. Items to be painted include, but are not limited to: steel and copper piping, pipes, vents, fittings, ducts, plenums, miscellaneous supports and hangers, electrical conduit, fittings, pull boxes, outlet boxes, unfinished surfaces of plumbing fixtures, miscellaneous metal cabinets, panels, and access doors and panels.



b. Second and Third Coats: Interior enamel, semi-gloss or gloss to match adjacent wall or ceiling finish.

2. Insulation and Taping on Pipes and Ducts: 3 coats.

a. Finished Rooms: 1) First Coat: Interior waterborne primer. 2) Second and Third Coats: Interior semi-gloss or gloss enamel to match

adjoining wall or ceiling finish.

b. Building Exterior: 1) First Coat: Exterior waterborne primer. 2) Second and Third Coats: Exterior gloss enamel.

3. Inside surfaces of ducts, vents, dampers and louvers as far back as visible from room in which they open shall be painted with 2 coats of flat black paint.

3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. 3.06 CLEANUP

A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project Site.

END OF SECTION

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT SIGNAGE DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 10 14 00-1

SECTION 10 14 00

SIGNAGE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes exterior room Identification signs, (provide sign at each exterior door indicating room number and name of room); Exterior site/parking lot/traffic control signs if indicated on the drawings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act: Standards. B. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI A-117.1. C. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

2. ASTM A 153 - Specification for Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

3. ASTM B584 - 09a Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications

D. CBC - California Building Code, 2013 Edition.

1.3 Not used 1.4 SUBMITTAL

A. Not Used. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to materials,

dimensions of individual components, profiles, finishes, and installation methods for each type of sign required. Submit samples for selection of color pattern and surface texture including full size sample of dimensional letter style, finish, etc., and manufacturers color chart.

C. Signage Schedule: Provide a graphic diagram of the entire facility. Label each door or

miscellaneous area which will receive a sign, including the door number, room name, and specific location where the sign will be installed. 1. List the specific text message and graphics to be used for each sign. 2. Key each sign on the schedule to drawings or details provided in the shop

drawings. 3. Cross check to be sure that each sign that appears either on the drawings or in the

specifications is included in the project scope.


D. Shop Drawings: Submit plans and elevations, sections of typical members, anchors, reinforcement, layout and installation details. Include the following: 1. Complete shop drawings, showing elevations, layouts, details, color designations,

etc. 2. Message list for each sign: include wording and letter layout. 3. Setting drawings and templates for anchor bolt installation. 4. Full-size spacing templates for dimensional letters. 5. Full-size layouts for metal plaques. 6. Provide laser quality proofs of each sign for final review.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Codes and Standards: Signs shall conform to all applicable CBC sections.

B. Mounting Location and Height: All "Tactile Signs" (Room Identification) shall be installed per CBC 11B-703.4.1 and 11B-703.4.2:

a. Height above finish floor or ground: Tactile characters on signs shall be located 48

inches minimum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the lowest Braille cells and 60 inches maximum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the highest line of raised characters.

b. Location: Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the sign shall be located

alongside the door at the latch side. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with one active leaf, the sign shall be located on the inactive leaf. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with two active leafs, the sign shall be located to the right of the right hand door. Where there is no wall space at the latch side of a single door or at the right side of double doors, signs shall be located on the nearest adjacent wall. Signs containing tactile characters shall be located so that a clear floor space of 18 inches minimum by 18 inches minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Where provided, signs identifying permanent rooms and spaces shall be located at the entrance to, and outside of the room or space. Where provided, signs identifying exits shall be located at the exit door when approached in the direction of egress travel. Exception: In alterations where sign installation locations identified in Section 11B-703.4.2 are obstructed or otherwise unavailable for sign installation, signs with tactile characters shall be permitted on the push side of doors with closers and without hold-open devices.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.


B. Pre-Installation Conferences: Sign locations shown on the location plans are for general information only. Prior to installation and as required, arrange meetings with the Architect at the site for final location for all sign items.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Package signs, labeled in name groups. B. Store adhesive attachment tape at ambient room temperatures.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's warranty against defect in materials or workmanship for minimum of one (1) year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGNS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Braille Signs Inc., www.braillesignsinc.com. 2. Or approved equal.

B. Product Description and Basis of Design: For each separate type of sign required, obtain

signs from a single manufacturer. Note that signs meeting the specifications and all District standards have been supplied for several prior District projects by “Braille Signs, Inc. “Santa Ana, CA, Contact: Steve Corum, Tele: 714-457-4167.

2.2 TACTILE SIGNS

A. Sign Materials: Plastic, using the following materials: 1. Acrylic Sheet: Cast methyl methacrylate monomer plastic sheet with minimum

flexural strength of 16,000 psi per ASTM D 790, minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F (80 deg C). Provide clear, transparent colored, translucent colored, and opaque colored cast cell acrylic sheet, Acrylite GP P-95 manufactured by Gyro Industries, matte finish, from full line of standard and custom colors, available through San Diego Plastics, Inc., 2220 McKinley Avenue, National City, CA 91 950, (800} 925-4855 FAX (61 9) 477-4874. a. Transparent Sheet: Matte finish colorless sheet, with 92 percent light

transmittance. b. White and Colored Translucent Sheet: Density required to produce

uniform brightness and minimum halation. c. Opaque Sheet: Acrylic sheet in colors and finishes indicated.

2. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure plastic laminate engraving stock with face and core plies in contrasting colors, matte finish. a. Reverse (Sub-surface) Engraving Stock: 1/8" thick, 2-ply material (clear,

non-glare matte finish over color layer), "Ultra-Mattes Reverse Engravable", by Romark, "Gravoglas-2 plex," by New Hermes Inc., or approved equal.

http://www.braillesignsinc.com/


3. Colored Coatings for Plastic Sheet: Non-fading, recommended by manufacturers for optimum adherence to surface.

B. Sign Fabrication: Signs shall be made from engraved copy, for both tactile and nontactile

signs. Fabricate as follows: 1. Lettering style shall be Helvetica Regular. 2. Substrate shall be 1/8" matt acrylic (engraved, or not). 3. Surface shall be 1/8" acrylic face, engraved and/or reverse engraved 4. Engraved copy shall be 1/32 inch high/deep with a minimum width of ¼ inch. 5. Reverse engraved copy shall be filled with enamel. 6. Use high-speed cutters mechanically linked to master templates, to produce

precisely formed copy and pictographs, incised to custom depth, on the face indicated.

7. Tactile Signs Graphics/Copy: Create tactile surface copy/graphics by engraving away background and leaving a remaining colored laminate surface, with radiused tops at Braille characters.

8. Non-Tactile Graphics/Copy: Create graphics/copy by reverse engraving the substrate side of the laminate/acrylic, and filling voids with enamel suitable for use with acrylic sheet.

9. Chemically bond face material to substrate using suitable solvent cement as recommended by acrylic sheet manufacturer.

10. Pre-drill signs for anchorage screws required.

C. Optional Plastic Sign Fabrication Method: The contractor may as an "or equal" substitution fabricate these tactile and non-tactile signs using a one-piece construction sign system utilizing an aqueous developing process to produce raised characters and corresponding Grade 2 Braille, which meet or exceed the characteristics of engraved signs in every manner. 1. Phenolic-Backed Photopolymer Sheet: Provide light-sensitive, water-wash

photopolymer face layer bonded to a phenolic base layer to produce a composite sheet. a. Exterior signs: Jet-388-EX Exterior signage by JetUSA with overall,

facelayer, and baselayer thickness. Of 0.160 inch; and a Type D Shore durometer hardness of 95.

b. Interior signs: Jet-388-Interior signage by JetUSA with overall, face-layer, and base-layer thickness, of 0.120 inch; and a Type D Shore durometer hardness of 80.

2. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide Pantone Matching System (PMS) colored coatings, including inks and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for application intended. a. Paint backgrounds and raised characters with high quality acrylic

polyurethane colored paint, followed by a clear acrylic polyurethane topcoat.

2.3 EXTERIOR SITE, PARKING LOT, AND TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNS (IF INDICATED ON

THE DRAWINGS)

A. Exterior Site, Parking Lot, and Traffic Control Signs: Comply with requirements for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and construction details.


Produce smooth, even, level panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions. Provide porcelain enameled aluminum unframed panel signs of the following materials: 1. Provide base metal of 0.063 inch aluminum porcelain enameling sheet of Alcad

alloy 6061 H-12 with an alloy of 1230 cladding of approximately 5% on both sides. Edges to be rounded, and corners to be square.

2. Provide porcelain enameling on face side of sheet a minimum of 0.002 inch thickness, per Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc. Carefully execute silk-screened graphic according to details and instructions.

3. Fasteners: Non-corrosive metal fasteners. 4. Sign Posts: Galvanized steel posts, wall thickness of 0.125 inch, "hat shaped," 3-

1/4" x 1;1/2" minimum, with deformations on surface to adhere to concrete. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION.

A. Installer shall examine signs, with General Contractor's representative present, for

compliance with requirements of the Sections in which signs and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of the signs are satisfactory. Installation shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. All signage shall be inspected for defects or damage prior to installation. All defects shall

be documented. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install plastic signs when temperature is below 70 degrees F.

B. Examination: Examine conditions of work in place before beginning work; report defects.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation: Locate signs where indicated, or where required per this specification, using mounting methods described. Install level, plumb and at height indicated on drawings, with surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

B. Door and Wall Signage Anchorage: Anchor signs with flat head, countersunk vandal resistant screws, at each sign (3 at round signs and 4 min. at square or rectangular signs), and set signs in full bed of adhesive sealant. Pre-drill holes in signs to prevent cracking or damage.

C. Post-mounted Exterior Site, Parking Lot, and Construction Signs: Set sign posts in 12” diameter x 24” deep 3000 psi concrete footings. Steel trowel top of footings smooth with a slope away from the post.

D. Cleaning and Protection: At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces. Protect from damage until Owner’s acceptance.

3.4 SCHEDULE

A. Tactile Signs: Provide the following tactile signs:


1. Accessible Room Identification Sign: Provide (1) at each door entry to each room. a. Size: 6" x 6".

B. Site Signs: Provide the following only as indicated on the drawings.

1. Tow Away Signs: Provide at each entry to the parking lot as shown. a. Size: 18" x 24". b. Pictogram: None. c. Text: "UNAUTHORIZED VEHICLES ..." (per drawings). d. Obtain missing information from Owner for permanent inclusion into

sign copy, prior to fabrication of the signs.

2. Accessible Parking Stall Signs: Provide (1) at each accessible parking stall. a. Size: 12" x 6". b. Pictogram: None. c. Text: 1-1/2" high, "MINIMUM FINE $250".

3. Van Accessible Signs: Provide (1) at each van accessible stall. a. Size: 12" x 6". b. Pictogram: None. c. Text: 1-1/2" high, "MINIMUM FINE $250".

3.5 CLEANING

A. General Upon completion, thoroughly clean exposed surfaces per manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT ROLLER SHADES DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 12 24 13-1

SECTION 12 24 13

ROLLER SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Chain operated clutch roller shades. Provide an individual roller

shade at each window opening in the project, 1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Type Culture Collection (ATCC): 1. 9642, 9644, 9645 - Fungi, Yeast and Yeast Genetic Stock.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM G21 - Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.

C. Glass Association of North America:

1. Glazing Manual.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 701-1999 – Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and

Film E. State of California Code of Regulations:

1. Title 19 - Public Safety, State Fire Marshal. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Not used

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each shade type provided under this Section. Include construction details, dimensions of each shade, and description of each component.

C. Shop Drawings: If required, provide shop drawings, prepared after field measurements are taken, showing location and extent of chain operated clutch roller shades. 1. Provide elevations, sections, and details. Show tube and bracket

sizes for each condition. 2. Show size and location of blocking and backing required for

installation of shades. Show mounting details and method of attachment of shades to backing.

D. Schedule: Provide schedule of chain operated clutch roller shades. Use


the same designations as indicated on drawings. E. Samples:

1. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches square, with specified treatments applied. Illustrate complete range of colors and textures available for selection.

2. Valance/Fascia: Submit 3" samples of specified finish. 3. Head Box/Pocket: Submit 3" samples of specified finish.

F. Installation Instructions: Submit complete manufacturer's installation instructions. G. Qualification Data: If required, submit a letter indicating that installer is

authorized by the manufacturer to install specified product. H. Installer's Experience Record: Submit a list of at least five 5 installations

that have been installed for a minimum of 3 years of window shades similar in size, type and scope as described in this document. Include contact names and phone numbers.

I. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's recommended cleaning and

maintenance data as specified in Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. Include precautions about cleaning materials that could damage or discolor the shade fabric.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm specializing in manufacturing chain operated clutch roller shades with at least 7 years experience.

B. Installers shall be specially trained in the installation of chain operated clutch

roller shades. Installers shall have completed at least 5 commercial installations of chain operated clutch roller shades similar to those specified in this Section.

1.5 MOCKUP

A. Not Used B. Construct a mock-up of one roller shade assembly for evaluation of

mounting, appearance and accessories. 1. Locate mock-up in window designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted by Architect.

C. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.


1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened packages, labeled to show manufacturer's name and product name.

B. Storage:

1. Store materials in a clean area, free of corrosive fumes, dust, and away from construction activities.

2. Stack chain operated clutch roller shades horizontally using plastic or wood shims such that drainage and ventilation are provided for, and such that water cannot accumulate in, about or upon containers.

3. Cover stacks with tarpaulins or plastic such that ventilation is provided for, and such that contaminants are prevented from contacting surfaces.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete. Air conditioning system shall be operating, and ambient temperature shall be between 60 degrees F. and 85 degrees F. Relative humidity shall be between 45 percent and 65 percent.

B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of adjoining construction by field measurements before fabrication. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware.

C. Before Installation Begins of Chain Operated Clutch Roller Shades 1. Roof shall tight, windows and frames installed and glazed, and

interior doors hung. 2. Wet work including concrete, masonry, plaster, stucco, and

terrazzo, shall be complete and dry. 3. Application of gypsum wallboard, joint treatment, taping and

sanding shall be complete and dry. 4. Ceilings, window pockets, electrical, and mechanical work above

the product shall be complete. 5. Flooring materials such as carpet, tile, etc. must be completed.

D. Electrical power (110 volt AC) shall be available for installer's tools within

500 feet of product installation areas. 1.9 WARRANTY

A. Not used.

B. Manufacturer's Limited Warranty: Provide Manufacturer's 25 year limited warranty against product defects.


1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Not used. B. Furnish additional mounting brackets, in the amount of 3 percent of the

amount installed, for each type used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROLLER SHADES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Mariak Contract; www.mariak.com. 2. Castec Inc.;www.castec.com 3. Skyco Shading Systems; www.skycoshade.com 4. MechoShade Systems, Inc., www.mechoshade. com 5. Substitutions: Section 01 63 00 - Product Options and Substitutions

B. Product Description and Basis of Design: Mariak Manual Roller Window Shades. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Chain operated clutch roller shade system shall consist of a roller, brackets to support the roller, a flexible fabric carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom bar, and a chain operator to lift and lower the shade.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Fabric: PVC-coated fiberglass and polyester blend 1. Material: SheerWeave 4600 2. Color: V44 – Sandstone 3. Material Solar-Optical Properties:

a. Material Openness Factor: + 3 percent b. Material UV Blockage: + 97 percent c. Solar Transmittance: 5 percent d. Solar Reflectance: 39 percent e. Solar Absorbtance: 56 percent f. Visual Transmittance: 6 percent g. Shading Coefficient with 1: Insulting Clear Glass: 0.45

4. Standard Roll Widths: 63”, 98” 5. Composition: 22% Polyester / 78% Vinyl. 6. Mesh/Inch: 45 Warp / 35 Fill 7. Mesh Weight: 17.40 oz./yd2. 8. Yarn Diameter (inch): 0.013 Warp / 0.020 Fill 9. Fabric Thickness (inch): 0.030 10. Breaking Strength (lbs): 183 Warp / 308 Fill 11. Stiffness (Mg): 230 Warp / 439 Fill 12. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Material shall pass the following:

a. Small scale vertical burn: NFPA 701-1999, Test Method No.

http://www.mariak.com/

http://www.castec.com/

http://www.skycoshade.com/


1, and California Title 19 b. Large scale vertical burn: NFPA 701-1999, Test Method No. 2 c. Fire Rating: NFPA Class A

13. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: Shade cloth shall conform to requirements for ‘No Growth’ in accordance with ASTM G21 results for fungi, using fungus samples ATCC 9642, 9644, and 9645.

B. Clutch Mechanism: Corrosion resistant PA-6 plastic with glass fiber and internal mechanism of Nylon 6 construction. Provide a heavy-duly single spring that creates a positive mechanical relationship between the roller shade tube unit and the universal installation brackets to ensure stationary positioning in the static state. When activated the wrap spring shall release and permit the clutch to turn while reducing friction on the clutch. Clutch mechanisms with multiple springs are not acceptable. 1. Clutch End Locking System: The clutch shall have a locking system,

which prevents the shade from coming out of its brackets if the shade is operated incorrectly.

C. Spring Loaded Idle End Cap: The Idle end of clutch shall be spring loaded to provide secure anchorage into end bracket.

D. Tube Mechanism: Extruded T6 aluminum with a wall thickness not less than 0.062 inch. Each tube shall have at least one Secure Grip Spline fabric-fixing slot to increase the rigidity of the tube and eliminate sagging when the shade is operated. T5 aluminum is not acceptable. 1. Tube sizes shall be as proposed by manufacturer for each

condition, and as indicated on approved submittals. 2. Spline Mounting System: Secure Grip Spline Method, consisting

of flexible PVC extrusion RF (radio frequency) or impulse welded to the shade fabric. The spline shall be inserted into a slot on the extruded aluminum tube. The spline shall provide a positive mechanical attachment of the shade band to the tube. The spline shall be designed to allow fabric to be easily removed and re-installed on the roller shade tube without having to remove the roller tube from the brackets. Splines that slide in the tube mechanism from the edge are not acceptable. Double-sided tape or glue methods of fabric attachment are not acceptable.

E. Hembars:

1. External Exposed Hembar: Powder coated or anodized aluminum extrusion attached at bottom of shade and enclosed with plastic end caps.

F. Tube Mounting Brackets: Universal type, capable of attachment at top,

face, and with left hand or right hand controls. Brackets shall accept end cap locking system. If selected without Valance/Fascia, bracket color shall be white or black, painted finish as selected. Zinc plated or mill finish brackets are not acceptable. Size shall be as required for each condition, and as indicated on approved submittals.


G. Chain: Qualified No. 10 stainless steel ball chain.

H. Valance/Fascia: Provide an aluminum fascia in square profile to conceal the roller shade tube mechanism. Valance/fascia shall have a wall thickness of 5/16", with paint finish in color as selected. The fascia shall be attached to the tube mounting brackets by snapping it into place on a hinge rib clip. Size shall be as required to conceal the roller tube and rolled-up shade fabric. Color shall be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection. 1. Where ends of fascia are exposed, provide end caps.

I. Head Box/Pocket: Provide single shade pocket with closure plate to encase and conceal

the roller shade tube mechanism. The head box shall be capable of installation either in a ceiling pocket, to the ceiling, or to the wall. Where exposed, provide aluminum end caps attached at each exposed end of the extrusion. Color shall be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate shades square, and free of sharp edges, burrs or other defects.

B. Shade Units Installed Between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Not used.

B. Inspect substrates and conditions affecting work of this Section. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Verify that room temperature is a minimum of 65 degrees F. and that painting and other dust- producing operations are complete.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures except as otherwise specified herein.


B. Install shades with adequate clearance to permit smooth operation of shades and any sash operators. Hold roller shades 1/4" clear from each side of window opening on inside mount unless other clearance is indicated. 1. Install shades so that clearance between fabric and glass is in accordance with

the GANA "Glazing Manual" for types of glass used on the project. 3.4 CLEANING

A. Not used.

B. Clean soiled shades surfaces with a mild soap solution. Do not use steam, hot water, bleach or any abrasive or solvent-based cleaners. Do not machine wash. To ensure proper drying, provide adequate ventilation for shades.

3.5 PROTECTION

A Not used. B. Protect chain operated clutch roller shades as required to assure that they will be

without damage at substantial completion. C. Replace damaged and defective chain operated clutch roller shades in accordance with

to satisfaction of Architect. 3.6 SCHEDULE

A. Provide an individual roller shade with Head Box at each window opening in the project, and where an opening is divided into multiple bays with vertical mullions or sash members, provide a separate shade for each bay, except where the proportion of tall thin windows will inhibit proper operation of the shades. In this case, shades may cover no more than two window bays.

END OF SECTION

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL SELECTIVE REMOVALS, RELOCATIONS,

PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT AND REARRANGEMENTS

DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 26 00 11 - 1

SELECTIVE REMOVALS, RELOCATIONS,

AND REARRANGEMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Drawings indicate renovated areas and identify those portions of buildings where

renovation work shall be provided. Identified areas of buildings show electric work that

shall be provided.

B. Removals, relocations and rearrangements shall be performed in all identified areas, as

shown on Drawings.

C. The Contract Documents include D0800 series Demolition Drawings. These Demolition

Drawings shall be interpreted as incomplete, and in general represent existing building

electrical conditions.

1. The Demolition Drawings included in the Contract Documents are not to be

considered complete or accurate, and are included only to provide the general scope

and extent of selective removals, relocations and rearrangements to be included.

Visit the site prior to submitting the bid, to verify existing building conditions, in

order to more accurately establish the removals, relocations and rearrangements

required.

2. The Demolition Drawings include description notes that provide an overall intent

of removals, relocations and rearrangements.

D. Examine the existing structures and installations for the work of other trades which will

influence the cost of the work on this project. The work shall include removals,

relocations and rearrangements affecting the work of this Division as follows:

1. Relating directly or incidental to the construction.

2. The work of other Divisions which may interfere with, disturb, or complicate, the

performance of the construction.

3. Involving systems and/or equipment and relocated service lines which shall

continue to be used or operated as part of the finished project.

4. Luminaires, lamps, and ballasts.

E. Include in the base bid a dollar amount to provide the following scope of work associated

with the survey, and determination of, the extent of removals required for this project:

1. Survey existing fluorescent luminaires within the project spaces and work areas,

scheduled for removals, for the purpose of determining whether or not PCB

containing ballasts are present in existing luminaires, and whether or not the

ballast(s) are leaking.

2. Provide a non-destructive survey and investigation of existing fluorescent

luminaires, including opening recessed troffer lens doors, temporarily removing

lenses (on luminaires without lens doors), lamps, ballast covers, etc., in order to

visually inspect and record luminaire ballast data.




3. In any given room or space, where existing fluorescent luminaires are scheduled to

be disconnected and removed, and potentially reinstalled, survey and inspect each

luminaire for the purpose of determining whether or not a PCB containing ballasts

exists, and whether or not it is leaking.

4. Record the data for future action, and provide copies of the data to the Owner and

Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Existing device locations have been identified as completely as possible by a site survey

and by record documents as available. Be responsible for proper removal and rework of

devices, equipment, and their associated work, not shown on Drawings to conform with

intent of documents.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General:

1. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors and ceiling scheduled for removal.

2. Coordinate utility outages with the Electric Utility Company and the Owner.

3. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service

during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or

circuits, use personnel experienced in such operation.

B. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new systems are

complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and

connections. Obtain permission from the Owner at least two weeks before partially or

completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections

to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

C. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only

to make switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner and local fire service at least 72

hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make

temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

D. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service.

3.3 GENERAL RENOVATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Remove all electric work presently installed on or in existing walls, ceilings and partitions

which are to be demolished. Remove all exposed portions of wiring and raceways.

B. Remove all exposed raceways, exposed and concealed outlet boxes, etc. that are not to be

reused where existing walls are to remain. Where new raceways and outlet boxes are

shown on existing walls in finished rooms, they shall be installed concealed by cutting

and patching method.




C. Reuse existing outlet boxes and raceway systems wherever practical in renovation areas.

Install new wiring devices, coverplates, and wiring per applicable specification sections,

where such existing outlet boxes are used. Special coverplates may be required to suit

conditions.

D. Disconnect and remove, per NEC Articles 770 and 800, exposed feeder, branch circuit,

remote control, power limited, non-power limited, and signal line system raceways and

their associated circuits and wiring, including wiring for systems and equipment

operating at 50 volts or less not installed in raceway rendered inoperable due to removals,

relocations and rearrangements. This shall include the complete removal of wiring and

cable abandoned by other Divisions, above or below ceilings, as part of this project.

E. Disconnect, remove, rework, and otherwise rearrange existing raceways and wiring to

accommodate new circuit arrangements indicated and/or required to maintain continuity

of existing circuits feeding devices that are to remain.

F. Be responsible for removal and reinstallation of existing electrical equipment to

accommodate the work of or disturbed by other trades.

G. In such cases where new circuit breakers or fusible switches are to be added to existing

electrical distribution equipment, they shall be of the same manufacturer and design as

the existing breakers or fusible switches with matching AIC ratings, except as otherwise

noted, and shall be of the sizes as shown on Drawings.

1. Be responsible for rearranging any and all existing circuit breakers within the

existing equipment, to facilitate the installation of new circuit breakers being added.

Provide additional bus, bus extensions, bolts and hardware, enclosure

modifications, directory modifications, etc., required to accomplish these

modifications.

2. Provide new arc-fault signage per Division 26 Sections "Protective Device

Coordination" and "Electrical Identification", where changes to the electrical

distribution system alter or change the rating, hazard or safety requirements for the

room, space, or area.

H. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections.

Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions.

Provide types circuits directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

3.4 SALVAGING

A. Stockpile removed, electrical equipment, devices, components, etc. on job site, for reuse,

until project closeout, unless specifically directed otherwise.

B. Legally remove items from site that the Owner does not wish to salvage.

3.5 LUMINAIRE REMOVALS

A. Remove from the site, and legally dispose of, disconnected and removed luminaires, that

have been previously determined to not contain PCB fluorescent ballasts, and that the

Owner does not wish to retain.

1. Remove lamps from luminaires and dispose of separately.




B. Do not use existing luminaires that have been determined to contain integral or remote

mounted PCB fluorescent ballasts, either known, or determined by field survey and

investigation.

1. Disconnect and remove the PCB containing fluorescent ballast(s), if the ballast(s)

is not leaking, per the ballast disposal requirements written herein, and replace with

a new non-PCB replacement ballast.

2. Notify the project Owner if the PCB containing ballast is leaking, and proceed no

further. The luminaire is considered contaminated and hazardous. Removal of the

luminaire shall be the responsibility of the Owner.

C. Do not remove or re-use existing luminaires installed in project spaces being abated for

asbestos. Luminaires installed in project spaces being abated for asbestos shall be

considered hazardous material, and as such shall be removed as part of the abatement

process.

D. Do not remove existing luminaires installed in suspended, or other false ceiling spaces

below known asbestos containing ceiling cavities. Luminaires installed in such ceiling

spaces shall be considered hazardous material, and their removal shall be responsibility

of the Owner.

3.6 LAMP DISPOSAL

A. Fluorescent, mercury vapor, metal halide, high pressure sodium, and neon lamps, contain

some amount of the chemical mercury, and as such shall be handled as hazardous waste.

B. Lamp removal and disposal (both mercury containing and low-mercury types) shall be

legally disposed of, in accordance with the requirements of the United States

Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) Universal Waste Rule (64 FR 36465-

36490), and the state and local level project locale disposal requirements.

C. Lamp removal and disposal (both mercury containing and low-mercury types) shall be

legally disposed of, in accordance with the requirements of the United States

Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) Universal Waste Rule (64 FR 36465-

36490), and the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation (NYSDEC)

Enforcement Directive 6 NYCRR Part 364.

D. Remove lamps separately from their respective luminaires, and place (unbroken) into

approved, labeled containers.

1. Containers may be new cardboard boxes with cardboard lamp sleeves, or discarded

cardboard boxes from new lamps with the lamp spacers left intact.

E. The total weight for all on-site, project related, disposed lamp containers, cannot exceed

500 lbs. at any one time. The containers shall be removed from the project site, delivered

or picked-up by a licensed lamp recycler, and legally disposed of, within one (1) year of

lamp removal.

3.7 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLAST DISPOSAL

A. Dispose of ballasts identified or labeled "NON-PCB", "NO PCB", or similar marking,

(indicating that the ballast does not contain PCB), as ordinary construction waste.




B. Ballasts not identified or labeled "NON-PCB", "NO PCB", or similar marking (indicating

that the ballast does not contain PCB), shall be presumed to be PCB containing, and shall

be handled as hazardous waste.

C. Remove non-leaking ballasts containing PCB, or presumed to be containing PCB, from

their respective luminaires.

1. Provide protective gloves, eye protection, and protective clothing, for the person(s)

removing ballasts.

2. Place removed ballasts in contractor provided 55 or 30 gallon, US DOT approved,

type 17C, or 17H drums (barrels). The quantity and size of the drums shall be

determined by the Contractor.

3. Provide approved PCB absorbent materials placed and stored immediately adjacent

to the drum storage area. Do not place loose absorbent material inside the drums.

4. Label and mark the PCB ballast storage drums with EPA approved PCB labels, and

provide the appropriate warning signs, markings, and clearance lines, to meet the

federal, state, and local hazardous materials handling regulations.

5. Place barrels containing removed PCB containing ballasts at an on-site, indoor

storage location, sealed with the cover that came with the barrels. Barrels shall not

be placed outside exposed to weather.

6. Provide to the Project representative, in written form, the total count of the ballasts

removed (or their total weight by barrel), and where they are stored.

7. Barrels containing removed PCB ballasts shall not to be removed from the work

site by the Contractor. To do so, would be a violation of DOT hazardous waste

regulations and may result in a fine. Provide for the services of an authorized

hazardous waste hauler to remove and deliver the ballasts to an authorized recycler,

or PCB incinerator facility.

D. Do not remove ballasts containing PCB, or presumed to be containing PCB, that are

visibly showing signs of leakage (evidenced by potting compound leakage or by an oily

film on the ballast surface), from their respective luminaire. The entire luminaire shall

be presumed to be contaminated, and shall be handled as a hazardous material.

1. Notify the project Owner, and proceed no further. Removal of the luminaire shall

be the responsibility of the Owner.






WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR

PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT ELECTRICAL


COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative, material, and procedural requirements for Division

26 to supplement the requirements specified in Division 01.

B. Work Results: Complete Division 26 systems in accordance with the intent of the

Contract Documents.

C. Work Performance:

1. All electrical work must comply with requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 70B,

NFPA 70E, OSHA Part 1910 Subpart J, OSHA Part 1910 Subpart S, and OSHA

Part 1910 Subpart K in addition to other references required by the Contract.

2. Before initiating any work, provide a job specific work plan. The work plan must

include procedures to be used on and near the live electrical equipment, barriers to

be installed, and safety equipment to be used and exit pathways.

3. Be responsible for job site and worker safety. Compliance with the requirements

of NFPA 70E is subject to ongoing inspection by Owner personnel and failure to

comply will result in an immediate Stop Work order being issued and enforced at

the Contractor's expense.

4. Energized electrical conductors and circuit parts to which a building occupant

might be exposed shall be put into an electrically safe work condition before the

occupant is within the limited approach boundary or, where an increased risk of

injury from an exposure to an arc flash hazard exists.

5. Protective Equipment: Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e.,

certified and tested insulating material to cover exposed energized electrical

components, certified and tested insulated tools, etc.) while working on energized

systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.

1.2 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Permits: Obtain and pay for all permits, bonds, licenses, tap-in fees, etc., required by the

City, State, or other authority having jurisdiction over the work, as a part of the work of

the affected sections.

B. Inspections: Arrange and pay for all inspections required by the above when they become

due as part of the work of the sections affected. Conceal no work until approved by these

governing authorities. Coordinate inspection period with Authorities Having Jurisdiction

and Engineer. Present the Engineer with properly signed certificate of final inspection.

1.3 SEQUENCING, SCHEDULING, AND COORDINATION

A. Coordinate facility services as outlined in Division 20 Section "Common Work Results,

Division 21 through 28."

B. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of Division 26 equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that

reduce headroom are indicated.




2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to

other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.

4. To assure connections of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will

be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place

concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished

surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08

Section "Access Doors and Frames."

1. Ensure access doors are sized to permit complete access for concealed or

inaccessible junction boxes, control and monitoring devices, elevator shaft and duct

mounted fire alarm detectors and other items of equipment requiring access,

maintenance, and/or operation.

a. Assure access to devices per codes and local authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Coordinate equipment furnished by Division 26: Install and wire in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable standards and codes. Provide

installation instructions, locating dimensions and wiring diagrams for the other trades.

Supervise the installation and start-up and test the equipment unless otherwise specified.

F. Coordinate Equipment Furnished by Other Divisions: Equipment specified in other

Divisions and requiring electrical supply will be erected, aligned, leveled, and prepared

for operation. Provide required controls and accessories along with installation

instructions, diagrams, dimensions, and supervision of installation and start-up. Provide

the required electrical rough-ins and confirm the electrical controls and accessories

furnished under the specifications for the other divisions. Install those controls and

accessories not located in the mechanical piping and ductwork. Provide additional

electrical controls, accessories, fittings, and devices not specified under the equipment

but required for a finished, operating job. Make final electrical connections. Participate

in the start-up and test services.

G. Coordination with Local Electrical and Telecommunication Utilities and Services:

1. Coordinate connection of electrical and telecommunication systems with exterior

underground utilities and services and meet all of their schedules so that the

electrical services proceeds in a timely and orderly fashion. Comply with

requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and

controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

2. Locations and details required by Division 26 for the utility rough-in shall be the

responsibility of Division 26.


A. General: Provide required submittals in accordance with Division 01 "Submittal

Procedures."




B. Definitions:

1. Submittals: A written or graphic expression of the Contractor’s interpretation of

requirements in the Contract Documents to show how the Contractor intends to

fulfill those requirements. Identify deviations from Contract Documents.

2. Action Submittals: Required submittal which Engineer reviews and approves or

takes other appropriate action to communicate to the Contractor the status if the

submittal and subsequent action required.

3. Other (Information, Closeout and Maintenance and Material) Submittals: Required

submittals which Engineer reviews and may elect to respond. If rejected by

Engineer for not complying with requirements, resubmittal or other action may be

required on the part of the Contractor.

C. Failure to Submit:

1. Contractor’s failure to provide submittals does not alleviate the responsibility to

provide the requirements in the Contract Document as interpreted by the Engineer.

Correct non-compliant items.

D. Applicable Information:

1. All information not applicable to the project shall be crossed out in the submittal.

All applicable accessories, options, etc., shall be clearly indicated. Failure to

comply shall be grounds for the submittal to be rejected.


A. Submit action submittals in groups by systems. For example, all lighting fixtures, lamps,

ballasts, and accessories shall be submitted simultaneously in one package.

B. Submit the following action submittals as qualified in associated Division 26 Sections:

1. Conduit fittings.

2. Electrical identification.

3. Fire alarm systems.

4. Panelboards.

5. Protective devices.

6. Underground ducts and manholes.

C. Action submittals submitted for other than those listed above or specifically required in

the appropriate Specification Section will not be reviewed or returned.

D. Contractor Certificates:

1. Contractor certification forms may be submitted in accordance with Division 01

Section "Submittal Procedures" in lieu of system action submittal product data

requirements except for the systems or products listed below:

a. Protective devices.





A. Coordination Drawings:

1. Submit general coordination drawings in accordance with Division 01 Section

"Project Management Coordination," to a scale of 1/4" = 1'-0" or larger; detailing

major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in

relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate

locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing

and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work,

including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

a. Indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems, equipment, and

materials. Include the following:

1) Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment

disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

2) Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.

3) Raceways embedded in concrete slabs, within poured concrete

construction, under slab on grade, and through foundation walls.

Identify raceways specific application, size and type.

4) Wall and floor sleeve penetrations.

5) Equipment connections and support details.

b. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large

equipment into the building during construction.

c. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors,

walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and

installations.

d. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air

outlets and inlets, luminaires, communications systems components,

sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted devices.

2. Submit the following specific coordination drawings and others as defined in other

Division 26 Sections:

a. Feeder Routings.

3. Contract Document drawing copies may be used as base for coordination drawings

then marked to depict actual equipment sizes and other requirements of

coordination drawings. Those not marked will be rejected.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Prepare and submit operations and maintenance manuals in accordance with

Division 01 Sections "Operation and Maintenance Data" and "Closeout

Procedures". In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, include

specific Division 26 Section requirements, and the following general information

for equipment items:

a. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature

and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

b. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and

routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping,

shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating

instructions.

c. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and

troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting

instructions.

d. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

2. Include the following minimum information in the operations and maintenance

manual:

a. Individual characteristics for trouble shooting sequences for each item of

each:

1) Distribution Panel.

2) Fire Alarm System.

b. Catalog cut sheets for every item for which a shop drawing is required.

c. Schedule of loads served from each:


d. On-hand spare parts list and complete parts list for each:


e. Main and arcing contact adjustment and replacement for each:

1) Circuit breaker.

2) Fused switch.

f. Calibration and exercise procedures and intervals for each:

1) Molded case breaker.

g. Testing interval and target values for ground fault protection circuit relays.

h. Testing and troubleshooting procedures unique to special systems. For

example:

1) Water tightness tests for manholes and handholes.

2) Infrared scanning.




3) Phase balancing.

4) High-pot tests.

i. Approved special construction details that differ from the details shown on

Drawings.

j. Permits and inspections certificates.

k. Testing results.

l. Final submittal copy.

m. Special warranty information.

n. Service contract data.

B. Record Documents:

1. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 01

Section "Project Closeout Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in

Division 01, indicate installed conditions for:

a. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior;

locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and

fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.

b. Major equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from

prominent building lines.

c. Contract Modifications and actual equipment and materials installed.

d. Training and demonstration videos.

e. Keying schedules.

f. Software CDs.

g. Final field quality control test reports.

2. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the

state in which the project is located as specified in Division 01 Section "Execution"

to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations.


A. Extra Material:

1. Provide four (4) keys for every different piece of electrical equipment which is

equipped with a lock.

2. Provide all other loose equipment and extra material specified or supplied for use

with all systems.


A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and

marked for intended use.

C. Obtain similar products through one source from a single manufacturer.




D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct

the testing indicated and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. For electrical power equipment and systems, the agency shall be a member

company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) or is a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR

1910.7.

2. For other than electrical power equipment or where NETA is not a recognized

testing agent, the testing agency shall be as defined in the appropriate Division 26

Section.


A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,

grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Work and materials shall conform to and be executed, inspected and tested in accordance

with the latest edition of the California Electric Code and with the governing rules and

regulations of federal, state and local governmental agencies. References to CEC within

the Division 26 Sections shall be considered synonymous to this electrical code.

B. Other codes and standards which will apply to this installation include the current editions

of:

1. ANSI C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.

2. NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee

Workspaces.

3. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

4. Underwriters Laboratories.

C. Where governing codes indicate the Drawings and Specifications do not comply with the

minimum requirements of applicable codes, be responsible for either notifying the

Architect in writing during the bidding period of the revisions required to meet code

requirements, or providing an installation which will comply with the code requirements.

D. U.L. Listing:

1. All electrical equipment, products and materials shall bear the Underwriter's

Laboratories (UL), or other approved agency, listing label. Acceptable alternates

include:

a. Intertek Testing Service NA, Inc. (ITSNA) (formerly ETL).

b. Wherein an item of equipment is specified to be U.L. Listed, the entire

assembly shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Any

modifications to suit the intent of the Specifications shall be performed in

accordance with the National Electrical Code and listed by U.L.




2. Definitions:

a. Listed: Equipment or materials included in a list published by an

organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned

with product evaluation, that maintain periodic inspection of production of

listed equipment or materials, and whose listing states either that the

equipment or material meets appropriate designated standards or has been

tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner.

b. Labeled: Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol,

or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the authority

having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation that maintains

periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or materials and by

who is labeling the manufacturer indicated compliance with appropriate

standards or performance in a specified manner.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Products and the terms materials, equipment, devices, components, assemblies, and

systems are considered synonymous.

B. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of

the manufacturer. Seconds, rejects, or damaged materials will be rejected.

C. The materials to be provided under these Specifications shall be essentially the standard

commercial grade product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same

class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer.

D. The listing of a manufacturer for certain products does not indicate acceptance of a

standard or catalogued item of equipment. All products shall conform to the

Specifications.

E. All equipment and materials specified shall be products currently in production.

1. If the specified item is not available or is discontinued, a similar product with the

same features and functionality shall be provided from the same manufacturer in

the newer/upgraded series of product.

2. Equipment and/or devices discovered to be discontinued after submission approval

will not be accepted and will require resubmittal for an approved replacement.

F. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicated maximum dimensions for

products including clearances between products and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum product dimensions.

1. Assembly Selection: The Drawings indicated sizes, profiles and dimensional

requirements of assembly equipment. Equipment having equal performance

characteristics and complying with indicated maximum dimensions and profiles

may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept intended

performance, or code/future extension provision clearances. The burden of proof

of equality is on the proposer a minimum of 10 days prior to bid.

G. Include the component parts thereof equipment such as disconnect switches, motor

controllers, motors, drives, and guards necessary to the satisfactory and safe operation of

the equipment.




2.3 SOFTWARE PROTECTION

A. All software supplied with new equipment shall be warranted against leap year program

failure.

B. All software supplied with the new equipment shall be warranted against Daylight

Savings Time program disruption or failure. Refer to Division 01 Section "Warranties

and Supplementary Conditions for Requirements."

C. All software shall be the most current release of the latest available software of the

equipment provided.

1. BETA software versions will not be accepted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General:

1. Comply with NECA 1 – "Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical

Contracting."

2. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to

center of unit for wall-mounting items.

3. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not

indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum

possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

4. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect

in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with

other items in the vicinity.

5. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

B. Manufacturer's Directions and Supervision:

1. Follow all instructions where supervision by a manufacturer is specified. Provide

recommended manufacturer and specified field tests, and other recommendations

of the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall supervise the installation, connection,

start-up, testing, adjustment, instruction of the Owner and final tests of such

equipment or system. Where two or more manufacturer's equipment are

interrelated, take responsibility to coordinate their work and provide supervision.

2. Have the manufacturer instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance

techniques of all equipment, systems, etc., at the time of completion of all work.

C. Rough-In:

1. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the

requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

2. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 28 for rough-in

requirements.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems,

materials, and equipment.

2. Workmanship shall conform to NECA 1 – "Standard for Good Workmanship in

Electrical Contracting" published by the National Electrical Contractors

Association.

B. Locations:

1. When Drawing details are not available, the Architect shall control the placement

of wall and ceiling mounted electrical devices, luminaires and outlets. The intent

is to aesthetically locate luminaires/outlets by providing rough-in hardware, boxes

and/or mounting plates, as required, when stud or furring may not be readily

available for direct mounting. Consult with Architect's representative for actual

placement.

2. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other

building components. Be responsible for any changes in openings and locations

necessitated by the equipment installed.

3. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

4. Install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom

possible, where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned.

5. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,

including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to

arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of

the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements

conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

6. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and

perpendicular to other building systems and components.

7. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or

replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment

for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems

required to be installed at a specified slope.

C. Field Coordination:

1. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during

progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations.

2. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

3. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large

equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

4. Protect all equipment and materials from the elements, dirt and other damage from

the time it is removed from the point of storage until final acceptance.

5. Include setting equipment to accurate line and grade, leveling equipment, aligning

equipment components, providing and installing couplings, bolts, guards, and

anchor bolts.




6. Alignment and level and meet the quality of workmanship subject to manufacturer's

installation instructions.

7. Provide all trench and conduit excavation and backfilling required for his work

inside and outside the building, including repairing of finished surfaces, all required

shoring, bracing, pumping, and all protection for safety of persons and property. In

addition, check the indicated elevations of the utilities entering and leaving the

building. If such elevations require excavations lower than the footing levels, the

Architect shall be notified of such conditions and a redesign shall be made before

excavations are commenced. Make the excavations at the minimum required

depths in order not to undercut the footings.

8. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and

delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall

be removed from the premises when no longer required.

9. No electrical equipment, raceways or other work of any kind shall be covered up

or hidden from view before it has been examined and approved. Any unsatisfactory

work or materials shall be removed and corrected immediately.

10. Coordinate installation of access panel or doors where units are concealed behind

finished surfaces.

D. Excavation:

1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and

brace as required for stability of excavation.

2. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to

comply with local codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in

excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open.

a. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is

allowed to remain, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below

finished grade elevation.

3. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and

ordinances.

4. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing

into excavations and form flooding project site and surrounding area.

a. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent

softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system

components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

b. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions

outside excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run-off

areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

5. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until

required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

a. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store

within drip-line of trees indicated to remain.

b. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not

acceptable for use as backfill or fill.




6. Excavation for Underground Electrical Structures: Conform to elevations and

dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient

distance to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of

services, other construction and for inspection.

a. Excavate, by hand, areas within dri-line of large trees. Protect the root system

from damage and dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and

cover exposed rots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1 inch in diameter and

larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.

b. Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final

grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed.

7. Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installations as follows:

a. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample

working room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inch clearance on both sides of

raceways and equipment.

b. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required.

c. Limit the length of open trench to that in which installations can be made and

the trench backfilled within the same day.

d. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and

backfill with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of

raceways and equipment. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel

cushion between rock bearing surface and electrical installations.

8. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade

elevations for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part

2 of this Section.

a. Under walls and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and

excavated or borrowed materials.

b. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials.

c. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock

bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation.

d. For raceways less than 30 inches below surface of roadways, provide 4 inch

thick concrete base slab support. After installation of raceways, provide a 4

inch thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and

placement of roadway subbase.

e. Other areas use excavated or borrowed materials.

9. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the

following:

a. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been

recorded.

b. Removal of concrete formwork.

c. Removal of shoring and bracing and backfilling of voids.

d. Removal of trash and debris.




10. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more

than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment and not

more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated

tampers.

11. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum

moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry

density or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not

place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen or contain frost or

ice.

12. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping and equipment

to required elevations. Prevent displacement of raceways and equipment by

carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each

lift.

13. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum

percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below.

a. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less

than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a

well-defined moisture density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in

accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than the following percentages

of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils

which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship

(cohesionless soils).

1) Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements:

Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill

material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95

percent relative density for cohesionless material.

2) Areas Under Walkways: Compact tope 6 inches of subgrade and each

layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for

cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless

material.

3) Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of

backfill or fill material to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive

soils and 90 percent relative density for cohesionless soils.

b. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture

conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in

minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to

prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction

operations.

14. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at electrical installation excavations during

the period 12 months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e.

pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified

conditions and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, qualify and

condition of surface of finish to match adjacent areas.




E. Cutting and Patching:

1. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 01 Section

"Cutting and Patching." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01,

the following requirements apply:

a. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials

required to:

1) Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.

2) Remove and replace defective Work.

3) Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the

Contract Documents.

4) Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.

5) Install equipment and materials in existing structures.

6) Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore

Work to provide for Architect observation of concealed Work.

b. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment,

components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal

of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the

new Work.

c. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not

indicated or scheduled to be removed.

d. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to

prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

e. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect

adjacent installations.

f. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new

materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers'

qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and

building components being patched.

1) Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for definition of

experience "Installer."

g. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials

specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers'



1) Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for definition of

experienced "Installer."




F. Painting:

1. Provide the prime painting of all equipment and materials furnished under Division

26 specifications, unless specifically stated otherwise. In general, all equipment

except raceways and galvanized boxes that are not provided with a factory-applied

final finish shall be delivered to the job site with a shop applied prime coat of paint.

Refer to Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

2. All manufacturers' finished equipment surfaces damaged during construction shall

be brought to an "as new" condition by touch up or repainting. Any rust shall be

completely removed and the surface primed prior to repainting as specified in

Division 09.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Refer to Division 26 Section "Electrical Inspections and Testing."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Complete system programming to the satisfaction of the Owner. If, after preliminary use

of the system or training, the increased understanding of the system’s features and

capabilities necessitate programming or set-up adjustments, perform at no additional cost.

B. Provide software programming changes to match Owner’s final room number

designations. The room numbers indicated on the Drawings are not necessarily the final

room numbers and may be subject to change by the Owner.

C. Provide on-site assistance in reprogramming software based system to suit actual

occupied conditions during the warranty period. Provide up to three (3) 8-hour visits to

the site for this purpose.






WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS

PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT AND TESTING


ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes electrical equipment and systems inspections and testing

requirements for Division 26 to expand the requirements specified in Division 01 and

Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical." This Section includes:

1. Electrical Acceptance Testing.

2. General Electrical Field Quality Control:

a. Operational Testing.

b. Functional Performance Testing.

c. Corrective Action.

d. System Certifications.

e. Demonstrations and Training.

1.2 TESTING DESCRIPTION

A. Test, inspect, and calibrate electrical equipment and material installed and connected

under Division 26. The purposes of these inspections, tests, and calibrations are to assure

that the installed electrical systems and equipment are:

1. Installed in accordance with design specifications and manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Ready to be energized.

3. Operational and within industry and manufacturer’s tolerances.

B. Provide all material, equipment, labor and technical supervision to perform specified

tests, inspections, studies and calibration.

C. Implement all testing at the project site.

1.3 ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor Responsibilities:

1. Pretesting:

a. Perform routine insulation resistance, continuity and rotation tests for

distribution and utilization equipment prior to and in addition to tests

performed by the specified testing agency specified in this Section.

b. Supply one set of the following for use in conjunction with electrical

acceptance testing: short circuit analysis, coordination study, protective

device setting table, complete set of electrical Drawings, Specifications and

any pertinent Change Orders.

2. Scheduling:

a. Schedule project to allow adequate time for electrical acceptance testing.

Notify the testing agency when equipment becomes available for acceptance

tests. Coordinate work to expedite inspection and test scheduling.

b. Notify the Owner and Engineer not less than seven (7) days prior to

commencement of any testing.




3. Testing Agency Support:

a. Supply a suitable and stable source of electrical power to each test site.

Coordinate specific power requirements with the testing agency.

b. Witness and report to the Engineer, any system, material, equipment or

workmanship which is found defective on the basis of acceptance tests or

inspections by the testing agency.

c. Maintain a written record of all tests and, upon completion of project,

assemble and submit a certified final test report that includes the test

procedures and test results for each system and equipment item.

4. Corrective Action:

a. Within 15 days of direction from the Engineer, rework, repair or replace any

system, material, equipment or workmanship which is found defective on the

basis of acceptance tests or inspections at the Contractor’s expense.

B. Testing Responsibilities:

1. Independent Testing Agency: Engage an independent qualified testing and

inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports for

the equipment identified as "I" in the testing responsibility matrix below.

2. Contractor Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports for the equipment

identified as "C" in the testing responsibility matrix below.

C. Testing Responsibility Matrix:

System Testing Agency

Grounding Systems I

Panelboards C

1.4 GENERAL ELECTRICAL FIELD QUALITY CONTROL RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor Responsibilities:

1. Operational Tests.

2. Functional Performance Testing.

3. Corrective action other than calibration deficiencies.

4. System Certifications.

5. Demonstrations and Training.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01

Specification Sections, and Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical."


A. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Provide with exception to Owner Testing Agency.




B. Field Quality Control Test Reports:

1. Field test reports.

2. Field inspection reports.

3. Demonstration reports.

4. Manufacturer’s field reports.

5. Systems Certifications.


A. Submit a final report of testing and inspection at the completion of the project. Include

the following information:

1. Summary of the project.

2. Description of the equipment tested.

3. Visual inspection report.

4. Description of the tests.

5. Test results.

6. Conclusions and recommendations.

7. Appendix including appropriate test forms.

8. Identification of the test equipment used and calibration date.

9. Systems certification with signature of technicians.


A. Demonstration and training materials and recorded electronic media.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct

the testing indicated and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. For electrical power equipment and systems, the agency shall be a member

company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) or is a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR

1910.7.

2. For other than electrical power equipment or where NETA is not a recognized

testing agent, the testing agency shall be as defined in the appropriate Division 26

Section.

3. The testing agency shall have successfully completed not less than five (5)

acceptance testing, inspection, and calibration projects of similar scope to this

project.

4. Each testing agency representative shall be qualified per OSHA 29 CFR 1910.399

and certified with NFPA 70E training within the previous three years.

5. The testing agency lead, on site, technical person shall be currently certified Level

III by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) or National Institute

for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in electrical power

distribution system testing.

6. The testing agency shall only utilize engineers and technicians who are regularly

employed by the firm for testing service.




B. Regulatory Requirements: Make inspections and testing in accordance with the local

authorities having jurisdiction on in compliance with the following applicable codes and

standards of the following agencies:

1. InterNational Electrical Testing Association:

a. NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power

Distribution Equipment and Systems.

2. National Fire Protection Association – NFPA:

a. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.

b. ANSI/NFPA 70B – Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment

Maintenance.

c. NFPA 70E – Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.

C. Use the following references:

1. Project design specifications.

2. Project design drawings.

3. Project short-circuit and coordination study.

4. Manufacturer’s instruction manuals applicable to each particular apparatus.

5. Project list of equipment to be inspected and tested.

D. Safety and Precautions: Comply with required safety practices which include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1. Occupational Safety and Health Act.

2. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National Safety Council.

3. Applicable state and local safety operating procedures.

4. National Fire Protection Association – NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety

Requirements for Employee Workplaces.

5. American National Standards for Personnel Protection.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all electrical inspections and testing activities and reports through the

Contractor to and from the Engineer.

B. Coordinate all testing assistance and preparations including manufacturer’s

representatives at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Use only test equipment that is in good mechanical and electrical condition.

B. Use true RMS measuring meters.

C. Field test metering used to check power system meter calibration shall have an accuracy

higher than that of the instrument being checked.




D. Use test equipment with accuracy of metering that is appropriate for the test being

performed.

E. Use test equipment with waveshape and frequency output that are appropriate for the test

and tested equipment.

2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT QUALITY CONTROL

A. Use only equipment for testing and calibration procedures that has the following

characteristics:

1. Maintained in good visual and mechanical condition.

2. Maintained in safe operating condition.

B. Use test equipment having operating accuracy equal to, or better than, the following

limits:

1. Portable Multimeters: True RMS measuring.

2. Multimeters shall have the following accuracy limits, or better:

a. AC Voltage Ranges: .75% +/- 3 last single digits @ 60 Hz.

b. AC Current Ranges: .90% +/- last single digits @ 60 Hz, including

adapters, transducers.

c. DC Voltage Ranges: .25% +/- 1 last single digit.

d. DC Current Ranges: .75% +/- 1 single digit.

e. Resistance Ranges: .50% +/- 1 last single digit.

f. Frequency Range: .10% +/- 1 single digit @ 60 Hz.

3. Clamp-on Ammeters: AC current +/- 3% of range +/- 1 last single digit @ 60 Hz.

4. Dissipation/Power Factor Field Equipment:

a. +/- 0.1% power factor for power factor values up to 2.0%.

b. 5% of the reading for power factor values above 2.0%.

5. Low Range DC Resistance Equipment: 1.0% of reading, +/- 2 last single digits.

6. Ground Electrode Test Equipment: +/- 2% of range.

7. Insulation Test Sets: 0-1000V DC +/- 20% of reading at mid-scale.

8. Electrical Load Survey Equipment:

a. +/- 5% total error, including sensors.

b. 1% resolution.

c. Current Transformers: +/- 2% of range @ 50 Hz.

d. Voltage Transformers: +/- 0.5% of range @ 60 Hz.

9. Liquid Dielectric Strength Test Equipment: +/- 2% of scale.

10. Infrared Scanning Equipment: Sensitivity of 2C.

11. Phase Shifting Equipment: +/- 1.0 over entire range.

12. High Current Test Equipment: +/- 2% or range.

13. DC High Potential Test Equipment: +/- 2% of full scale.

14. AC High Potential Test Equipment (60 Hz): +/- 2% of full scale.




2.3 TEST EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION

A. Test instruments shall be calibrated to references traceable to the National Bureau of

Standards and shall have a current sticker showing date of calibration, deviation from

standard, name of calibration laboratory and technician, and date recalibration is required.

B. Calibrate equipment in accordance with the following schedule:

1. Field Equipment: 6 months maximum.

2. Leased Specialty Equipment: 12 months (where accuracy is guaranteed by lessor).

C. Place dated calibration labels at visible locations on all test equipment.

D. Keep up to date records which show date and results of test equipment calibrated or

tested; have such records available for review.

E. Maintain up to date test equipment calibration instructions and procedures for each test

equipment.

F. Use calibration standards of higher accuracy than the accuracy of the test equipment being

calibrated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. General: Furnish the materials, equipment and personnel required for field testing of

electrical Work as specified herein and in other specification sections. Perform tests in

accordance with the Specification requirements.

B. Contractor shall be responsible to perform the following pre-acceptance testing

procedures and tests:

1. Clean dirt, dust, and moisture from equipment.

2. Replace fuses blown during construction and testing.

3. Check for loose bus and cable connections.

4. Check for proper clearances of live parts, between phases and to ground and

ascertain that required barriers are in place.

5. Check for missing insulation in equipment and on conductors.

6. Check for modifications, alterations, and the use of unapproved parts in the

assembly of the equipment against the approved submittals.

7. Ascertain that fuse and circuit breaker short circuit interrupting ratings are

adequate.

8. Ascertain that the equipment rooms and areas are free of dampness and moisture

accumulations.

9. Check conductors run in multiple to ensure that they are properly phased.

10. Conduct a megger test of all equipment and wiring. Do not use battery operated

test lights and bells for this test.

11. For maximum safety on fused feeders of 200 amperes and greater, use a low

amperage test fuse of not more than 15 amperes and energize the circuit without

load to ensure the safe interruption of the circuit if a fault exists. Do not use a wire

or open link under any circumstances as a substitute for a UL approved enclosed

fuse.




12. Loads on all parts of electrical distribution systems shall be balanced, insofar as is

practical. Particular attention shall be directed to the revision of labeling and

marking of feeders, sub-feeders and branch circuits as required for load balancing.

All necessary revisions shall be incorporated into the "Final Record" drawing set.

13. Overload devices shall be installed and adjusted to suit the loads which they control.

C. Field Tests and Inspections:

1. Schedule field tests and inspections with at least seven (7) days advance notice to

Owner and Engineer.

2. Use testing equipment appropriate for the tests in conjunction with industry product

testing and performance guidelines and calibrated to assure test quality.

3. Comply with latest edition of ANSI/NETA ATS – Standard for Acceptance Testing

and addition requirements defined in the appropriate Division 26 Sections for field

testing of electrical power equipment, systems and components.

4. Comply with field testing requirements defined in the appropriate Division 26

Sections for other than electrical power equipment.

5. Follow up testing shall be included under testing responsibility matrix.

6. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label

to tested components indicating test results, responsible agency and representative,

and date.

D. Field Test Reports:

1. Submit field test reports and inspection logs in compliance with Division 01 Section

"Quality Requirements" for each of the systems defined in the testing responsibility

matrix and other special tests defined in the appropriate Division 26 Sections.

2. Refer to Commissioning Plan for additional requirements.

E. Operational Tests: After the work is complete and properly adjusted, the Contractor shall

conduct operational tests as directed by Owner and Engineer. Perform tests in the

presence of Owner. Operational tests as herein specified are defined as those tests and

inspections which are required to ensure that the equipment involved is operating and

functioning as specified or intended and within industry practices, standards and

manufacturers tolerances and meet the performance as stated in the specification.

1. Demonstration: Demonstrate that all equipment and systems operate in accordance

with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where specified that the

equipment manufacturer shall provide such demonstrations and costs for these

services shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

2. Voltage Test: Perform at the last outlet on each circuit. If drop in potential is

excessive, correct the condition by locating the ground or high resistance splice or

connection.

3. Cable Insulation: After cables are pulled in place and before connecting, test to

determine that conductor insulation resistance is not less by megger test than that

recommended by ICEA. Cables failing insulation test shall be removed, replaced

and re-tested.

4. Equipment: Test each entire system after final connections are made and verify

each component shall pass drop in potential resistance tests.




5. Ground Testing: Subject the completed equipment grounding system to a

meggered test at the substation ground bus to ensure that the ground resistance,

without chemical treatment or other artificial means, does not exceed 5 ohms.

6. Control circuits shall be checked for proper functioning and fail-safe operation.

The "Auto" position of all "Hand-Off-Auto" controlled equipment shall be checked

for proper operation and interlocking with other equipment.

F. Functional Performance Testing:

1. Perform functional performance testing together with representatives of other

trades associated with the installation per the requirements of Division 20 Section

"Functional Performance Testing – Common Work Results – Division 21 through

28".

2. Perform function tests on each system included in this Section to ensure total

system operation.

3. Perform the system functional test upon satisfactory completion of equipment

acceptance tests. It is the intent of system functional tests to prove the proper

interaction of all sensing, processing and action devices to effect the designed end

product or result.

4. Test interlocks, safety devices, fail-safe functions, and design functions.

G. Corrective Action:

1. Correct calibration deficiencies identified in field tests. Other deficiencies shall be

corrected by Division 26.

2. Retest and reinspect per the requirements of Division 01 Section "Quality

Requirements."

H. System Certifications:

1. Notify the Engineer in writing upon completion of the work, that the entire

electrical installation has been examined, inspected, tested, and calibrated or

adjusted as specified and that it is ready for final inspection.

a. Provide written certifications, prior to the final inspection, for each system or

piece of equipment indicating that the equipment has been tested and meets

the performance criteria of the Contract Documents.

b. Provide system certifications per the requirements of Division 20 Section

"Systems Certifications – Common Work Results – Division 21 through 28."

2. Obtain Certificates of Compliance on completion of the work with written approval

or acceptance from all authorities having jurisdiction over the work and deliver

these to the Engineer. The work shall not be deemed to have reached a state of final

completion until these certificates have been delivered.




I. Demonstration and Training:

1. Provide Owner’s personnel demonstration and training for Division 26 equipment

and systems to expand the requirements specified in Division 01 Section

"Demonstration and Training" as follows:

a. Owner’s personnel demonstration and training shall be considered an

inspection and testing function and shall be reported as such including

correction of all deficiencies. Include general and emergency modes of

operation.

b. All demonstrations and training shall be recorded on digital electronic media

for future reference.

c. Training shall start with classroom sessions, if necessary, followed by hands-

on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various

modes of operation, including start up, shutdown, fire alarm, power failure,

etc.

d. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance

with the requirements of the Operations and Maintenance (O&M) manual or

sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary

and the demonstration repeated.

e. The appropriate trade or manufacturer’s representative shall provide the

instructions on each major piece of equipment. This representative may be

the start up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or

manufacturer’s representative. Practical building operating expertise as well

as in depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of

equipment are required. More than one party may be required to execute the

training.

f. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the table of contents of the

O&M manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals

for reference.

g. Training shall include:

1) Usage of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction

material included in the O&M manuals.

2) Review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper

operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed

and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start

up, operation in all modes possible, shutdown, seasonal changeover

and any emergency procedures.

3) Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns.

4) Discussion of warranties and guarantees.

5) Common troubleshooting problems and solutions.

6) Explanation of information included in the O&M manuals and the

location of all plans and manuals in the facility.

7) Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.

h. Hands on training shall include start up, operation in all modes possible,

including manual, shutdown, and any emergency procedures and

maintenance of all pieces of equipment.




3.2 PROJECT REPORTS

A. Consistent project reports shall be similar to the following:




ELECTRICAL INSPECTION AND TESTING REPORT

Project: Contact No.

Equipment

Ref. No. Serial No.:

Inspection Inspecting

Date: Organization:

Performed By: Report No.:

Contractor, Architect/Engineer Representative Present:

Ref. Specification:

A. Inspections Performed:

(Attach manufacturer’s recommended demonstration.)

B. Summary of Inspection:

C. Attached Manufacturer’s Demonstration

Report No. of Attached Sheets

D. Signatures:

Contractor,

Architect/Engineer

Representative:

Testing Contractor:




ELECTRICAL OPERATIONAL TEST REPORT


Equipment


Test Testing

Date: Organization:



Test Equipment:

Ref. Specification:

A. Test Performed:


B. Summary of Results:

C. Attached Test and Results


D. Signatures:

Contractor,

Architect/Engineer

Representative:

Testing Contractor:




ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TEST REPORT


Equipment


Test Test

Date: Organization:



Test Equipment:

Ref. Specification:

A. Methodology Test:


B. Summary of Results:

C. Attached Test and Results


D. Signatures:

Contractor,

Architect/Engineer

Representative:

Testing Contractor:







ELECTRICAL DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING REPORT


Equipment


Demonstration Demonstrating

Date: Organization:


Contractor, Architect/Engineer, Owner Representative Present:

Ref. Specification:

A. Demonstration Performed:


B. Summary of Demonstration:

C. Attached Manufacturer’s Demonstration


D. Signatures:

Contractor,

Architect/Engineer, Owner

Representative:

Testing Contractor:





DIVISION 26 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING SUMMARY REPORT

Project: Report No.:

Contact No.: Date:

Act

ion

Info

rmat

iona

l

Clo

seou

t

Mai

nten

ance

Mat

eria

l

Def

icie

ncie

s

Acc

epte

d

Req

uire

d

Acc

epte

d

Req

uire

d

Cer

tifie

d

Date Reason Def

icie

ncie

s

Acc

epte

d

Req

uire

d

Acc

epte

d

Req

uire

d

Acc

epte

d

Req

uire

d

Date Acc

epte

d

Training Seasonal Testing

System

Completed

Submittals

Functional

Performance

Testing (FPT)

Division 20

Functional

Performance

Testing (FPT)

Division 20

System

Certification Deferred Testing

Acceptance

Testing

Operations &

Maintenance

Documents

Pre

-Fun

ctio

nal C

heck

lists

& S

tart

Up

Per

form

ed








LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT (100-600 VOLTS)



CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (100-600 VOLTS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes conductors, cables, and connectors rated 100 to 600 volts.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 26 Section "Common Work

Results for Electrical."


A. Product Data:

1. Multiconductor cables.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Calculations for conductor and associated conduit deratings for:

a. Panelboard branch circuit conductors when over three current carrying

conductors are combined in common conduit. Field installations found

without such calculations will be rejected.

b. Conductor alterations from Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality control test reports.


A. Record Documents:

1. Indicate all feeder sizes on the record drawings riser diagrams.

2. Indicated homerun junction box locations for all branch circuits.


A. Field Testing: Refer to Division 26 Section "Electrical Inspections and Testing" for field

inspections and testing requirements related to this Section including:

1. Electrical Acceptance Testing Responsibilities.

2. General Electrical Field Quality Control.

3. Testing Agency Qualifications.

B. Comply with ANSI/NETA ATS – Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for

Electrical Power Equipment and Systems for field testing.

C. Maximum Cable Pull Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s maximum cable tension

pulling characteristics so as not to damage wire and cable.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Conductors and Cables:

a. Aetna Insulated Wire, Inc.

b. AFC Cable Systems, Inc., a Division of Tyco.

c. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.

d. American Bare Conductor.

e. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.

f. Cerro Wire LCC.

g. Encore Wire Corporation.

h. General Cable Corp.

i. Nexans.

j. Senator Wire & Cable Co.

k. Southwire Company.

2. Connectors and Splices for Conductors and Cable Conductors:

a. AFC Cable Systems, Inc., a Division of Tyco.

b. AMP.

c. Burndy Corporation.

d. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

e. O-Z/Gedney Co.; EGS Electrical Group LLC.

f. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.

g. Raychem Corporation.

h. Square D Company.

i. Thomas and Betts Corporation.

j. Tyco Electronics Corp.


A. Comply with provisions of the following code:

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.

a. Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of

combustion products of insulating materials.

2. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by UL under

the following standards.

a. UL Std. 83 - Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables.

b. UL Std. 183 - Modular Wiring Systems.

c. UL Std. 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper

Conductors.

d. UL Std. 2196 - Fire Resistive Cables.





3. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following

standards:

a. WC-70 – Standard for Non-Shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 volts or less.

4. IEEE Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following

standard:

a. Std. 82 - Test procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors.

5. ASTM Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following

standards:

a. ASTM B3 for bare solid conductors.

b. ASTM B8 for bare stranded conductors.

c. B33 for bare copper tinned conductors.

2.3 WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions and location

where indicated.

1. Derate conductors per the NEC for installations that are exposed to direct sunlight,

are on and/or above rooftops where ambient temperatures are other than 30 deg. C

(86 deg. F).

B. Conductor Material: Copper.

C. Conductors: Provide solid conductors for power and lighting circuits sizes No. 12 AWG

and smaller. Provide stranded conductors for sizes No. 10 AWG and larger.

D. Insulation: Provide insulation type in accordance with Part 3 below.

E. Color Coding:

208/120Volts

Phase Color

A Black

B Red

C Blue

Neutral White

Ground Green

F. Jackets: Factory applied nylon or PVC external jacketed wires and cables for pulls in

raceways over 100 feet in length, for pulls in raceways with more than three equivalent

90 degree bends, for pulls in conduits underground or under slabs on grade, and where

indicated.

G. Multiconductor Cables: Provide the following type(s) of cables in NEC approved

locations and applications where indicated. Provide cable UL listed for particular

application:

1. Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cable: Type UF.





2.4 CONNECTORS FOR CONDUCTORS

A. Provide UL listed factory fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity

ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use

connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which

used.

1. Split-bolt connectors shall not be used for any application.

2.5 CONDUCTOR PULLING GRIPS

A. At Contractor’s option, factory installed pulling grips may be provided to allow potential

reduced pulling tension and a low profile head.

2.6 CONDUCTOR PULLING JACKET

A. At Contractor’s option, lubricated type conductor pulling jackets may be provided for

THHN and XHHW conductors to allow potential reduced pulling tension.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. General: Install electrical cables, conductors and wiring connectors as indicated, in

compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL, and NECA's "Standard

of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

1. Install all conductors within raceways or approved cables.

2. Install conductors and cables run under the building slab in raceways.

3. Install minimum No. 12 AWG for circuits 100 volts and above.

4. Increase conductor size as required due to NEC derating requirements and

availability. Minimum conductor sizes, based upon NEC Ampacity Table 310.15

(B) (16), and maximum 40 percent conduit raceway fill, are shown on Drawings.

Generally use 60 deg. C ratings below 100 amperes and 75 deg. C rating above 100

amperes. If conductor size increased, be responsible for associated conduit size,

based upon NEC Ampacity Tables and maximum 40 percent conduit raceway fill,

and increased ground conductor size per NEC. If raceway type altered, also be

responsible for associated conduit raceway size per NEC to meet 40 percent

maximum fill.

5. Keep conductor splices to a minimum.

6. Do not bend conductors and cables, either permanently or temporarily during

installation to radii less than that recommended by the manufacturer.

7. Provide slack wire for all future connections with ends of wires taped and blank

box covers installed.

8. Provide conductors of the same size from the protective device to the last load.

9. Make conductor length identical for parallel feeders.

10. Ground and continuously polarize systems properly throughout following the color

coding specified.

11. Support conductors in vertical raceways. One cable support shall be provided at

the top or as close to the top as practical, plus a support for each additional interval

of spacing per NEC.





12. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural

members, and following surface contours, where possible.

13. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or

terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose.

Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of

NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15 – 20-A circuits,

splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

5. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large

enough.

C. Conductor Routing:

1. Separate normal power and generator powered conductors, branch circuits, and

feeder cables and raceways in separate enclosures or rooms. Do not extend

generator powered conductors, branch circuits, and feeder cable and raceways

through normal power electrical rooms except where shown on Drawings or

approved by the Electrical Engineer.

D. Dedicated Branch Circuit Neutrals:

1. Provide dedicated neutrals for all branch circuits.

E. Coordinate conductor and cable installation work including electrical raceway and

equipment installation work, as necessary to properly interface installation of wires and

cables with other work.

1. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same

raceway.

2. Use of pull compound or lubricant is to be avoided unless absolutely necessary and

other reduced cable tension pulling methods exhausted; compound used must not

deteriorate conductor or insulation, and be one of the following:

a. Ideal-Aqua-Gel.

b. Polywater.

c. Yellow 77.

3. Use pulling means including lubricated conductor jackets, fish tape, cable, rope and

basket weave wire and cable grips which will not damage cables or raceway.

F. Use conductors with 90 degree C insulation and appropriate NEC derating factors when

wiring is within 7 feet of passing over or attached to the following:

1. Rooftop and exposed exterior locations.





3.2 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper.

C. Ground conductor material shall match feeder type.

3.3 CONDUCTOR APPLICATIONS

A. Install UL Type UF cable with nonmetallic outer jacketing, for direct buried underground

feeders not encased in conduit.

B. Install UL Type THHN-2 or THWN-2 wiring in conduit, for branch circuits #10 and

smaller.

1. Include wet location label when installed in underground or above grade exterior

raceways.

C. Install UL Type XHHW or THHN wiring in conduit, for feeders and branch circuits #8

and larger.

1. Include wet location label when installed in underground or above grade exterior

raceways.

D. Install UL Type XHHW or THWN wiring in conduit, for feeders and branch circuits

installed outside of the building envelope, in raceway in contact with soil, or whenever

raceway may be subject to moisture and/or condensation.

3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Follow circuit numbers shown on Drawings in connecting circuits to panelboards. In the

event that field observation shows that the indicated circuit numbers are not connected to

the corresponding panel overcurrent device, make all corrections necessary. Each branch

circuit homerun containing two or more circuits with a common neutral shall be

connected to the circuit breaker or switch in a three- or four-wire branch circuit

panelboard so that no two of the circuits will be fed from the same phase.

B. Provide all wiring to and between motors, controllers, line voltage (120-600 volt) control

devices, disconnect switches, and other related electrical equipment, except where such

items are factory wired.

C. Terminate power wiring for elevator systems at the respective controller, and be in

compliance with the manufacturer's approved shop drawings.

D. Provide power and all wiring connections to the control devices for electrically operated

overhead doors, door operators and control devices which will be provided under another

division.

E. Connectors for Splices, Taps, and Terminations:

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where

manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connector and

terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std. 486A and B.





2. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess

equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings that unspliced

conductors.

3. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm)

of slack.

4. Make splices and taps in wiring No. 10 AWG and smaller mechanically and

electrically secure with mechanical pressure type splicing devices.

5. Make splices and taps of conductors No. 8 AWG or larger and all splices in motor

terminal boxes using compression connectors requiring the use of compression

tools for securing the conductors in the connectors. Termination of conductors at

all distribution equipment, except transformers, shall be made using mechanical

lugs. Connectors shall be of high conductivity, corrosion-resistant material and

have actual contact area that shall provide at least the current carrying capacity of

the wire or cable. For conductors No. 1/0 and larger, connector lugs shall be of the

two-hole type. Connector lugs shall be bolted to bussing using Belleville washers

in combination with flat washers and nuts. Compression connectors shall be as

manufactured by Thomas & Betts, Burndy, or approved equal.

6. Each conductor lug or bus connection shall be individually made with separate lug

and/or bolt as required for the termination.

7. Provide insulated connectors for splices and taps with a self-fusing rubber

insulating tape that is non-corrosive to the connector and the conductor. Insulation

tape shall have a minimum of 350 volts per mil dielectric strength. Friction or vinyl

tape shall be applied directly over rubber insulating tape equal to 3M Scotch 88

type.

3.5 MAXIMUM BRANCH CIRCUIT LENGTHS

A. Per NEC and as shown on Drawings.

3.6 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

A. Color code cable at splices and terminations per Division 26 Section "Electrical

Identification."

3.7 WIRING METHODS

A. The following wiring methods shall not be used:

1. Non-metallic sheathed cable.

2. AC cable.

3. AC cable with aluminum sheath (sometimes call "AC light" or "AC HCF light").

4. MC cable.

5. Aluminum wire and cable.






A. Inspection and Tests:

1. Perform inspections and test procedures as required by Division 26 Section

"Electrical Inspections and Testing", ANSI/NETA ATS "Cables, Low-Voltage,

600-Volts Maximum", "System Functional Tests", and "Thermographic Survey"

requirements, and the following additional requirements:

a. Limit tests to:

1) Feeder and 3 phase motor conductors.

2) Branch circuit conductors feeding generator loads.

b. Follow-up thermographic survey shall not be required.

c. Prepare test and inspection reports.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL GROUNDING AND BONDING

PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT


GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes

basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and

systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in

other sections of these Specifications.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Ground (Earth): An intentional or accidental connection to Earth.

B. Bonding (Bonded): The joining of metallic parts together to form an electrically

conductive path.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




A. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

B. Field quality control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation

and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section

"Operation and Maintenance Data", include the following:

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells

based on NETA MTS and NFPA 70B.

a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain

within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective

action if they do not.

b. Include recommended testing intervals.

B. Record Documents: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding

features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground rods.

2. Test wells.


A. Field Testing: Refer to Division 26 Section "Electrical Inspections and Testing" for

field inspections and testing requirements related to this Section including:







PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following listed manufacturers:

1. Ground Rods:

a. Burndy.

b. Erico Products.

c. Knight Metalcraft.

d. Nehring.

e. Harger Lightning and Grounding.

2. Molded Fusion Welding Material:

a. Burndy.

b. Cadweld.

c. ThermOweld.

d. Harger Lightning and Grounding UltraWeld®.

3. Ground Clamps/Connectors:

a. Adalet – PLM Division; a Division of Scott Felzer.

b. Anderson Corp.

c. Anixter Bros., Inc.

d. Burndy.

e. Chance – A.B. Chance Co.

f. Crouse-Hinds, a Division of Cooper Industries.

g. Erico Products.

h. Ideal Industries, Inc.

i. Joslyn Corporation.

j. Harger Lightning and Grounding.

k. O-Z/Gedney Co.

l. Raco, Inc.

m. Thomas & Betts Corp.

4. Enclosure Equipment Grounding Kits:

a. Same manufacturer as box/cabinet or for ground clamps/connectors.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,

and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

C. Comply with ANSI/NETA ATS – Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for





2.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS

A. Products: Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEC

requirements. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC

requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity

indications govern.

2.4 CONDUCTORS

A. General:

1. Comply with Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

2. Conductors: Install solid copper conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and

stranded copper conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Grounding Conductors:

1. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated. Conductors No. 8 and larger

may use green taped conductor ends.

2. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Bare stranded, soft drawn or soft annealed,

copper wire.

3. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, NEC sized

AWG.

C. Bonding Conductors:

1. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or 6 AWG, bare stranded conductor.

2. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, bare braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

3. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned copper tape, bare braided conductors terminated

with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

2.5 EQUIPMENT ROOM GROUND TERMINAL BAR

A. Copper 1/4 inch thick by 4 inch high by length shown on Drawings, unless otherwise

indicated, with two (2) rows of predrilled holes on 1-1/2 inch centers for 1/2 inch bolt,

to receive cables from two (2) directions. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall

comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC,

impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.6 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and

combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure

type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

2. Split-bolt connectors shall not be used for any application.




C. Molded Fusion Welded Connectors: Exothermic welding kits of types recommended

by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Busbar Equipment Ground Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless

type wire terminals, and long barrel, two bolt connection to ground busbar.

E. Busbar Grounding and Grounding Electrode Connectors: Mechanical type, east silicon

bronze, solderless exothermic type wire terminals.

2.7 GROUNDING ELECTRODES AND TEST STATION

A. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel with high strength steel core and electrolytic grade

copper outer sheath, molten welded to core.

1. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet.

B. Plate Electrodes: Copper plates, minimum 1/4 inch thick, size as indicated.

C. Chemical Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged

with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts.

1. Termination: Factory attached No. 3/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches

(1200 mm) long.

2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturers recommended material.

D. Ground Test Station: Fabricate from 15-inch (400 mm) long, square cut sections of 8

inch (200 mm) diameter, Schedule 80, PVC pipe.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Ground all equipment, furnished by this Division or by others.

1. Split-bolt connection methods shall not be used.

B. Provide building grounding as shown on Drawings.

C. Provide ground connection for communication/special systems services underground

systems.

D. Make molded fusion welds connections in strict accordance with supplier's instructions.

Clamp cables securely in place, independent of connection. Clean and inspect all

connections.

E. At least one connection shall be made between the building ground, the electrical

service ground for the building, and a metallic cold water pipe ground larger than 1 inch

trade diameter.

F. Provide a 3/0 AWG copper ground wire connected on building side of the water meter

to the metallic water pipe using suitable pipe clamps. Also provide a similar bonding

jumper around the water meter that will remain in place whether the water meter is in

place or not.

G. Grounding cable shall not be buried directly in concrete, but a grounded metallic or

non-metallic conduit sleeve shall be provided where cable passes through concrete.




H. Where ground conductors are shown on Drawings and for all feeders, the use of the

metallic raceway in place of the ground conductor shall not be permitted. Provide

grounding bushings at each end of all low voltage] feeder raceways. Where non-

metallic conduit is used, coordinate the installation of a code sized ground conductor.

I. All grounding conductors run inside the building shall be run within NEC sized metallic

raceways with raceway grounding bushings at each end and bonding jumper to the

enclosure or ground bus. Extend raceway to associated equipment enclosures and to

within 6 inches of exposed ground terminal bar installations. Raceway installations

shall be in accordance with Division 26 Section "Raceways."

1. Each ground conductor bus connection shall be terminated with individual

compression lug and associated individual lug bolt.

2. Split-bolt connection methods shall not be used for any application.

J. Welded connections may have multiple ground conductors to suit mold and may be

considered "continuous."

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless

otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing

conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and

maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to

penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports:

Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic welded connectors for outdoor locations. Only when a disconnect

type connection is indicated, use a bolted clamp.

C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in

conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal

water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal

water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug type

connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a

dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street

side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at

each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass

water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each above ground portion of gas piping system downstream from

equipment shutoff valve.

D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding

conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install

bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.




3.3 BUILDING GROUNDING INSTALLATIONS

A. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each

corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet

(18 m) apart as shown on Drawings.

B. Concrete Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to

NFPA 70; using electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods, at least 20

feet (6.0 m) long. If reinforcing is in multiple pieces, connect together by the usual steel

tie wires or exothermic welding to create the required length.

3.4 UNDERGROUND GROUNDING INSTALLATIONS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade,

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Drive the ground rods to a minimum depth of ten feet, or more if necessary to reach

permanent moisture. Ground rods shall be driven at least 2 feet away from the footing.

D. Underground Grounding conductors:

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.

2. Interconnect new] ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade

and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or

damaging coating, if any.

3. Duct Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank

when indicated as part of duct bank installation.

E. Perform all connections below grade with exothermic welds. Provide corrosion

protection in acid soils.

F. Ground Test Station: Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor. Fill with 1-inch-

(25-mm-) maximum size crushed stone or gravel to 1 inch below rod ground cable weld.

3.5 EQUIPMENT ROOM GROUND TERMINAL BAR INSTALLATION

A. Install a complete grounding electrode system with interconnecting cables and

terminations at electrical equipment rooms.

B. Install ground terminal bar in equipment rooms where shown on Drawings. Mount bar

by anchors and bolts using 2 inch long insulated spacer between bar and wall. Use a

minimum of two (2) supports 18 inch on center. Connect all grounding electrode

system conductors, system enclosure ground bus, and other indicated electrode systems

to the terminal bar.

1. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame,

across top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to

horizontal bus.




3.6 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING INSTALLATIONS

A. General:

1. Provide continuous equipment grounding conductor system for underground

distribution.

B. Concrete Duct Banks:

1. Install a minimum #3/0 bare copper wire in new concrete duct banks of two or

more conduits. Provide the ground wire near the bottom loosely laid in the duct

bank without tension, held in place to the bottom of a raceway with tape, and not

supported by or in contact with rebar, steel wires, or other metal.

2. Leave long in manholes and pullboxes to reach their ground bus without splice.

C. Manholes (Handholes are synonymous):

1. Install a driven ground rod through the floor close to wall setting ground rod

depth so 4 inches (100mm) will extend above finished floor. Protect ground rods

passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure sensitive

insulating tape or heat shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50mm) above to 6

inches (150mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink

grout.

2. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide a minimum

#3/0 bare copper conductor exothermic welded from ground rod into manhole

through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall.

3. Manhole Cable Bus: Support a minimum #3/0 bare copper conductor around

inside perimeter of manhole 2 feet above finished floor and exothermic weld to

ground rod or ground rod conductor and concrete duct bank ground conductors

entering manhole.

4. Manhole Components Grounding: Bond exposed metal parts, such as inserts,

cable racks, pulling irons, sump frame, manhole cover frame, and ladders within

each manhole with minimum #6 bare copper wire to associated manhole cable bus

with exothermic weld. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten

to manhole walls.

D. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Raceway Applications:

1. Install grounding bushing on all metallic raceways entering buildings, manholes,

or vaults, and extend grounding conductor to each associated manhole cable bus

and building wall pullbox ground bus. Where non-metallic raceways are used as

part of the feeder raceway extension, also extend the grounding conductor through

the entire raceway.




3.7 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR INSTALLATIONS

A. Unless indicated otherwise, form one equipment ground circuit with rigid metallic

raceways (e.g. EMT, rigid steel conduit) where used. Install a bonding jumper for

continuity around all fittings and terminations where the conductive raceway is made

non-continuous (i.e. underground feeder non-metallic raceways).

1. Bond all grounding conductors to boxes or enclosures at each access point

utilizing approved grounding kits. Do not use building steel as equipment

grounding path.

2. Bond all conductive metallic piping system in each mechanical equipment room

as required by NEC utilizing approved clamps. Minimum size of conductors as

required by NEC. Locate all connections where access is unrestricted for

inspection. Looping of conductor from one system to another is acceptable

provided the conductor is without splice and has each end of loop bonded.

3. If non-metallic raceways are used for power distribution feeders (i.e., panels,

HVAC equipment), where the feeder is a single feeder and not a parallel feeder, a

second insulated grounding conductors shall be provided inside the conduit

(conduit size shall be adjusted accordingly), or a bare grounding conductor shall

be provided strapped to the outside of the conduit. The grounding conductor shall

be the same size as the grounding conductor provided inside the conduit.

Terminate at grounding bushings or bus on each end of the feeder run. Where the

feeder is a parallel feeder, a second grounding conductor shall not be required.

4. Where non-metallic raceways are used for branch circuit wiring (such as lighting,

receptacles and miscellaneous equipment circuits), a second insulated grounding

conductor shall be provided inside the conduit (conduit size shall be adjusted

accordingly), or, a bare grounding conductor shall be provided strapped to the

outside of the conduit. The grounding conductor shall be the same size as the

grounding conductor provided inside the conduit.

B. Provide, in the same raceway with the associated phase and/or neutral conductors, a

green colored equipment ground conductor having the same type insulation and

connected as described below to provide equipment ground redundancy.

1. Install a ground conductor in each raceway to augment the circuit formed by the

metallic raceway system. Bond the conductor to each box or enclosure in which

access is possible utilizing enclosure equipment ground kits, through metallic

conduit insulated ground bushings or wedges and/or enclosure threaded

grounding studs. Size conductor as specified, shown or required by Code,

whichever is larger. Install a raceway grounding bushing and bonding jumper to

the enclosure or contained ground bus for the following: each termination of

conduits 1 inch trade size and larger at a switchboard, panelboard, or other

enclosure, each location where multiple ring knockouts are damaged during

conduit installation, each location where conduits are stubbed up into floor

mounted enclosures; each conduit termination at a painted enclosure where paint

is not removed before installation of raceway and each feeder.

a. All branch circuits shall be provided with an equipment grounding

conductor sized per NEC Table 250-122. This includes all lighting and

power branch circuits.




b. Provide a ground conductor to all light switches, receptacles, motors, light

fixtures and all other branch circuit loads.

c. Install a ground conductor inside all flexible raceways (e.g., flexible steel,

liquid tight). Bond the conductor to the enclosure or ground bus in the

nearest box or access on either side of the flexible section. Size conductor

as specified, indicated, or required by Code, whichever is larger.

d. Install a ground conductor in all sectional raceways with removable covers

for access (e.g. plug-in strips, surface raceway systems, and wireways)

unless specified otherwise. Size conductor in accordance with the NEC for

the largest phase conductor size installed in raceway, or as indicated. Bond

all sections of the raceway to the ground conductors. Connect all receptacle

ground terminals in the raceway to the ground conductor, and make other

ground connections shown on Drawings.

C. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other

communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding

conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location,

terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate

grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding

bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding

terminal.

3.8 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification" for

instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.

1. Install labels on bonding conductor or on bonding conductor raceway every 15

feet. Identify system/service and bonding termination locations.


A. Tests and Inspections:


"Electrical Inspections and Testing", ANSI/NETA ATS "Grounding Systems"

requirements and the following additional requirements:

a. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and

ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by

letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations.

Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and

include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test

results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

b. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and

inspections.

c. Prepare test and inspection reports.




2. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

a. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and

Less: 10 ohms.

b. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1

ohm.

c. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

d. Maximum Ground Resistance Value: 5 ohms.

3. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values,

notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground

resistance.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

B. Provide bases, inertia pads, steel supports, anchor bolts, inserts, etc., for all equipment

and apparatus shown on Drawings.

C. Solidly anchor steel support channel framework to floor and ceiling slabs and mount the

designated equipment thereto.

D. Provide steel support channels for wall mounted equipment such as:

1. Panelboards.

2. Raceways.

E. Coordinate and provide concrete pads under wall mounted equipment installed 6 inches

or less from the floor. Provide consideration for maximum protective device height on

larger distribution panelboards.

F. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls" for products and installation

requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance

requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of

supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five (5)

times the applied force.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




A. Product Data:

1. Steel slotted support systems.

2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.




B. Shop Drawings:

1. Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

2. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

a. Steel slotted channel systems.

b. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems.

c. Equipment supports.


A. Qualification Data:

1. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These

items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components

for field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit, a Division of Tyco.

b. Line Systems.

c. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a Division of Eaton.

d. ERICO International Corporation.

e. GS Metals Corporation.

f. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

g. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

h. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to

MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester

coating applied according to MFMA-4.




4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to

MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-

resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8

inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries.

c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited.

d. Seasafe, Inc.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed

for use with those items.

3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles.

4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings,

designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical

conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of

conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported.

Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes,

and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items

or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded steel stud, for use in hardened portland

cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

by one of the following:

1) Hilti, Inc.

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a Division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3) MKT Fastening, LLC.

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.




2. Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert wedge-type, steel, for use in hardened

Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

by one of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3) Hilti, Inc.

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a Division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to

MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with

ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit

dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for

steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with NEC, NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for

electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Take care not to weaken concrete or penetrate waterproofing where equipment supports

are on concrete construction.

C. Obtain prior approval for installation method where structural steel is required to frame

into building structural members for the support of equipment, conduit, etc. Welding is

permitted only when approved by Engineer’s field representative.

D. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation.

1. Metal Decking: Nothing is to be suspended from steel roof decks (no concrete).




E. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to

produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal

channel or angle iron racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control

enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices.

F. In overhead spaces, boxes shall be supported independently of raceways and raceways

independent of the boxes. Support boxes directly from the building structure or by bar

hangers.

1. Where bar hangers are used for boxes, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides

of the box and support the raceway with an independent approved type of fastener

not more than 24 inches from the box. To clarify, box or raceway removal should

not require resupporting of the other.

G. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space

supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists

maximum spacings that are less than those stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall

be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NEC, NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as

specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC,

and RMC may be supported by openings through structural members, as permitted in

NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so

strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading

limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of

supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and

fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following

methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion

anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with

lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches

(100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight aggregate

concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock

washers and nuts.

6. To Light Gage Steel: Sheet metal screws.

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount

cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction

boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to

substrate by means that meet seismic restraint strength and anchorage requirements.




E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid

reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for

site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and

elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas

immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop

painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils

(0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting sections for cleaning and

touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on

miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL RACEWAYS



RACEWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways for electrical wiring. Types of raceways in this Section

include the following:

1. Rigid galvanized steel conduit (RGS).

2. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

4. Rigid aluminum conduit.

5. PVC externally coated rigid steel conduit.

6. Rigid nonmetallic conduit (RNC).

7. Optical Fiber and Communication Raceway (Innerduct).

8. Conduit bodies.

9. Conduit fittings.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with other Work as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways

and components with other Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




A. Product Data: For surface raceways and all conduit fittings only.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Layout Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of

the items involved.

a. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

b. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit

groups with common supports.

2. Factory Quality Control Test Reports:

a. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that

raceway system components and associated conduit racks will withstand

seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic

Controls." Include the following:

1) Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is

based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.




2) Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of

gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3) Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the

certification is based and their installation requirements.


A. Record Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

B. Rigid Metallic Conduit:

1. Allied, a Division of Tyco.

2. Republic Conduit.

3. Wheatland Tube Co.

C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit:


2. Alumax.

3. New Jersey Aluminum.

4. VAW Aluminum.

D. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings:

1. Ocal, a Division of Thomas and Betts.

2. Perma-Cote Industries.

3. Rob-Roy.

E. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit and Fittings:


2. Can-Tex.

3. Carlon.

4. Condux.

5. IPEX.

6. National.

F. Conduit Bodies:

1. Appleton Electric Co.

2. Carlon (PVC).

3. Crouse-Hinds Division, Cooper Industries, Inc.

4. Killark Electric Mfg. Co.

5. O-Z/Gedney.

G. Conduit Fittings:


2. Arlington.




3. Bridgeport Fittings, Incorporated.

4. Cooper Crouse-Hinds.

5. Midwest Electric.

6. O-Z/Gedney.

7. RACO.

8. Steel City.

9. Thomas and Betts.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and



C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards

pertaining to raceways.

1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. NEMA, FB1 Fittings for Metallic Conduit

b. NEMA, RN 1 PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and

Intermediate Metal Conduit

c. NEMA, TC2 Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC

d. NEMA, TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

a. ANSI-C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit

b. ANSI-C80.2 Rigid Steel Conduit, Enameled

c. ANSI-C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-coated

d. ANSI-C80.5 Rigid Aluminum Conduit

e. ANSI-C80.6 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)

3. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM F 512-84 Standard Specification for Smooth Wall Poly Vinyl

Chloride (PVC) Conduit and Fittings for

Underground Installation

D. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards

pertaining to electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and components

listed and labeled by UL, or ETL:

1. UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit

2. UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes

3. UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit

4. UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing

5. UL 910- and 2024 Plenum Optical Fiber Raceways

6. UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit

2.3 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.




B. Intermediate Steel Conduit: UL 1242.

C. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings: ANSI C80.1 and NEMA RN 1.

D. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.

2.4 CONDUIT BODIES

A. General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC

requirements for feeder runs only. Branch circuit use is prohibited. Provide matching

gasketed covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws.

B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use metallic conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded

hubs for threaded raceways. Use bodies with set screw or compression type hubs for

EMT according to fitting application specified below.

2.5 CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC

requirements. Die cast fittings are not acceptable.

B. Rigid Galvanized Steel, Intermediate Steel and Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Use threaded

type with bushed connections. Factory-installed conduit couplings are acceptable.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing Conduit: Use nylon insulated fittings. Steel body or integral

conduit sleeve dual double set-screw type fittings are acceptable for EMT conduits except

for mechanical rooms, kitchens and damp locations where threaded compression types

are required. Die cast fittings are not acceptable.

1. Nylon fittings may be eliminated if rounded box teeth type fitting are used (i.e.

Cooper Crouse Hinds Space Saver).

2. Colored fittings may be used to meet raceway identification requirements of

Division 26 Sections "Boxes and Cabinets" and "Electrical Identification."

D. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Use fittings designed specifically for conduit type of same

manufacturer.

E. Unlike Conduit: Use connectors which meet individual conduit fittings requirements for

both and are UL listed and labeled for such use.

F. Expansion and Deflection Fittings:

1. Conduit movement in straight line direction:

a. O-Z/Gedney Type AX Series.

2. Up to 3/4 inch deflection and movement in all directions:

a. O-Z/Gedney Type DX Series.

3. Deflection and movement beyond 3/4 inch in all directions:

a. O-Z/Gedney Type AXDX Series.




G. Conduit Bushings:

1. Rigid Steel and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Threaded, grounded, insulating type

with thermosetting or fiber insert in a metal body.

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing Conduit: Identical to rigid steel or intermediate steel

conduit bushing on electrical metallic tubing combination coupling.

3. Insulated Grounding Bushings or grounding wedges on metallic conduits shall be

installed per Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

4. Plenum Conduit: UL approved for air handling spaces when so installed.

H. Conduit Seals:

1. Cast in place with pressure ring and sealing grommet:

a. O-Z/Gedney Type FSK Series with FSKA membrane clamp adapter.

2. Cast in place with two pairs of pressure rings and sealing grommets:

a. O-Z/Gedney Type WSK Series.

3. For sealing conduits installed in core-drilled, sleeved, or precast holes:

a. O-Z/Gedney Type CSM Series with CSMC membrane clamp adapter.

b. Thunderline Link-Seal Series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUIT RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:

1. May be used in:

a. Interior locations.

b. Direct contact with concrete.

2. Shall be used in:

a. Exposed exterior locations.

b. Exposed interior damp or wet locations.

c. Within 7 foot area around boilers, incinerators and other heat producing

equipment.

d. Exposed interior locations within 7 feet of the floor for all low voltage power

and signal conductors (except electrical rooms).

e. Metal decking cells above beams.

B. Intermediate Metallic Conduit:

1. May be used in:

a. All applications noted for rigid galvanized steel conduit..

C. Electrical Metal Tubing:

1. May be used in:

a. Concealed interior locations above ceilings, in hollow studded partitions and

in the cores of concrete masonry unit partitions.




b. Exposed interior locations above 7 feet.

c. Low voltage electric and communication room applications.

2. Shall be used:

a. All exposed interior locations above 7 feet for conductors of any type.

D. Rigid Aluminum Conduit:

1. May be used in:

a. Concealed interior locations above ceilings and in hollow studded partitions.

b. Exposed interior locations above 7 feet.

c. Special applications where magnetic conduit is not acceptable as shown on

Drawings.

E. Coated Conduit:


a. Direct contact with earth.

2. Shall not be used in HVAC plenums.

F. (Schedule 80) Nonmetallic Conduit:

1. May be used in:

a. Direct contact with earth.

b. Locations embedded in concrete.


G. (Schedule 40) Nonmetallic Conduit:

1. May be used in:

a. Locations embedded in concrete.


H. Optical Fiber and Communication Raceways:


a. Fiber optic cable applications (throughout).


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install electrical raceways in accordance with manufacturer's written

installation instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA1, and as follows:

1. Provide power and wiring raceways to control devices for equipment by this or

other Divisions.

2. Minimum conduit raceway size shall be 1/2 inch.




3. Provide supports for raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and

Supports."

a. Fasten raceways to or support from building structure independent of boxes.

Do not support raceways by boxes or combination box/raceway bar hanger

clips.

4. Cut square, free of burrs due to field cutting or manufacture, and use bushings

approved for use where necessary.

5. Increase conduit raceway size as required due to NEC conductor derating

requirements and availability. Minimum feeder conductor sizes, based upon NEC

Table 310.16 and 40 percent maximum conduit raceway fill, shall be as shown on

Drawings. If raceway type altered, be responsible for associated feeder conduit

raceway size per NEC to meet 40 percent maximum fill.

B. Raceway Routing:

1. Separate normal power and generator powered conductors, branch circuits, and

feeder raceways in separate enclosures and rooms. Do not extend generator

powered conductors and feeder raceways through normal power electrical rooms

except where shown on Drawings or approved by the Electrical Engineer.

2. Conceal in finished rooms except where exposure is clearly indicated. Provide

stainless steel escutcheon plates for all finished wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations.

3. Install raceways exposed in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms and

electrical closets. Maintain a minimum 7 foot head room.

4. Install raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural

members and follow the surface contours as much as practical.

5. Run exposed, parallel, or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or

banked runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows

may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires

that there be a change in the plane of the run such as from wall to ceiling and that

the raceways be of the same size. In other cases provide field bends for parallel

raceways.

6. Route raceways as required by job conditions unless intended positions are shown

on Drawings. Verify exact locations of all raceways, pull boxes, and junction

boxes; resolve any conflicts before installation. Give priority in available space to

large steam mains, steam lines that pitch, waste lines, drain lines, large air ducts,

and all structural steel, unless indicated otherwise.

a. Maintain raceway and box separations per NEC.

7. Elevation of Raceway: Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above

water and steam piping.

8. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless

otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs

of offsets parallel. Bends shall exceed minimum bending radii of wire and cable to

be run within.

9. Install with not more than three 90 degree bends or more than 100 feet of straight

conduit between pull boxes. Provide and install all additional pull boxes to meet

this requirement.




10. Minimum Spacing: 3 inches between raceways and cold water or waste piping,

and 12 inches between raceways and parallel steam pipes, condensate pipes, hot

water pipes and air ducts.

11. Do not place raceway less than 1 inch apart where they cross each other.

12. Install to provide adequate grounding between all outlets and the established

electrical system ground.

13. Install to prevent water pockets.

14. Make no horizontal raceway runs in masonry walls.

C. Raceway Installation:

1. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure

protection.

2. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so

curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.

3. Raceways under building slabs and foundations is strictly prohibited except:

a. Service entrance feeders and site distribution feeders as shown on Drawings

with horizontal entries through foundation walls.

b. In building distribution feeders as shown on Drawings.

4. When allowable, raceways under building slabs and foundations:

a. Run larger than 1-inch (27-mm) raceways parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where right angles to reinforcement, place raceways close to

slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at minimum 10-foot (3-m)

intervals.

b. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with

water tight expansion fittings.

c. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 3-inches (75-mm) of concrete

encasement in all directions.

d. Use water tight fittings.

5. Raceways embedded in slabs:

a. Refer to Division 03 Section "Cast-in Place Concrete" for limitation on

placement of conduit in concrete. Required action submittal raceway layout

drawings must be submitted for review and approval prior to installation.

b. Tie raceways to reinforcing rods or otherwise secure them to prevent sagging

or shifting during concrete placement.

c. Maximum outside diameter of embedded conduit shall be 1 inch. Minimum

spacing between conduits shall be 3 conduit diameters clear.

d. Where conduit runs perpendicular to steel deck flutes, place conduit directly

on steel deck. Where conduit runs parallel to steel deck flutes, place on 3/4

inch chair in low flute, with one conduit per flute maximum.

e. Do not place conduit between reinforcing bars and concrete surface. Provide

minimum 1-1/2 inch concrete cover over conduits.

f. Do not place conduit within concrete columns or within ora parallel to

concrete beams and joists.

g. Do not lap or cross conduits at any point.




h. Do not tie conduits to headed shear studs. Place conduits parallel to beams

with headed shear studs at least 18 inches away from studs.

i. Single conduit penetrations shall not be permitted in more than three

consecutive deck flutes. Submit all variations to the Architect for review

prior to the routing of conduits.

j. Where nonmetallic conduit is used, raceways must be converted to rigid

galvanized steel conduit before rising above floor and a second "redundant"

ground conductor must be run. Refer to Division 26 Section "Grounding and

Bonding."

6. When installed embedded in concrete, or, in direct contact with the earth:

a. Provide rigid galvanized steel or IMC elbows for vertical rise through the

concrete.

b. Provide rigid galvanized steel or IMC conduit for the first 10 foot section

when leaving or entering a building.

c. Make watertight with asphaltum or other approved compound applied to

conduit joints before assembled.

7. Join raceways with fittings and make joints tight. Use bonding jumpers to provide

electrical continuity of the raceway system for all metallic feeder conduits 1 inch

and larger. Make raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to

vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Use

insulating bushings to protect conductors.

8. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align

the raceway to enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the

box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two

locknuts, one inside and one outside the box.

9. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub

so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are

used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase

nipple so no threads are exposed.

10. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of

conductors within raceways.

11. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or

monofilament plastic line having not less than 200 lbs. tensile strength. Leave not

less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. Tag at each end identifying

other end location.

12. Refer to Division 26 Section "Conduit Rough-In Systems" for special raceway

installation requirements for telecommunications, systems (low-voltage, signaling

systems) cabling.

13. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to

freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs

and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid

galvanized steel conduit. Where equipment connections are not made under this

contract, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs with floor.




14. Use rigid aluminum conduit in lieu of rigid galvanized steel only as permitted by

code except where rigid galvanized steel conduit is specifically indicated. Comply

with local codes governing the use and installation of aluminum conduit and

fittings.

a. Use aluminum accessories and fittings.

b. Do not embed aluminum raceway systems in concrete or allow them to come

in direct contact with poured concrete, concrete block construction, or earth.

c. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for bending, cutting, and

threading operations.

d. Use an approved aluminum lubricant at all couplings and threaded

connections.

15. PVC externally coated rigid steel conduit: Use only fittings approved for use with

that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit.

16. If it is necessary to cut holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to

the attention of the Architect with size of hole before proceeding with work. All

holes shall be cut no larger than absolutely necessary.

17. Whenever conduit is installed on exposed steel columns, the conduit shall be

installed on the column web, and not on the flange.

18. All conduit knockouts or holes on electrical apparatus which are not used shall be

provided with new plugs to match the NEMA rating of the enclosure.

D. Conduit Fittings:

1. Run with couplings approved for the conduit being used. Running threads and

chase nipples will not be accepted in runs of threaded conduit.

2. Generally use mechanical dual set-screw type on EMT conduit except-use threaded

compression type on EMT conduit within mechanical rooms, kitchens, and damp

locations.

3. Install grounding bushings per Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

E. Raceway Identification:

1. Provide raceway identification per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."

F. Expansion-Deflection Fittings:

1. Install in all raceways at the expansion joints of the building in such a manner that

the expansion joints of the building will function properly and not stress any

electrical raceways. Movement will be required in all directions. Refer to "A"

Series Drawings for facility expansion joint locations.

2. Install on all straight conduit runs 1 inch trade size or larger in excess of 100 feet.

Movement will be required in straight line direction only.

3. Maintain grounding continuity at each expansion-contraction fitting.

G. Conduit Seals:

1. Use type "FSK" cast-in-place where conduit passes through foundation walls less

than 60 inches below finished grade.




2. Install watertight seals at all conduits passing through horizontal barriers. These

seals may be types "FSK," "WSK," or "CSML." Sleeves shall extend at least 2

inches above the finished floor with 1/2 inch space around the conduit and this

space sealed permanently watertight with a removable material (concrete not

acceptable).

3. Install where conduits pass through barriers having a 30 degree F or greater

temperature differential in the spaces on either side at any time, and in conduits

entering or leaving supply and return air plenums. Install pliable removable plastic

compounded in the nearest box at the top of vertical runs and at the hot end of

horizontal runs.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL

PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical

Raceways and Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with

requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all

blockages and remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris before installing or pulling

conductors.






WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL BOXES AND CABINETS



BOXES AND CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section provides requirements and specifications for cabinets, boxes, and fittings for

electric work, and electrical devices not covered in other sections. Products specified in

this Section include:

1. Pull and Junction Boxes.

2. Non-Metallic Polymer Concrete Pullboxes.

3. Cabinets.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate wall and floor box and cabinet penetration in rated walls with Division 07

firestopping installer to ensure rating is maintained.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




A. Shop Drawings:

1. For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details

and attachments to other work.

a. Conduit fittings.

b. Back to back recessed box or cabinet installation locations list, if any.


a. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that

enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for

internal components, will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26

Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:



a) The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will

remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected

to the seismic forces specified and the unit will retain its

enclosure characteristics, including its interior accessibility, after

the seismic event."


gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Listing and Labeling: Items provided under this section shall be designed, fabricated,

and tested to Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) Standard 514A and 514C, and shall be so

listed and labeled.

B. Federal Specifications: Items provided under this section shall comply with W-C-583b

– Conduit Boxes and Outlet Fittings, Floor (for Rigid Conduit).

C. National Electrical Code Compliance: Components and installation shall comply with

NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standard 250, "Enclosures for Electrical

Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)."

2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Electrical Boxes and Cabinets: Of indicated types, sizes and NEMA enclosure classes.

Where not indicated, provide units of types, sizes and classes appropriate for the use and

location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended

use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. Box depth shall exceed depth of

installed device by 1/4 inch.

2.3 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Fasteners for General Use: Corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium

and zinc plated items.

B. Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware.

C. Cast Metal for Boxes, Enclosures and Covers: Copper-free aluminum except as

otherwise specified.

D. Exterior Finish: Gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as

otherwise indicated.

E. Fittings for Boxes, Cabinets and Enclosures: Conform to UL 514B. Malleable iron or

zinc plated steel for conduit hubs, with ground terminal bushings and box connectors.

2.4 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. General:

1. NEMA type and size as required by area or as shown, complete with matching

cover. Where necessary, gaskets shall be used to prevent entrance of moisture.

B. Cast Aluminum:

1. Non-rusting, non-sparking, non-magnetic and bolt on cast cover utilizing stainless

steel screws.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. O-Z/Gedney, a General Signal Co.

2. Crouse Hinds; Div. of Copper Industries, Inc.




3. Appleton Electric Co.

4. Hoffman Engineering Co.

5. Lee Products.

6. Hammond Manufacturing.

7. Electromate Corporation.

2.5 NON-METALLIC POLYMER CONCRETE PULLBOXES

A. Shall be listed electrical enclosures, having 4 sides, solid bottom, and removable top.

Shall be designed, fabricated, and tested to ANSI/SCTE 77-2002 – Specification for

Underground Enclosure Integrity.

B. Material: Enclosures shall be non-metallic, fabricated from a polymer concrete mix of

selectively-graded aggregates in combination with a polymer resin, reinforced with

fiberglass. Enclosures shall:

1. Be impact resistant — tested per ASTM D-2444.

2. Provide low water absorption — less than 1 percent per ASTM D-570.

3. Be corrosion resistant — resistant to alkalines, acids, weathering and other forms

of deterioration.

4. Be nonflammable — will not support combustion.

5. Be nonconductive — no grounding required for the box or cover.

C. Performance Rating: Enclosures, covers, and their accessories, shall be rated Tier 5.

D. Color: Enclosure and cover shall be Grey.

E. Size: 48" x 48”.

1. Enclosures shall be sized in accordance with NEC Article 314.28(A) for conductors

operating at 600 volts or below, and in accordance with NEC Article 314.71 for

conductors operating at over 600 volts.

F. Depth: 27 to 30 inches.

G. Wiring Entries: Raceways and cable assemblies entering a handhole enclosure

underground shall be required to be mechanically connected to the enclosure.

1. The enclosed conductors, splices, and terminations shall be listed as suitable for

wet locations.

H. Covers: Shall be inset flush to pullbox top, bolt down type, with not less than four

stainless steel fasteners, and provided with weathertight gasketing or grommet to prevent

the ingress of weather elements.

1. Shall have a permanent identifying mark or logo that prominently identifies the

function or application of the enclosure, such as "ELECTRIC."

2. Shall be factory provided with the design Tier level rating embossed on the cover

surface.

3. Cover design load rating cannot exceed the design load rating of the enclosure.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Quazite – PG Style.

2. PenCell Plastics, Inc. – PEM Series.




2.6 CABINETS

A. Comply with UL 50, "Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-

Environmental Considerations."

B. General: NEMA type and size as required by area, application, or as shown. Cabinet

shall consist of a box and a front consisting of a one piece frame and hinged door. Hinged

side shall be dependent upon physical application. Arrange door to close against a rabbet

placed around the inside edge of the frame, with a uniformly close fit between door and

frame. Provide concealed fasteners, not over 24 inches apart, to hold fronts to cabinet

boxes and provide for adjustment. Provide flush or concealed door hinges not over 24

inches apart and not over 6 inches from top and bottom of door. Louvers for cabinet

ventilation shall be provided as required by application. For flush cabinets, make the

front approximately 3/4 inch larger than the box all around. For surface mounted cabinets

make front same height and width as box.

C. Doors: Double doors for cabinets wider than 24 inches. Cabinets wider than 48 inches

may have sliding or removable doors.

D. Locks: Combination spring catch and key lock, with all locks for cabinets of the same

system keyed alike. Locks may be omitted on signal, power and lighting cabinets located

within wire closets and mechanical-electrical rooms. Locks shall be of a type to permit

doors to latch closed without locking. Latch shall be padlocking type for exterior

applications.

E. Sheet Stainless Steel: Type 316L sheet stainless steel, minimum 16 gauge thickness for

enclosures 20 inch wide and less, otherwise 14 ga. welded seams, gasketed weathertight

door, stainless steel hinge, and stainless steel latches and padlockable hardware.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Square-D.

2. Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse.

3. General Electric.

4. Hoffman Engineering Co.

5. Lee Products.

6. Crenlo, Inc.

7. Hammond Manufacturing.

8. Electromate Corporation.

9. Siemens.

10. Hennessy Products, Inc.

11. Wiegman, a Division of Hubbell, Inc.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Ground Lug: Provisions for each box and cabinet, to facilitate bonding to the building

ground system.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements and

installation conditions.

B. Maintain the environmental rating of the enclosures. Install in the openings only listed

or recognized conduit hubs or conduit and raceway fittings providing the same rating and

integrity as the enclosure, in compliance with the installation instructions of the device.

1. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused

conduit hubs.

2. Use listed connectors to maintain raceway to enclosure grounding and bonding

integrity. Cut through paint as applicable. Cutting slots shall not be acceptable for

conduit entries into enclosures.

C. Support and fasten items securely in accordance with Division 26 Section "Hangers and

Supports."

1. Fasten boxes to or support from building structure independent of raceways. Do

not support boxes by raceway or combination raceway/box bar banger clips.

D. Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller than

sizes indicated.

E. Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel.

F. Refinish and paint enclosures in field due to any field modifications.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Provide electrical identification as indicated in Division 26 Section "Electrical

Identification."

B. Cabinets: NEMA Type 1, installed flush, unless noted or indicated otherwise.

C. Boxes and Fittings: Install concealed, unless noted otherwise, with associated covers and

fittings of materials and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with

the following requirements.

1. Interior Dry Locations: Sheet steel, NEMA Type 1.

2. Interior Wet or Damp Locations, or Exposed to Weather: Cast metal, NEMA Type

3R.

3. Outdoor and Indoor Wet Locations: NEMA Type 4 enclosures.

D. Exterior walls shall not be considered dry locations for concealed exterior devices. Sheet

steel boxes shall not be used.

E. Cast boxes shall be installed in:

1. Exterior locations.

2. Exposed interior locations within seven feet of the floor.

3. Direct contact with earth.

4. Direct contact with concrete in slab on grade.

5. Wet locations.




F. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types

suitable for each location except as otherwise indicated.

3.3 INSTALLATION - BOXES

A. Provide box sizes as required by the National Electrical Code with oversize boxes as

shown on Drawings. Obtain special backboxes with associated equipment when

available.

B. Provide where required for outlet facility and rough-in requirements. Securely support

from building construction with listed and approved rods, hangers, brackets, supports,

etc., independent of raceways. Provide backing extension for all steel device boxes in

stud walls or support box on two opposite sides such that cover plate and drywall is not

stressed to hold box in position.

C. Give priority in available space to large steam mains, steam lines that pitch, waste lines,

drain lines, large air duct, and all structural steel, unless shown otherwise.

1. Minimum Spacing: 3 inches between boxes and cold water or waste piping and 6

inches between boxes and parallel steam pipes, condensate pipes, hot water pipes

and air ducts.

2. Do not support from ceiling supporting system, mechanical system supports or

mechanical systems.

3. Do not penetrate or anchor into mechanical ductwork.

D. Install concealed, flush to finished wall, floor or ceiling construction materials except

where otherwise shown or specified as surface mounted. To maximize available future

wall space, do not assume surface mounted boxes or associated raceways in equipment

or electrical rooms.

E. Maintain accessibility to all boxes. For the purposes of this specification section, Z-spline

ceilings shall not be considered accessible.

F. Provide and install concealed boxes, so no part is visible, and is completely covered by

wall plate.

G. Do not cut insulation in walls to install boxes.

H. Do not use 2-sided, through wall boxes.

I. Do not install concealed, flush boxes back to back for both fire and sound rating issues.

Drawings are considered diagrammatic. Those installations not approved shall be

corrected at no cost to the Owner.

J. Install boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

K. Where two or more devices are shown or otherwise specified to be installed at the same

location and at the same height, install those devices in a common multi-gang barriered

box as appropriate for the device types.

1. Maintain box and raceway separations per NEC. Pullbox barriers will not be

acceptable except for special cases brought to the Engineer's attention prior to

installation.




L. Where two or more devices are shown or otherwise specified to be installed at the same

location but at different height elevations, rough the boxes vertically on a common center

line.

M. Install in center of glazed tile, brick, block or other masonry wall material with square

cornered tile or masonry extension rings of proper depth.

N. Install outlet boxes in sheet rock walls with square cornered tile or masonry rings of

proper depth. Standard drywall rings will not be acceptable. Maintain NEC required

tolerances.

O. Close off all unused openings with proper fittings.

P. Provide box and cabinet barriers to segregate voltages 300 volts and greater and to

segregate normal and emergency distribution system branches.

3.4 INSTALLATION - PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. All boxes shall be concealed and accessible after completion of building.

B. Installation in finished spaces requiring access panels is prohibited except where

specifically shown or directed.

3.5 INSTALLATION - NON-METALLIC POLYMER CONCRETE PULLBOXES

A. Excavate earth approximately 6 inches deeper than the depth of the enclosure.

B. Provide not less than 6 inches of gravel or crushed rock in the excavation, for drainage.

C. Place enclosure in excavation, such that top of enclosure will be flush with finished grade

level elevation.

D. Backfill with specified backfill materials, and hand tamp in layers. Backfill and final

tamp to finished grade elevation.

E. Provide knockouts in enclosure, as required, based on quantity and sizes of raceway

entries. Seal all raceway penetrations watertight.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."

3.7 BOX COVERS

A. Provide appropriate covers for all boxes dependent upon size, type, and application.

3.8 INSTALLATION - CABINETS

A. Support securely independent from building construction and align with adjacent

equipment. Top shall be 6 foot - 2 inches to top of trim.

3.9 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Electrically bond metallic cabinets, boxes, enclosures and their associated raceways to

the building grounding and system. Where wiring to box or cabinet includes a grounding

and bonding conductor, provide a terminal in the interior of the cabinet, box or enclosure,

and connect conductor.




3.10 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt, and

construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions, and

weld marks.

B. Painted Finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Channel support systems.

2. Restraint cables.

3. Hanger rod stiffeners.

4. Anchorage bushings and washers.

B. Provide seismic restraining devices per approved study submitted by a qualified

professional structural engineer responsible to Division 26.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports" for commonly used electrical supports

and installation requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration

isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for

each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers

and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance

with requirements.

3. Restrained Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined

loads.




B. Delegated Design Submittal: For seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed

by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment

weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and

seismic restraints.

2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and

anchorage devices.

3. Field fabricated supports.

4. Seismic Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of restraints. Include

calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of

restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment

locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths,

and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during

seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By a professional structural

engineer, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum

ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

5. Design adhesive and expansion anchors in accordance with ACI 318 Appendix D.

6. Design anchorage and bracing system not to exceed the loads listed on S0001.

Attach to composite floor slabs, top flange of wide flange beams, upper chords of

open web steel joists, or at concrete members. Do not attach to steel roof deck.



1. Welding certificates.

2. Professional Engineer.

a. Professional engineer must be licensed in project state.

3. Testing Agency:

a. Local authority having jurisdiction approval.

B. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components

with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic

restraints.

C. Identify areas of consequential damage. Show bracing required to mitigate consequential

damage.

D. Field quality control test reports.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this

Section are more stringent.




B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and

shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES,

or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing

maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred

to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based

on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile

loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified

professional structural engineer.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: A.

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: III.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

b. Component Response Modification Factor: 5.0.

c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

3. California Dynamics Corporation.

4. Isolation Technology, Inc.

5. Kinetics Noise Control.

6. Mason Industries.

7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

8. Vibration Isolation.

9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:




C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a

comparable product by one of the following:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. California Dynamics Corporation.

3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

4. Hilti, Inc.

5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division.

6. Mason Industries.

7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.

8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

D. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and

application requirements shall be as defined in reports by a professional structural

engineer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Design in accordance with the governing building code requirements.

E. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of

slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end

and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with

corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

F. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel

assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable

service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

G. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld

stiffeners to rods.

H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type

and size of attachment devices.

I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated

steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors

with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum

length of eight times diameter.

J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane

methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.

Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and

stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for

anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Anchors must meet the requirements of

ICC-ES AC308.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings.




2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior

use.

3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.

4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to

indicate capacity range.

5. Select anchors that do not cause an increased corrosion when connected to

dissimilar materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive seismic-control devices for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual

locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with

clamps approved for application by a professional structural engineer acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where shown or scheduled on

Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to

seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes

of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic

loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Brace all equipment and components required by design criteria specified in Part 1.

2. Comply with design criteria specified in Part 1 for all outdoor equipment.

3. It is the intent of the seismic load portion of this Section to keep all mechanical,

electrical, plumbing, and fire protection building system components in place

during a seismic event and additionally operational where the occupancy category

of the building requires.

4. Install in strict accordance with applicable building codes, component

manufacturer’s and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs

between the manufacturer’s standards or construction standards, apply the most

stringent installation practice.

5. This specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic, floor and

vibration control considerations.

6. Correct in an approved manner, any variation which results in non-compliance with

the specification requirements.




B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.

2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by a professional

structural engineer providing required submittals for component.

C. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to

provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached

to wall.

D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to

structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

E. Drilled-In Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling

holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during

coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other

embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed

tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has

achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-

duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural

element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to

installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the

hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction

of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and

busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are

supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to

equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them

as they approach equipment.


A. Inspections and Tests:


"Electrical Inspections and Testing: ANSI/NETA ATS, "System Functional Tests",

and "Thermographic Survey" requirements, and the following additional

requirements:

a. Prepare test and inspection reports.




B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device

to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and

with at least seven (7) days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide

temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected

by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.

7. Measure isolator deflection.

8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.

9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until

satisfactory results are achieved.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.






WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION



ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes:

1. Identification for raceway and cable.

2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.

3. Underground line warning tape.

4. Warning labels and signs.

5. Equipment identification labels.

6. Test/Inspection identification labels.

7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring

diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes,

standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting

of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Brady USA, Inc. Industrial Products Division.

2. BW Industries, Inc.

3. Ideal Industries, Inc.

4. Rhino/DYMO, a Newell Rubbermaid Company.

5. Seton Name Plate Corporation.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 70E.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.




E. Comply with NFPA 70E and Division 26 Section "Protective Device Coordination"

requirements for arc flash warning labels.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface

temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.

G. Adhesive attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and

inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

2.3 FONT

A. Arial uppercase.

B. Text abbreviations other than equipment identifications permitted only as approved.

2.4 COLOR CODING REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide NEC electrical distribution branch color coding as follows:

1. Normal:

a. System ID or Nameplate: Black

b. Text: White

c. Conductors: Per associated Section

B. Provide Division 27 systems color coding as follows:

1. Structured Cabling:

a. System ID/Cable Jacket:

1) OF Multimode OM1/OM2 Orange

2) OF Multimode OM3/OM4 Aqua

3) OF Singlemode Yellow

4) Copper backbone Gray

5) Horizontal cable Blue

b. Nameplate/Text: Per EIA/TIA 606A

c. Raceway: Blue

2. Public Address:

a. System ID/Cable Jacket: Gray

b. Nameplate: Dark Brown

c. Text: White

d. Raceway: White

C. Provide Division 28 systems color coding as follows:

1. Security:

a. System ID/Cable Jacket: White or Yellow

b. Nameplate: Dark Green

c. Text: White

d. Raceway: Yellow




2. Fire Alarm:

a. System ID/Cable Jacket: Red

b. Nameplate: Red

c. Text: White

d. Raceway: Red

2.5 RACEWAY AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length

of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Color for System Identification and Printed Text:

1. Per system or NEC branch color coding specified.

2. Identification Label: Indicate system or service. Include branch and voltage text

for NEC electrical distribution.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather

and chemical resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends

of legend label.

2.6 BOX WIRING IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhesive Labels: Field machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process

with System/Panelboard, Circuit No., and Load text.

2.7 CONDUCTOR, WALL PLATE, AND COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE

IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils

(0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit

identification text machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014 inch (0.35-mm-) thick aluminum

sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed text, and fitted with tabs and matching slots

for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.

2.8 UNDERGROUND RACEWAY MARKING TAPE

A. Heavy gauge, not less than 5 mils thick, by 6 inches (150 mm) wide, polyethylene

marking tape with integral metallic detection foil applied therein:

1. Color: APWA Yellow.

2. Wording: "CAUTION BURIED UTILITY LINE BELOW".

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Seton.

2. Panduit Corp.

3. Emedco.




2.9 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure sensitive adhesive

labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless

otherwise indicated.

2.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw

mounting, color coded by system. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch (6.4 mm).

2.11 EQUIPMENT TEST LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, color coded by system, by thermal transfer or

equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch (6.4 mm).

2.12 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw

mounting. Minimum letter height shall be 1/4 inch (93.2 mm).

2.13 ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Dot Label: 1/2 inch (64 mm) vinyl dot color coded by system.

2.14 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking,

Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi

(82.7 MPa).

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).

4. Color: Per system color coding.

2.15 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or stainless steel

machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products,

clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods

recommended by manufacturer of identification product.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. Use drawing

nomenclature unless otherwise directed.




B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware

appropriate to the location and substrate.

D. System Identifications Color Banding for Raceway Systems and Cables: Each color band

shall completely encircle cable or raceway. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings

in contact, side by side.

E. Box and Equipment Identification: Attach to box or enclosure cover in locations shown

on Drawings or with high visibility.

F. Test and Inspection Identification: Attach to appropriate box, enclosure or device for

most convenient viewing to operation and maintenance personnel. Install inside device

door in finished areas.

G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of

conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

I. Underground Raceway Marking Tape: Prior to backfilling of underground raceway, duct

and ductbank trenches, install continuous length of underground marking tape directly

above buried raceways, ducts and ductbanks, at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below

finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of raceways and ducts installed in a

common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Raceway Systems and Cables Identification:

1. Accessible Raceways, AC and MC Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and

Branch Circuits More Than 30 Amperes: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label

per NEC electrical distribution branch color coding including identification label.

Install at box and conduit fittings within 12 inches, each side of joints, and at bushed

conduits.

2. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Division 23 through 28 Systems: Identify the

systems with preprinted identification label, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in

bands per color coding. Install at box and conduit fittings within 12 inches, each

side of joints, and at bushed conduits.

a. Exception: No identification required for raceways and cable with readily

identifiable terminations within the same room.

B. Box Identification:

1. Color Coded, Field Painting: Initial color coded field painting of inside of system

boxes and enclosures are allowable for Contractor identifications during wiring

installation.

2. Wiring Identification: Identify Division 21-28 system or panelboard, circuit

number, and load on outside of box cover with self-adhesive labels.

a. For finished areas or exterior areas, locate identification inside box cover.




C. Conductor Identification:

1. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Use the colors listed in Division 26

Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (100-600 Volts)"

for ungrounded conductors. Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of

6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are

made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.

Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

2. Feeder Conductor Identification: For secondary conductors No. 1/0 AWG and

larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use tie on write-

on tags. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single

conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.

3. Branch Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than

three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use marker tape. Identify each

ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.

4. Pull Wires in Empty Raceways: Tag pull wires at each end and in each intermediate

box, manhole, or other enclosure identifying other end location using metal tags.

5. Division 23 through 28 Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed

alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.

a. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals within boxes, enclosures and at

junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit

designation.

b. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with

system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

c. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring

diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

D. Warning Tapes, Labels, and Signs:

1. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for

power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install

underground line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

2. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in

the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70

and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush mounted

panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

3. Warning Labels for Identification for Branch Circuit Ungrounded Conductors:

Install at all branch circuit panelboards, cabinets, and enclosures per NFPA 70.

Provide black text on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or

other access generally. For flush mounted panelboards in finished spaces, install on

inside of protective device door.

a. For 208/120 volt systems, lines and text shall be:

1) "208/120 VOLT SYSTEM"

2) "PHASE A – BLACK"

3) "PHASE B – RED"

4) "PHASE C – BLUE"




4. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following texts:

a. Low Voltage Room Door Sign: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL HAZARD –

AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY".

b. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power:

Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels.

Identify system voltage with black text on an orange background. Apply to

exterior of door, cover, or other access.

c. Arc Flash Hazard Warning: Per NFPA 70E requirements.

E. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine

label on each major unit of electrical equipment in building, including central or

master unit of each electrical system. This includes communication/signal/alarm

systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except

as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text in field designating the equipment

served. Utilize NEC electrical distribution branch color coded field and lettering

for equipment connected. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the

Contract Documents and shop drawings. Electrical equipment nameplates shall

also designate line side source (i.e. FED FROM: "_______" ROOM # "____") in

smaller 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) text. Smaller nameplate text may be used where

adequate nameplate mounting space is not available, but in no case shall the text be

smaller than 1/8-inch (3.2 mm). Apply labels mechanically with machine screws

or pop rivets for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment and

those scheduled on Drawings for electrical equipment and panelboard designations.

a. Distribution panelboards protective devices.

b. Fire alarm system field processing units, terminal cabinets, peripheral

monitor and control addressable relay modules, fire phone cabinets and

remote duct detector test stations.

c. Panelboards.

d. Standard telecommunication system.

2. Refer to appropriate sections for other identification marking requirements and

nomenclature.

3. Attach identification after finish painting.

F. Component Identification Labels:

1. Apply component identification labels to distribution panelboard, switchgear, unit

substation, switchboard, and MCC assemblies as follows:

a. Assembly Nameplate: Apply per equipment identification label

requirements except 1-inch (80 mm) identification text.

b. Cubicle Label: Apply 1/2-inch (40 mm) black text on white plate identifying

left-to-right number with 1/4-inch (20 mm) black text below identification

section type(s):

1) Main Circuit Breaker.

2) Panelboard.

3) Circuit Breaker.




4) Spare.

5) Space.

c. Protective Device Load Label: Apply 1/4 inch (20 mm) text on plate per

system color coding identifying load served. For medium voltage feeders,

also identify "FEEDER NO. XX."

d. Miscellaneous Component Labels: Apply 1/4 inch (20 mm) black text on

white plate identifying components and instruments mounted on front or

within the assembly such as relays, fuses, switches, terminal blocks.

G. Equipment Test Labels:

1. Apply equipment test labels of adhesive film label on each major unit of electrical

equipment and components identified to be tested in Division 26 Section "Electrical

Inspections and Testing" and associated Sections, after satisfactory completion of

tests and inspections.

2. Indicate test results, responsible agency, representative and date.

H. Above Ceiling Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Apply adhesive dot labels to nearest exposed ceiling grid or associated access panel

latch for the following above ceiling equipment:

a. Fire alarm addressable relay.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CONDUIT ROUGH-IN SYSTEMS



CONDUIT ROUGH-IN SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Conduit Rough-In Systems and pathways for communication and

signaling systems cabling and boxes including all work incidental thereto as shown on

Drawings and specified.


A. Comply with the following Standards and Codes:

1. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 568B: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard

2. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 569B: Commercial Building Standard for

Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

3. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 606A: Administration Standard for the

Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial

Buildings

4. ANSI-J-STD-607-A: Commercial Building Grounding, Earthing and

Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

5. ANSI/NECA/

BICSI 568-2001: Installing Commercial Building

Telecommunications Cabling

6. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

7. All addenda, technical service bulletins, etc., associated with the above reference

standards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Pathway: Pathways may consist of cabinets, conduit, conduit stub, etc. where system

cabling will be run.

B. Rough-In: Preparation for system(s) cabling and equipment installations.

C. System Cabling: Low voltage signal and control cabling. System cabling is designated

by the manufacturer for a particular system in each specification section.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all requirements of the Owner’s and manufacturer’s representatives for all

room preparation, pathways and specific rough-in installation requirements, including

associated sizing, location and labeling, for the following systems:

1. Division 27 Systems:

a. Structured Telecommunications Cabling.

b. Public Address.




1.5 SUBMITTALS




A. Record Documents:

1. Submit updated Coordination Drawings as Record Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAYS

A. Refer to Division 26 Section "Raceways" for requirements. Provide with insulated

throats and bushings on all conduit runs, stubs, and sleeves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUIT AND PATHWAYS APPLICATIONS

A. Conduit Raceways (Completely Enclosed Wiring):

1. Shall be used for separate and independent horizontal system cabling routing for

each of the following systems:

a. Division 27 Systems:

1) Structured Telecommunications Cabling.

2) Public Address.

2. Shall be used for Systems backbone.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install all pathways in accordance with EIA/TIA 569A Standards, associated

addenda and technical service bulletins and per manufacturer's requirements.

a. Install all pathways in a safe, neat, professional, workmanlike manner.

b. Coordinate size of pathways such that EIA/TIA maximum fill requirements

are not exceeded for that raceway size at 40 percent fill maximum.

2. Provide pathways to conceal all cabling in the facility except where specifically

indicated otherwise.

3. Coordinate pathway installation such that it is independently supported.

4. Install all pathways parallel and perpendicular to building lines and tight to

structure. Install pathways such that multiple cabling runs to the same geographic

location will utilize similar pathway routing to destination point.

5. Route cabling pathways to the system equipment room from indicated zone or as

shown on Drawings.

6. Install pathways to avoid elevator shafts, elevator equipment rooms, or any areas

that contain or store hazardous materials.




7. Install pathways to avoid sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) for all

pathways.

a. Maintain 10 foot minimum from electrical power cabling or distribution

panels exceeding 480 volts.

b. Maintain 1 foot minimum from electrical power cabling.

c. Maintain 2 inch minimum from electrical power cabling less than 220 volts.

8. Avoid routing pathways in areas subject to excessive environmental conditions.

Acceptable conditions are:

a. Temperature Range: 5˚C – 50˚C.

b. Relative Humidity Range: 5 percent - 95 percent.

9. Install raceway and equipment identifications per Division 26 Section "Electrical

Identification." Label all pathways and associated termination points.

a. Provide system identifying nameplate centered on main trunk riser boxes,

equipment backboards, ground buses, and cabinets (i.e. DATACOM, CCTV,

etc.).

b. Identify fiber optic labeling risers installed in ENT or Innerduct every 10 feet

on center "Fiber Optic Cabling."

B. Raceways:

1. Refer to Division 26 Section "Raceways" for basic routing and installation

requirements.

2. Furnish and install raceway, junction boxes as specified and shown on Drawings.

3. Provide cap for all conduit stubs to eliminate debris from entering conduits.

Remove any debris found in conduits upon cable installation.

4. Mark each conduit end for identification and destination of raceway.

5. Install all raceways such that the cabling manufacturer’s minimum bend radius is

not exceeded.

6. Furnish and install 200 pound test, braided nylon pullcords in all conduits and as

shown on Drawings. Label all pullcords.

7. Provide complete conduit systems in areas with non-accessible ceilings for all cable

systems.

8. Utilize surface raceway in finished areas where cabling cannot be concealed.

9. Special Optical Fiber and Communication Raceways:

a. Install backbone fiber optic cabling in plenum rated Optical Fiber and

Communication (innerduct) raceway per Division 26 Section "Raceways."

Install Optical Fiber and Communication, using proper connectors and

fittings.

10. Provide conduit segment length at no more than 100 feet with a maximum of two

90 degree bends. Additional junction/pull boxes shall be installed to allow more

bends or length of conduit. Refer to EIA/TIA 569A. Coordinate location to nearby

cable spool or cable management device.

11. Install telecommunications raceways to within 6 inches of equipment backboards,

data racks, and termination units.

a. Coordinate location and termination to cable management device.




12. Provide a minimum of 10 inch inside curve radius of conduits for each 1 inch in

diameter of installed conduit.

3.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Post copy of appropriate systems record drawings in local equipment room as required

by Owner's representatives. Hang set on equipment backboard using proper anchoring

techniques.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PANELBOARDS



PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 volt or

less.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Distribution Power Panelboard: A panelboard with thermal magnetic circuit breakers or

fusible switches, bolt-in type, designed for heavy commercial use, operating at 600 V and

below, 3-phase version, equipped as surface mounting with cabled connections between

sections. Panelboard shall have less than 10 percent of its concurrent devices rated 30

amperes or less for which neutral connections are provided.

B. Surge Protection Device (SPD): A device to reduce the effect of voltage spikes to

sensitive electronic equipment by shunting these disturbances to earth ground.

C. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): A device operative on excessive current that

causes and maintains the interruption of power in the circuit it protects.

D. Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI): A device intended to provide protection against the

effects of arcing faults, as defined in the NEC.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient

voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and

manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,

and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed

devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective

devices. Series rated protective devices are not acceptable.

d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

2. Wiring diagrams detailing control wiring and differentiating between

manufacturer- installed and field-installed wiring.




3. Electronic panelboard SPD data, associated loads, circuit breaker disconnects, and

dimensioned room layouts ensuring proper NEC clearances and coordination.

a. Installation instructions shall be reviewed to determine whether the system

requires an external overcurrent device in order to maintain the systems UL

1449 3rd Edition listing.

b. A UL 1449 3rd Edition stipulation is required for all submittals. The

stipulation will verify the use of additional fusing via manufacturer's

signature.


a. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For panelboards, overcurrent protective

devices, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




gravity and located and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.




A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality control test reports including the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply

with requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in

Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Include copy of typed directories depicting branch circuit loads.

B. Record Documents:

1. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two (2) spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP)

Types: Two (2) spares for each panelboard.





A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components,

and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Field Testing: Refer to Division 26 Section "Electrical Inspections and Testing" for field





C. Comply with ANSI/NETA ATS – Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for



A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the

following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then

only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements

indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven (7) days in advance of proposed interruption of

electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner’s written

permission.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other

construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other

types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance

requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. General Panelboards:

a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.

b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div.




c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

d. Square D.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section

"Product Requirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in



C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

2.3 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE

A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual

test of assembled components or on calculation. Shake-table testing shall comply

with ICC-ES AC156.

2. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the

unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2.4 PANELBOARDS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating, and features as shown on

Drawings. Comply with Division 26 Section "Protective Devices," with OCPDs adapted

to panelboard installation. Tandem circuit breakers shall not be used. Multipole breakers

shall have common trip.

B. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength of all panelboard components,

including OCPDs, for short circuit current ratings as shown on Drawings. The minimum

ratings shall be 10,000 AIC for 120/208 volt equipment and 14,000 AIC for 277/480 volt

equipment. Series ratings of protective devices shall not be acceptable.

C. Enclosures: Cabinets, flush or surface mounted as shown on Drawings. NEMA Type 1

enclosure, except where the following enclosure requirements are shown on Drawings.

Backboxes shall be made from galvanized steel. Where feeder cables supplying the mains

of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall

be sized to include the additional required wiring space. Provide at least four interior

mounting studs with adjustable nuts.

1. NEMA 3R: Raintight.

D. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps except as indicated. Front for

surface-mounted panelboards shall be same dimensions as box. Fronts for flush

panelboards shall overlap box except as otherwise specified.




E. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box with standard door within hinged

trim cover.

F. Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panelboard door.

G. Typed directory card completely filled out including "SPARE" and "SPACE" loads.

H. Bus: Hard drawn, tin-plated copper of 98 percent conductivity.

I. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.

J. Main Circuit Breaker (when scheduled): Mounted physically separate from branch

breaker lineups (not in same row) to allow for full branch circuit pole quantity.

K. Branch Circuit Devices: Arranged for double row construction.

L. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch circuit equipment ground

conductors. Bond to box with bolted or welded connection.

M. Gutter: Generally, conform to UL 61.

N. Service Equipment Approval: Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards having

main service disconnect.

O. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections and

extensions, and necessary appurtenances, for the OCPD ampere ratings shown on

Drawing schedules for future installation of devices.

P. Special Features: Provide the following features for panelboards as scheduled and or

shown on Drawings or as required to meet NEC:

1. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panels: Same gauge and finish as panelboard front with

flanges for attachment to panel, wall, and floor.

2. Contactors in Mains: Mechanically held, with current rating, poles, and

connections as shown on Drawings.

3. Shunt Trip Control Power Source: Shunt trips where shown on Drawings shall be

120 volt AC. Provide a 120 volt power supply from the main bus with a primary

fuse protected, control power transformer, with terminals and wiring for the shunt

trip connection to remote pushbutton station(s). Where specified for "emergency"

shut-down, install pushbutton on the panel trim. Access to interior shall be without

disturbing pushbutton and shall allow for wiring disconnection from pushbutton.

4. Molded Case Switch: Sized to accommodate feeder lugs shown on Drawings.

Q. Seismic Mounting: On emergency panelboards to allow lateral drifts and restraint design

associated with local codes. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to

withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic

Controls."

R. Plug-in type load center type panelboards shall be used for residential applications only.




2.5 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Doors: In panel front, omit single panelboard door in cabinet front for fusible switch

panelboards except as shown on Drawings. Secure with vault-type cylindrical tumbler

lock, all keyed alike. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the door.

Doors over 48 inches high hinged, and shall be provided with a vault type handle, built-

in locks, and three point latch (top, bottom and center).

B. Branch-Circuit Breakers: Where OCPDs are shown on Drawings to be circuit breakers,

use bolt-on breakers except circuit breakers 225-ampere frame size and greater may be

plug-in type where individual positive locking device requires mechanical release for

removal.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items as required for overcurrent

protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: Arranged to permit testing of functions of solid-state trip devices

without removal from panelboard.

C. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for panelboards interior including

OCPDs and other components.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Refer to Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification," for labeling materials

and methods.

B. Manufacturer's Nameplate Information:

1. Voltage.

2. Phase.

3. Ampacity.

4. Manufacturer.

5. A.I.C. Symmetrical.

6. UL Listing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Sections

"Hangers and Supports" and "Vibration and Seismic Controls."

C. Mount top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount large distribution panelboards minimum 1-foot above floor. When top and bottom

dimensional requirements cannot be met, install on concrete bases.

E. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer’s

written instructions and NFPA 70.




F. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with

fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.

H. Install filler plates in unused spaces and plug any unused, open cabinet knockouts.

I. Install breaker handle clips in on position at breakers servicing fire alarm equipment.

J. Stub four (4) 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or

space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four (4) 1-inch empty conduits

into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

K. When a home run to an existing panelboard is shown, compatible circuit protectives of

the indicated ratings shall be provided when they are not in the existing panel. Whenever

circuits are removed from existing panels, the associated conduit and wire shall be

removed in its entirety except leave horizontal studs at ceiling cavities and the protective

device identified as a space. Adjust directories accordingly. Replace directory if over

six (6) circuit changes.

L. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."

1. Provide "Fire Alarm System" component identification label at breakers servicing

fire alarm equipment.

B. Create a typed directory to indicate installed circuit loads. Label circuit locations (not

occupancy) and spares. Obtain typed approval before installing. Use a computer or

typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Inspection and Tests:


"Electrical Inspections and Testing", ANSI/NETA ATS Sections for associated

panelboard components, "System Functional Tests", and "Thermographic Survey"

requirements and the following additional requirements.

a. Limit breaker tests to 400 amps and above or with adjustable trips.




b. Assure all panelboard buses undergo thermographic survey.

c. Follow-up thermographic survey shall not be required.

d. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in

cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROTECTIVE DEVICES



PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes circuit breakers rated 600 volts and less. Application, installation,

and other related requirements for overcurrent protective device installations in other

distribution equipment is specified in other Division 26 sections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): A device operative on excessive current that

causes and maintains the interruption of power in the circuit it protects.

B. Ampere-Squared-Seconds: An expression of available thermal energy resulting from

current flow. With regard to current-limiting circuit breakers, the

ampere-squared-seconds during fault current interruption represents the energy allowed

to flow before the breaker interrupts the fault current within its current limiting range.

1.3 LEGEND

A. AIC = Amperes interrupting capacity (K = 1000).

B. GFI = Ground fault interrupting.

C. Non = Non-interchangeable.

1.4 COMPATIBILITY

A. All protective devices in new assemblies shall be of the same manufacture except for

special applications of proprietary types to maximize single-source responsibility.

B. Protective devices added to existing assemblies shall have compatible interrupting ratings

to the assembly and shall be of the original manufacture. If not available, modify or

extend the assembly to accept compatible protective devices of same manufacturer as

supplied in new assemblies.

C. A complete coordination study in accordance with Division 26 Section "Protective

Device Coordination" shall be commissioned and paid for by Division 26. Series ratings

of OCPD are not acceptable.

1.5 SUBMITTALS




A. Product Data: For circuit breakers, and OCPD accessories specified in this Section,

including descriptive data and time-current curves for all protective devices and

let-through current curves for those with current limiting characteristics. Include

coordination charts and tables and related data.




B. Shop Drawings:


a. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For overcurrent protective devices,

accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




gravity and located and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.





1. Testing Agent Qualifications.

B. Field Quality Control Test Reports:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply

with requirements.

4. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and

circuit breakers.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.

3. Include "as-designed" and "as-left" OCPD adjustable settings list for all

installations.

B. Record Documents.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in




C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for

enclosed protective devices, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent

surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Series rating of OCPDs is not acceptable.




E. Field Testing: Refer to Division 26 Section "Electrical Inspections and Testing" for field





F. Comply with ANSI/NETA ATS – Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for



A. Environment Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg. F (minus 30 deg. C) and not

exceeding 104 deg. F (40 deg. C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of protective devices and their associated enclosures

and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment and

adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for

equipment access doors and panels.

1.12 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. Enclosures:

1. NEMA 250-85 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts, maximum).

B. Molded Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers:

1. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.

2. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID-STATE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.

2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D/Group Schneider.




B. Construction:

1. Standard Tripping Mechanism: Solid-state tripping elements with associated

current monitor and flux transfer shunt trip in two or three pole applications.

Sensors shall be provided for each pole. Long-time trip settings shall be adjustable

using rating plug and dials covering a minimum range of 50 – 100 percent of the

specified rating. Hand held battery operated programmers are acceptable; however,

provide a minimum of (2) programmers, a wall mountable galvanized steel storage

box and provide a minimum of (2) 4 hour additional training sessions for the

Owner. The magnetic trip unit shall have adjustable short-time and instantaneous

trip characteristics. Trip unit shall be common for all poles, trip-free, over center

quick-make quick-break switching and consist of a manual trip button and trip

indicators. The trip device shall be insensitive to temperature changes between

minus 20 degrees C and plug 55 degrees C. The long-time delay, short-time pickup,

short-time delay and instantaneous pickup shall be fully adjustable using dials or a

hand held programmer, with the following minimum characteristics, based on the

coordination study, settings and adjustments may override specification

generalities:

a. Long-time pickup (0.5 – 1) x plug rating.

b. Long-Time Delay:

1) 600 amps and below (2-14 seconds).

2) Above 600 amps (2-24 seconds).

c. Short-time pickup (2-8) x plug rating.

d. Short-Time Delay:

1) 600 amp frame and below (0.1 – 0.2 seconds) including l^2 t out/in.

2) 800 – 1600 amp frame (0.1 - 0.4 seconds) including l^2 t out/in.

2. Ground Fault Protection Tripping: Shall utilize the flux transfer shunt trip. Utilize

an internal sensor for breakers equal or under the 400 amp frame rating. Above

400 amps, the ground fault trip shall be a self-contained external relay and shunt

trip, except for neutral sensor, and feature an adjustable pick-up and time delay

range from 0 to 18 cycles. Sensing shall be by the residual current method. Provide

trip indicator and test panel.

a. Ground Fault Pickup:

1) 1200A or Below: 0.2 - .7 times.

2) Above 1200A: 500A – 1200A.

b. Ground Fault Delay:

1) 600 amp frame and below (0.1 – 0.2 seconds) l^2 t on/off.

2) 800 – 1600 amp frame (0.1 – 0.4 seconds) including l^2 t on/off.

3. Enclosure: Bakelite, epoxy, glass-fibered reinforced polyester or similar material

required to obtain interrupting rating. Provide sealable tamperproof cover over

adjustment controls.




4. Mounting: Bolt-in or drawout as indicated.

5. Terminal Lugs: Suitable for quantity of wire or bus to be attached; mechanical type

for copper wire, compression type for aluminum wire, and bolted for bus

connection.

C. Ratings:

1. Trip: As scheduled.

2. Frame: Provide as scheduled as minimum requirement.

3. Sensor-Clip shall match frame size.

4. AIC: Provide as scheduled as minimum requirement.

D. Special Features: Interchangeable trip settings, shunt trip, undervoltage trip, bell alarm,

auxiliary switch, motor operator, etc., as shown on Drawings.

1. Molded case switch shall have manual only tripping mechanism.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide breaker accessories for general operation and maintenance of specified breakers.

Include items listed below and items recommended by manufacturer:

1. Test kit for solid state breaker.

2. Special adjustment tools.

B. Provide quantities of circuit protective accessories in locations necessary for effective

general operation.

C. Provide breaker handle clips in on position at all breakers serving fire alarm equipment.

Include equipment identification label "Fire Alarm System" at breaker per Division 26

Section "Electrical Identification."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install circuit protective devices in assemblies at or above the minimum interrupting

rating and frame size shown on Drawings. Circuit breaker frame size shall be the largest

ampere rating if not specified in the rating schedules.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls."

C. Add new circuit protectives to existing assemblies when shown on Drawings. Rearrange

existing circuit protective and provide bus extensions, hardware, enclosure modifications,

etc., to accomplish the installations. Modify assemblies directories or add nameplates to

match existing.

D. Install distribution equipment circuit protective devices at factory.

E. Leave all spare devices in the off position.

F. Coordinate factory or field installation of key interlocks and associated sequence of

operation nameplate per assembly per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."




3.2 MOLDED CASE BREAKER APPLICATIONS

A. Provide solid-state molded case circuit breakers for frame sizes above 150 amperes.

1. Provide enhanced selective coordination using solid-state molded circuit breakers

for frame sizes 60 amperes and above as shown on Drawing.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components in accordance with Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between OCPDs and control/indication devices as specified in Division 26

Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for hard wired

connections.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Check connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness. Tighten

field-connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's

torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with

tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as

indicated, as required by NEC, and per Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to

assure permanent and effective grounding.


A. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to tested

components indicating test results, date, and responsible organization and person.

B. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one week's

advance notification.

C. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following

preparations for independent tests:

1. Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting

supply, feeder, and control circuits.

2. Make continuity tests of circuits.

3. Provide set of Contract Documents to test personnel. Include full updating on final

system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those

indicated in original Contract Documents.

4. Provide manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of OCPDs to test

personnel.




D. Test and Inspections:


"Electrical Inspections and Testing", “Circuit Breakers, Air Insulated Case/Molded

Case", "Ground-Fault Protection System", "System Functional Tests" and

“Thermographic Survey" requirements including optional requirements and the

following additional requirements:

a. Limit breaker tests to 400 amps and above or with solid-state trips.

b. Follow-up 12 month thermographic survey shall not be required.

c. Check key and other interlock and safety devices for operation and sequence.

Make closing attempts on locked-open and opening attempts on locked-

closed devices including moveable barriers and shutters.

d. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service representatives

to demonstrate OCPDs and train Owner's maintenance personnel.

B. Conduct a minimum of one half day of training in operation and maintenance as specified

under "Instructions to Owner Employees" in the "Project Closeout" Section of these

Specifications. Include both classroom training and hands-on equipment operation and

maintenance procedures.

C. Schedule training with at least seven (7) days' advance notification.







PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY


COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative, material, and procedural requirements for

Division 28 installations to expand the requirements specified in Division 01.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Abbreviations and Acronyms:

1. AHJ - Authority Having Jurisdiction.

2. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.

3. BICSI - Building Industry Consulting Service International.

4. Broadband - Wide bandwidth equipment or systems that can carry signals

occupying in the frequency range of 54 to 1002 MHz.

5. Cat – Category; based on numerical value of structured cabling performance.

6. CAT 5E - Category 5e performance as defined by ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

7. CAT 6 - Category 6 performance as defined by ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1.

8. CAT 6A - Augmented Category 6 performance as defined by ANSI/TIA/EIA

568-B.2-10.

9. EIA - Electronics Industry Alliance.

10. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association.

11. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

12. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association.

B. Definitions:

1. In addition to those Definitions listed in Division 01, the following list of terms

shall be defined as follows:

a. Connect: To install required patch cords, equipment cords, cross-connect

wire, etc. to complete an electrical or optical circuit.

b. Cabling: A combination of cables, wire, cords, and connecting hardware e.g.,

cables, conductor terminations, connectors, outlets, patch panels, blocks, and

labeling.

c. Identifier: A unique code assigned to an element of the telecommunications

infrastructure that links it to its corresponding record.

d. Open Cabling: Cabling run horizontally within a pathway supported by cable

tray, J-hooks, D-hooks, etc. that is installed above an accessible ceiling. This

installed cabling is considered concealed.

e. Exposed Cabling: Cabling that is not concealed by an accessible pathway,

conduit, etc. Cabling installed open below an exposed structure.

f. Concealed Cabling: Cabling rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish

of the building.

g. System Cabling: Low voltage signal and control cabling. System cabling is

designated by the manufacturer for a particular system in each specification

section.




1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Substitutions:

1. The materials, products, and equipment described in the Bidding Documents

establish a standard of required functions, dimensions, appearance, and quality to

be met by any proposed substitution.

2. Refer to Division 01 for instructions on substitutions.

B. Permit and Inspections:

1. Permits: Obtain and pay for all permits, bonds, licenses, tap-in fees, etc., required

by the City, State, or other Authority Having Jurisdiction over the work, as a part

of the work of the affected sections.

2. Inspections: Arrange and pay for all inspections required by the above when they

become due as part of the work of the sections affected. Conceal no work until

approved by these governing authorities. Coordinate inspection period with the

AHJ and Engineer. Present the Engineer with properly signed certificate of final

inspection.

C. Coordination:

1. Coordinate all programming components, device designations, and labels to match

the final room numbers of the completed project. The room numbers on the

Drawings may not be the final room numbers and may be finalized after system

components are installed.

2. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of Division 28 equipment:

a. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that

reduce headroom are indicated.

b. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum

interference to other installations.

c. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.

d. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and pathways will be

clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

3. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-

place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are

constructed.

4. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind

finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in

Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

a. Submit coordination drawings indicating proposed access door locations for

review per Division 28 Section "Common Work Results for Electronic Safety

and Security."

b. Ensure access doors are sized to permit complete access for any concealed

and/or inaccessible junction boxes, control and monitoring devices, elevator

shaft and other items of equipment requiring access, maintenance, and/or

operation.

1) Assure access to devices per codes and local Authorities Having

Jurisdiction.




5. Wiring and controls associated with equipment shall be furnished, installed, and

wired in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable

standards and codes. Provide installation instructions, locating dimensions and

wiring diagrams for the other trades. Supervise the installation and start-up and test

the equipment unless otherwise specified.

6. Equipment Furnished by Other Divisions: Equipment specified in other divisions

and requiring communication and control connectivity shall be erected, aligned,

leveled, and prepared for operation. Provide required controls and accessories

along with installation instructions, diagrams, dimensions and supervision of

installation and start-up. Provide the required terminations, accessories and

programming furnished under the specifications for the other divisions. Install

those controls and accessories not located in the provided equipment. Provide

additional electrical controls, accessories, fittings and devices not specified under

the equipment but required for a finished, operating job. Make final electrical

connections. Participate in the start-up and test services.


A. General: Provide required submittals in accordance with Division 01 "Submittal

Procedures."

B. Definitions:

1. Submittals: A written or graphical expression of the Contractor’s interpretation of

requirements in the Contract Documents to show how the Contractor intends to

fulfill those requirements and identifying deviations from contract.

2. Action Submittals: Required submittal which Engineer reviews and approves or

takes other appropriate action to communicate to the Contractor the status if the

submittal and subsequent action are required.

3. Other (Information, Closeout, and Maintenance and Material) Submittals:

Required submittals which Engineer reviews and may elect to respond. If rejected

by Engineer for not complying with requirements, resubmittal or other action may

be required on the part of the Contractor.

4. Layout Drawings: Drawings assembled by the Contractor consisting of to-scale

architectural floor plans with room numbers and elevations of the actual facility

being constructed or renovated with equipment symbols utilized to represent the

size, shape, and location of equipment.

C. Failure to Submit:

1. Contractor’s failure to provide submittals does not alleviate the responsibility to

provide the requirements in the Contract Documents as interpreted by the Engineer.

Correct non-compliant items.

D. Applicable Information:

1. All information not applicable to the project shall be crossed out in the submittal.

All applicable accessories, option, etc. shall be clearly indicated. Failure to comply

shall be grounds for the submittal to be rejected.





A. Submit action submittals in groups by specification number. For example, all structured

cabling equipment identified within that section number, including cabling, components,

faceplates and accessories shall be submitted simultaneously in one package.

1. Equipment submitted from multiple sections under a single cover will not be

reviewed.

B. Provide a complete submittal list with dates for submission of documentation to Engineer.

Identify any submittals requiring priority processing and review based on equipment lead

times or fast track construction. Ensure submittals that contain information that

transcends section numbers are submitted simultaneously so that review is not delayed

waiting for concurring information. Submit in hard copy and Microsoft Excel format.

C. Each system submittal shall contain the following minimum information in addition to

the information requested in the individual section:

1. Section number and equipment/device type in a bound submission.

2. Table of Contents identifying equipment lists with numbered pages identifying

equipment/ device locations within submittal.

3. System Scope of Work narrative.

4. Equipment/device quantities.

5. Equipment/device product information sheets with submission designated,

installation information, color/finish options, etc.

6. Program information sheets.

7. Coordination requirements with all trades.

8. Program layout diagrams, riser diagrams, wiring diagrams, rack elevations, seismic

requirements, etc. Utilize architectural, electrical, and communication symbology

and room numbers to be consistent with Owner's standards.

9. Training outline.

10. Sample testing reports.

11. Deviations from specifications, if any, highlighted with specific explanation and

identification requiring Architect/Engineer specific approval.

12. Identify any products that will no longer be available or will be discontinued by the

manufacturer prior to the completion of the warranty period.

13. Estimated equipment heat loads and power requirements. List and tabulate

equipment specifically required in data rooms. Coordinate with Division 27

equipment as applicable.

14. Submit qualifications based on quality assurance requirements.

15. Provide secondary submittal for systems requiring programming and Owner input,

review, and approval after programming meeting, sequence of operations review,

etc. Provide all information in spreadsheet format in electronic and hardcopy.

16. Manufacturer required information for base and extended warranties including

submission requirements and timeframes.

17. Provide copies of manufacturer's warranty information to Owner that is submitted

directly to manufacturer.

18. Identify any additional power requirements, communications connections or

alterations needed to support the proposed equipment.




D. Submit the following action submittals as qualified in associated Division 28 Sections:

1. Fire Alarm Systems.

E. Action submittals submitted for other than those listed above or not specifically required

in the appropriate Specification Section will not be reviewed or returned.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Prepare and submit Operation and Maintenance manuals in accordance with

Division 01 Section "Project Closeout." In addition to the requirements specified

in Division 01, include specific Division 28 Section requirements, and the

following information for equipment items:

a. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature

and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

2. The minimum information that shall be furnished in the maintenance manual shall

include the following:

a. Title, table of contents, tabbed sections for each installed system in an

organized 3-ring binder labeled with the project name and date.

b. Emergency and warranty contact names and numbers for the contractor and

vendor of each installed system.

c. Final submittal copy with catalog cut sheets for every item for which a

submittal was provided.

d. Contract modifications and actual equipment and materials installed.

e. Model numbers and serial numbers for all provided equipment.

f. Provide a digital color photo (8-1/2 x 11 minimum) and .TIFF file on DVD-

ROM of the following areas:

1) Interiors of manholes.

g. On-hand spare parts list and complete parts list for each communication

system.

h. Approved special construction details that differ from the details shown on

Drawings.

i. Testing and troubleshooting procedures unique to special systems. For

example:

1) Water tightness tests for manholes and handholes.

j. Test reports; sign off and acceptance of manufacturer, vendor, etc.

k. Inspection reports.

l. Warranty information for all systems including individual manufacturer

product warranties and system extended manufacturer warranty certificate

where applicable.

m. Provide an additional engraved spare key for each system with

documentation.




n. Required software programming information.

1) Provide system programming design manual with Owner sign-off and

associated meeting minutes.

2) Provide software documentation and licensing information.

o. Training documentation and DVDs.

3. Drawings:

a. Major cabling systems, size and location, for both interior and exterior;

locations of control devices and distribution boxes.

b. Major equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from

prominent building lines.

c. In slab conduit routings.


A. Extra Material:

1. Provide four (4) keys for every different piece of equipment which is equipped with

a lock.

a. Coordinate similar locks/keys for like equipment. Verify with Owner.

b. Stamp keys with system name.

2. Provide all other loose equipment specified/supplied for use with all systems.


A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements,"

Source Limitations.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and


C. Obtain similar products through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Manufacturers of equipment shall be firms regularly engaged in manufacturing factory

fabricated systems and equipment whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar

service for not less than three (3) years.

E. All equipment shall be provided by an authorized dealer or distributor of the manufacturer

to ensure authentic product and warranty will be provided. Provide all necessary

documentation at time of delivery.

F. Provide equipment as required by and/or listed in the specifications for a complete and

operational system.


A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Deliver products to the project site properly identified with names, model numbers, types,

grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

C. Provide all documentation identifying authorized distribution of the products.




1.10 WARRANTY

A. All equipment, software, services, and programming shall be covered by a one (1) year

parts and labor warranty from date of acceptance. Acceptance will be provided in writing

by Engineer after system is installed, programmed, and tested to the satisfaction of the

Owner.

B. All manufacturer product warranties shall be transferable to the Owner upon Substantial

Completion of the project for the full term of the warranty.

C. All warranties shall be standard manufacturer agreements. "Special" project warranties

are not acceptable.

D. For all existing systems being expanded or extended, provide an extension of the current

maintenance agreement or warranty on all existing components of that system to ensure

proper operation and maintenance of that equipment through the completion of the new

warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Work and materials shall conform to and be executed, inspected and tested in accordance

with the latest edition of the California Electric Code and with the governing rules and

regulations of federal, state and local governmental agencies. References to CEC within

the Division 28 Sections shall be considered synonymous to this electrical code.

B. Other codes and standards which will apply to this installation include the current editions

of:

1. ANSI C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.

2. NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee

Workspaces.

3. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

C. Where governing codes indicate the Drawings and Specifications do not comply with the

minimum requirements of applicable codes, be responsible for either notifying the

Architect in writing during the bidding period of the revisions required to meet code

requirements, or providing an installation which will comply with the code requirements.

D. U.L. Listing:

1. All equipment shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories (U.L.), or other approved

agency, listing label. Acceptable alternates include:

a. Intertek Testing Service NA, Inc. (ITSNA) (formerly ETL).

b. Wherein an item of equipment is specified to be U.L. listed, the entire

assembly shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Any

modifications to suit the intent of the Specifications shall be performed in

accordance with the National Electrical Code and listed by U.L.




2. Definitions:

a. Listed: Equipment or materials included in a list published by an

organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned

with product evaluation, that maintain periodic inspection of production of

listed equipment or materials, and whose listing states either that the

equipment or material meets appropriate designated standards or has been

tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner.

b. Labeled: Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol

or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the authority

having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation that maintains

periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or materials and by

whose labeling the manufacturer indicated compliance with appropriate

standards or performance in a specified manner.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Products and the terms materials, equipment, devices, components, assemblies and

systems are considered synonymous.

B. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of

the manufacturer. Seconds, rejects, or damaged materials will be rejected.

C. The equipment to be provided under these Specifications shall be essentially the standard

commercial grade product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same

class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer.

D. The listing of a manufacturer for certain equipment and systems does not indicate

acceptance of a standard or catalogued item of equipment. All equipment and systems

shall conform to the Specifications and the requirements listed.

E. All equipment and materials specified shall be products currently in production.

1. If the specified item is not available or is discontinued, a similar product with the

same features and functionality shall be provided from the same manufacturer in

the newer/ upgraded series of product.

a. Provide information as to the anticipated availability of the provided products

at the time of submission and installation. No products shall be provided that

will be discontinued within the warranty period of the system.

2. Equipment and/or devices discovered to be discontinued after submission approval

will not be accepted and will require resubmittal for an approved replacement.

F. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicated maximum dimensions for

products including clearances between products and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum product dimensions.

1. Assembly Selection: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional

requirements of assembly equipment. Equipment having equal performance

characteristics and complying with indicated maximum dimensions and profiles

may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept intended

performance, or code/future extension provision clearances. The burden of proof

of equality is on the proposer a minimum of 10 days prior to bid.




2.3 SOFTWARE PROTECTION

A. All software supplied with new equipment shall be warranted against leap year program

disruption or failure. Refer to Division 01 Section "Warranties and Supplementary

Conditions for Requirements."

B. All software supplied with new equipment shall be warranted against Daylight Savings

Time program disruption or failure. Refer to Division 01 Section "Warranties and

Supplementary Conditions for Requirements."

C. All software shall be the most current release of the latest available software of the

equipment provided.

1. BETA software versions will not be accepted.

2.4 LABELS

A. Per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION OF FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Verification of Conditions:

1. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed. Verify that

site conditions are satisfactory for installation of cable and components.

2. Ensure components and conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's

requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Pre-Installation Testing:

1. Identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

C. Evaluation and Assessment:

1. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.

2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General:

1. Review device locations, telecommunication room locations, routings, trunk risers,

pathways, details, and special features.

2. Meet with the Owner's telecommunications representatives prior to each of the

following installation tasks:

a. Mounting cabinets and equipment grounds.

b. Telecommunications room raceway installations.

c. Pulling cable.

d. Terminating cable.

e. Labeling of cable and equipment.

f. Testing cable.

g. As-built documentation completion.




B. Installation Guidelines:

1. Install systems and components in accordance with equipment manufacturer's

written instructions, in compliance with National Electrical Code, and with

recognized industry practices, to ensure that each system complies with

requirements and serves intended purposes.

2. Comply with ANSI/NECA 1, Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical

Contracting.

3. Comply with ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568, Standard for Installing Commercial

Building Telecommunications Cabling.

C. Protection of In-Place Conditions:

1. Handle components to be re-used carefully to avoid breakage, dents, scoring

finishes, and impacts.

2. Take precautions to protect any surfaces already in-place before continuing with

work.

3. Protect everything in existing space from dust and debris in an acceptable manner.

4. Notify Engineer, in writing, of any damage to surrounding areas or surfaces already

in place.

5. Keep hands clean when handling ceiling tiles to avoid fingerprints and smudges on

the finished installation. Use clean cotton gloves for maximum protection. Ceiling

tiles should be handled carefully to protect the face and edges of the tile from

damage.

6. Old ceiling tiles can remain in the grid system by being moved to one side and then

replaced. Avoid scratching or jamming the tiles.

7. Support all existing cabling that is not supported above the ceiling.

D. Rough-In Preparations:

1. General:

a. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the

requirements and dimensions of the actual equipment to be installed and

connected.

b. The Architect shall control the placement of wall and ceiling mounted

communications systems devices and outlets. The intent is to aesthetically

locate equipment/outlets by providing rough-in hardware, boxes and/or

mounting plates, as required, when stud or furring may not be readily

available for direct mounting. When drawing details or elevations are not

available, consult with Architect's representative for actual placement.

c. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are

not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide

maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

d. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 28 for rough-in

requirements.




2. Equipment:

a. Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components of equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a

way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with

other items in the vicinity.

b. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items

and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

3. Raceways and Cabling:

a. Coordinate with system maximum cable lengths and address Engineer with

conflicts.

b. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during

progress of construction to allow for communications systems installations.

c. Coordinate cabling installation requirements with installation of all

pathways, raceways, outlet boxes, etc. as listed in Division 26 Section

"Conduit Rough-In Systems."

d. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

E. Protection of Equipment:

1. Protect all equipment and materials from the elements, dirt and other damage from

the time it is removed from the point of storage until final acceptance.

F. Installation Auxiliary Equipment:

1. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection and

delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall

be removed from the premises when no longer required.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Interface with Other Work:

1. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of communications materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large

equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

2. Coordinate communications systems, equipment, and materials installation with

other building components. Be responsible for any changes in openings and

locations necessitated by the equipment installed.

3. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

B. Systems Integration:

1. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical and

telecommunications systems, materials, and equipment.

C. General:

1. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and

perpendicular to other building systems and components.

2. When several devices are wall mounted in the same area, care shall be taken to

align them horizontally and vertically.




3. When field cutting hangers or supports with corrosion protection, apply approved

sealant to restore corrosion protection.

4. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right of way priority to systems

required to be installed at a specified slope.

5. All screws, bolts, nuts, clamps, fittings, or other fastening devices shall be tightened

in accordance with manufacturer instructions.

6. Plaster debris and residue shall be thoroughly cleaned and vacuumed from boxes

before cables are terminated.

D. Equipment:

1. Install communications systems equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and

repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect

equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other

installations.

2. Match room numbers for labels, programming, etc. with existing/final room

numbers approved by the Owner’s representative upon completion of this project.

The room numbers on the Drawings are not necessarily the actual room numbers.

3. Provide cabinets and associated raceway/pathway installations including special

wire management auxiliaries.

4. Provide all support devices to mount supplied and installed equipment at the

appropriate device height. Conceal furring as required.

5. Install equipment properly to avoid causing mechanical stresses, twisting or

misalignment of equipment being exerted by clamps, supports, and cabling.

6. Coordinate branch circuit power connection to equipment as required to support the

system being installed. Indicate additional power requirements on wiring diagrams

at submittal stage for approval by Engineer.

7. Remove all dirt, dust, and construction debris from all system equipment. Touch-

up scratched and marred surfaces to match original finishes to the satisfaction of

the Owner and Engineer.

E. Raceways and Cabling:

1. Routing:

a. Pull all cabling to rack or equipment backboard in telecommunications room

from outlet boxes shown on Drawings.

b. Conceal all cabling in the facility except where specifically indicated

otherwise. Surface raceway allowed only where specifically shown on

Drawings or approved by Engineer.

c. Install horizontal cabling open in accessible ceiling spaces. Install each

cabling system in separate pathway from other cabling systems.

d. Install all cabling parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

e. Install cabling tight to building steel. Avoid locating cabling within 12 inches

of lay-in ceilings or access panels.

f. Traverse common system cables along the same pathway. Multiple runs of

cabling terminated at roughly the same geographic area shall traverse the

same path whenever possible.

g. Verify all conduits are reamed and bushed prior to pulling cable. Do not pull

cable if field manufactured bends reduce the recommended bending radius.




h. Route cabling to avoid elevator shafts, elevator equipment rooms or any areas

that contain or store hazardous materials.

i. Avoid routing cabling in areas subject to excessive environmental conditions.

1) Refer to Division 26 Section "Conduit Rough-In Systems" for

environmental requirements.

2. Supports:

a. Coordinate cabling installation such that it is not supported from new or

existing conduits, piping, ductwork, etc. Cabling shall not lie directly on

ceiling or be supported by ceiling tie-wires.

b. Support vertically routed cabling at each floor. Attach supports such as wire

mesh grips as recommended by manufacturer and required by local codes.

c. Do not support cables by their terminals.

3. Damage Prevention:

a. Provide caution during installation so as to not stress or provide excessive

tension on the cable.

1) Pulling tension shall not exceed 25 lbs. on a single cable or bundle.

2) Avoid unnecessary bends and do not exceed a 90 degree bend for any

cable.

3) Do not exceed manufactures bend radius requirements.

b. Replace entirely any cable jacket that is cut or scored.

c. Do not employ pulling lubricants as they can degrade cable performance.

4. Terminations:

a. Terminate all horizontal and backbone cabling at each cable end as indicated.

b. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance

with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for

equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not

indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques

specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Provide the prime painting of all equipment and materials furnished under Division 27

Specifications, unless specifically stated otherwise. In general, all equipment except

raceways and galvanized boxes that are not provided with a factory-applied final finish

shall be delivered to the job site with a shop-applied prime coat of paint. Refer to Division

09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

1. Provide touch-up painting services for any equipment as required and approved by

the Engineer.

2. Replace any damaged equipment that cannot be returned to a "Like New"

condition/finish.




3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 01 Section "Cutting

and Patching." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, the following

requirements apply:

1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of equipment and materials required to:

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.

b. Remove and replace defective Work.

c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents.

d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.

e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.

f. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to

provide for Architect observation of concealed Work.

2. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected equipment, components, and materials

as indicated, including but not limited to, removal of electrical items indicated to

be removed and items made obsolete by the new Work.

3. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or

scheduled to be removed.

4. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the

spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

5. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect

adjacent installations.

6. Painting:

a. Refer to Division 01 Section "Definitions and Standards" for definition of


b. Provide paint note to renovation projects where painting is covered by

Division 01.

c. Paint to match existing surfaces if painting is not provided by Division 01 or

as indicated.

d. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials

specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers'



e. Refer to Division 01 Section "Definitions and Standards" for definition of


3.6 LABELING

A. Labels shall be applied by the installer at a visible location on all end-user device

faceplates per Owner requirements and verbiage shall clearly identify device, use,

destination, and location per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."

1. Provide engraved faceplates for devices without a designated label location or

means of protecting/securing the label.

a. Colors shall be black on stainless steel faceplates or white on black

faceplates.




2. Standard manufacturer device plates shall provide engraved supplementary

information as noted above.

B. Engrave label all keys provided to the Owner for system cabinets and devices.

1. Label with system name as required by the Owner.

3.7 LICENSES

A. Provide the necessary licenses for all devices and equipment to operate for the life of the

product.

1. Equipment/devices shall not require licenses to operate with the current or any

updated/ upgraded software release or version.


A. Do not cover up or hide from view any communications systems equipment before it has

been examined and approved. Any unsatisfactory work or materials shall be removed

and corrected immediately.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Submit a detailed test plan for all equipment and cabling prior to start of testing.

Test plan shall provide for Owner to witness test.

a. The following will be witnessed by the Owner:

1) As-Built Drawings will be verified with actual installation.

2) Workmanship of installation of equipment.

3) All systems are fully programmed and functional, including

interconnections with other systems.

b. Any electrical equipment in vicinity of cabling or devices shall be on and

operational during testing, including luminaires, elevators, HVAC units, and

wireless devices.

C. Manufacturer's Services:

1. Where supervision by a manufacturer is specified, follow all instructions,

recommended manufacturer and specified field tests, and other recommendations

of the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall supervise the installation, connection,

start-up, testing, adjustment, instruction of the Owner, and final tests of such

equipment or system. Where two or more manufacturer's equipment are

interrelated, take responsibility to coordinate their work and provide supervision.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Complete all system programming to the satisfaction of the Owner. If after preliminary

use of the system or training, the increased understanding of the systems features and

capabilities necessitate programming or set-up adjustments, perform these programming

updates at no additional cost.




B. Provide software programming changes to match Owner’s final room number

designations. The room numbers shown on the Drawings are not necessarily the final

room numbers and may be subject to change by the Owner.

C. Provide on-site assistance in reprogramming software based system to suit actual

occupied conditions during the warranty period. Provide up to three (3) 8 hour visits to

the site for this purpose.

3.10 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Upon completion of the work, notify the Architect in writing that each entire system

installation has been examined, inspected, tested, calibrated, or adjusted as specified and

that it is ready for final inspection. Work to be connected prior to final inspection and

also to include all of the work specified for "Manufacturers Services." Include

documentation of specified testing and inspection.

B. Training:

1. Have the manufacturer instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance

techniques of all equipment, systems, etc., at the time of completion of all work.

2. Provide a training outline for distribution to the Owner for all required training and

the necessary personnel required for operation, maintenance, and service

(warranty) notification. Include instructors' qualifications.

a. Training shall be provided in session increments of at maximum eight (8)

hours. Minimum of two (2) hours.

b. Coordinate all training to best service participants based on job description.

c. Provide several sessions as required to meet participants' schedules, etc.

Coordinate dates and times with Owner's representative three (3) months

prior to start of training.

d. Training shall be completed at the Owner's facility and all necessary devices,

equipment, and training aids shall be provided. Training aids shall include

approved maintenance manual.

e. Provide a refresher training session of at minimum two (2) hours 30 days

after original training has been completed.

3. Provide PowerPoint presentation and handouts for all training. Class sizes shall be

appropriate for the system to allow hands-on instruction.

4. Record each training session and provide an edited DVD of each training session

to be turned over to the Owner.

5. Off-Site Training:

a. If required by the Specification section, provide factory training for

designated Owner personnel at the manufacturer’s training facility.

b. Include all associated costs including transportation, lodging, meals, etc.




C. Software Turnover:

1. All software for system operation including source code for proper operation,

reconfiguring, and/or reworking of systems in future implementations shall be

provided to the Owner by the manufacturer and/or vendor for the Owner’s future

use.

a. This shall include any license agreements, associated costs, and fees for

turnover of this information.

b. The provided programming and source code shall become the intellectual

property of the Owner.

c. Supply on CD-ROM and format required by equipment for re-installation and

re-programming.






WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL RESCUE ASSISTANCE TWO-WAY PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 - AUDIO/VISUAL 282616 - 1

SECTION 282616 - RESCUE ASSISTANCE TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM – AUDIO VISUAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Rescue Assistance Two-Way Communication System shall provide audio and visual communications from "Areas of Rescue Assistance" for disabled persons in accordance with the "The American Disabilities Act."

1. Complete system installation includes Master Annunciator Panel, Remote Annunciator Panel(s), Remote Call-In Stations, Power supplies, cabling, conduit, etc.

B. Work of this Section includes raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, as specified in applicable Division 26 sections, which are used in conjunction with installation of Rescue Assistance System.

C. Perform a complete functional test of the system upon completion of the system.

D. Requirements of the following Division 26 Sections apply to this Section.

1. Section "Common Work Results for Electrical." 2. Section "Raceways." 3. Section "Electrical Identification."

1.3 PRODUCTS FURNISHED

A. This Section includes Area of Rescue Assistance Two-way Audio-Visual Communications System, cabling, conduit and all necessary components for a complete, installed operational system.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Americans with Disabilities Act; Title III – Section 4.3 Provisions for a Two-way, Audio-Visual Communications System.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical."


A. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide manufacturer’s literature to include all information necessary to confirm that the proposed system is in complete compliance with the Specifications.

a. All items of equipment must be new, in current production, currently eligible for warranty and maintenance coverage and have guaranteed availability for a minimum of five (5) years from the delivery date.

2. Submit the following:

a. Equipment Information:


1) Complete materials list indicating manufacturer, part numbers, and quantities with Table of Contents indicating page number for quick reference. All equipment shall be specific to this Section only unless required for integration.

2) Manufacturer’s specifications and descriptive literature. 3) Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.

b. Provide a list with references of at least three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems installed within the last two (2) years.

c. Provide certification with data substantiating that products comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. Furnish UL File number with product data as submitted.

3. Submit scaled diagrams indicating equipment layout, dimensions, and clearances. Include layout of equipment in relation to room size and other existing and new system equipment in that room. Specifically, include the following spaces:

a. Fire Command Center. b. Vestibule. c. Stairwells.

4. Submit scaled system layout drawings using architectural floor plans for Area of Rescue Assistance equipment indicating cable types, power supplies, electrical connections, etc., as designed for this Project.

a. Include lengths of all cables (to include gage requirements). b. Provide building room numbers and diagrams specific to this Project. c. Differentiate between portions of equipment that are factory/vendor assembled and

that which are field-installed.

5. Wiring Diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. Identify terminal numbers and wiring color codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.

6. Labeling: Engrave label device faceplates. Provide method and naming convention. 7. Warranty and service agreement.


A. Certificates:

1. Certification signed by officer of installation company attesting that proposed system complies with specification requirements.

2. For multiple firms, an officer from each firm must sign.

B. Qualifications:

1. Provide documentation of certification of manufacturer, supplier, installers, and instructors to be utilized on this Project as indicated in "Quality Assurance" Article.


A. Equipment Drawings:

1. Provide a revised set of system wiring diagrams upon the completion of the installation for subsequent testing of the system to show actual cable routing, connections with other systems, cable lengths values of all equipment as installed, and actual signal values as tested.

2. Utilize architectural floor plans for system layout.

B. Record Documentation: Record drawing indicating locations of all system components.

C. Equipment Manuals:

1. Approved copy of system submittal.


a. Provide a listing of individual product/device/equipment warranties provided from the manufacturer with expiration dates identified.

b. Provide a complete listing of devices, installed locations with product serial numbers for product tracking.

c. Provide all equipment and device licensing information equal to the lifetime of the product with the current system integration.

d. Provide written documentation that the system was installed and tested by qualified technicians and meets the specifications. Identify completion date including Owner approval.

2. Provide a complete set of equipment cut sheets, parts list, including maintenance criteria, "troubleshooting" guide, distributor information, and service information for all equipment provided.

3. Provide a complete set of instruction manuals; including complete written programming instructions, programming documentation, and system set-up documentation.

4. Provide all test results performed. Include manufacturer's certifications that installed system complies with specification requirements.

D. Field Testing Data:

1. Test report indicating compliance with performance requirements for signal level, system response and signal-to-noise ratio.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include the following in emergency, and Operation and Maintenance manuals.

1. Three (3) final corrected copies of catalog data and shop drawings, critical spare parts lists, and manufacturer's operation and maintenance data applicable for the equipment furnished.

2. Instructions for periodic testing. 3. Warranty information.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:

1. Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of professional quality Area of Rescue Assistance systems, components and accessories, of types, capacities, and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than two (2) years.

2. Provided equipment shall have a guaranteed availability for a minimum of five (5) years from the delivery date through current distribution channels.

B. Supplier's Qualifications:

1. Engage an experienced product supplier who is a factory-authorized sales and service representative regularly engaged in the design and installation of such systems to oversee the installation, troubleshoot, and make final connections at headend equipment.

2. Supplier shall have represented the product and components being installed for a minimum of two (2) years.

C. Installer Qualifications:

1. Firms with at least five (5) years of successful installation experience with projects installing such systems equipment similar to that required for this project.

2. Refer to Division 01 Section "Definitions and Standards" for definition of experienced Installer. Upon request submit evidence of such qualifications to the Architect/Engineer.

D. Instructor’s Qualifications:


1. Submit data of the instructor's experience and certified qualifications. Provide document-tation that the instructor, who will train operating and maintenance personnel, has received a minimum of 24 hours of training from a recognized technical organization related to this work, and two (2) years' experience in the installation of the type of equipment specified.

E. Codes and Standards:

1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and NEC 800 Series articles as applicable to installation.

2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards. 3. The American Disabilities Act.


A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:

1. Deliver components properly packaged in factory fabricated containers.

B. Storage and Handling Requirements:

1. Store components in original cartons. 2. Material shall be stored in a secure area with a clean dry space protected from the effects

of the weather and away from open fires or sources of heat. 3. Material shall be stored in an area away from construction traffic where construction

equipment, falling or flying objects or other materials will not contact the components. 4. Material shall be stored in an area where chemicals, paint, or petroleum products will not

be spilled or sprayed on them. 5. If materials are relocated, an inspection shall be made. 6. Handle equipment and components carefully to avoid breakages, impacts, denting, and

scoring finishes. Do not install damaged equipment; replace and return damaged units to equipment manufacturer.

C. Packaging Waste Management:

1. Dispose of all packing materials and include cost of packing materials disposal and handling as part of the Base Bid.

1.11 LICENSES

A. Provide all licenses for all equipment to operate for the lifetime of the installed equipment and system.

1. Licenses shall not expire for the equipment or devices purchased and installed and shall not be required for extending maintenance or operation of the system.

2. Licenses shall cover software and hardware.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer Warranty:

1. All components shall be covered by a one (1) year warranty from date of acceptance or substantial use.

B. Special Warranties: Manufacturer specific product/equipment warranties beyond that listed as system operation.

1.13 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation Rescue Assistance Two-Way Communication System.


B. Sequence system installation work with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling system during remainder of construction period.

1.14 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each system component; including "troubleshooting" maintenance guide. Include that data, product data, and shop drawings in a maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

1.15 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish, install, and place into operation a vandal-resistant Rescue Assistance System for this building as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. A common annunciator (multi-channel intercom system with duplex communications) shall be provided at the main building entrance where shown on the Drawings to indicate light and tone signals from multiple remote call stations located throughout the facility.

1. When the remote call station switch is activated, a red LED button illuminates and a one shot tone sounds at the Master Annunciator, Remote Annunciator, and Call Station.

2. When the alarm signal is acknowledged, the remote call station is signaled with a flashing light and tone.

3. Voice communication with the remote call can then be initiated from the annunciator. 4. Dial-Out access to a public telephone system shall be provided when specified.

C. Coordinate system to operate in two (2) configuration modes.

1. System shall always be on. 2. System shall operate only when the fire alarm is initiated. (Confirm allowance with local

codes).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESCUE ASSISTANCE TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A. This system shall consist of multiple remote call stations which share a common annunciator panel and remote annunciator.

B. Master Annunciator Panel: The master annunciator panel shall have a capacity for 2 zones, mounted at the Main Fire Department Entrance to the building (refer to Drawings). Verify location with the Local Fire Department and the Architect prior to installation.

1. The master station shall have features that make it possible for the operator to acknowledge an emergency call. Pressing an individual area "Talk" button at the master shall illuminate a "Help Coming" LED at the area station and shut off the associated alarm (sonalert). The previously illuminated "Help Requested" light shall be extinguished and an open voice line established between master and area station. Conversation at the area station shall be "hands-free" (requiring the use of no controls or switches once the "Push for Help" button has been activated).

2. An indicator shall be provided on the control panel for each of the following functions: system power on, system trouble light, and each rescue area.

a. With the system in standby mode, two (2) illuminated LEDs shall indicate the system is operating properly.

3. The master station shall have a common audible alarm and separate visual indicators for each Area of Rescue Assistance Station to signal "Help Requested."

4. The control panel is to have a separate trouble LED for each Area Station to indicate if there is a break or short in the wires.


5. An alternate action switch with internal LED indicator shall be included for each zone. A yellow LED light on the zone switch shall illuminate and the alarm shall emit a repeating sound if the supervised wiring is faulty.

6. An audible alarm shall be mounted on the Annunciator Panel which will emit a minimum sound level of 90 dB at 30 cm when a remote station calls. Depressing the zone switch will answer a zone call and open the intercom line to the zone. The push to talk switch will initiate voice communication to the zone.

7. The front panel shall have silk-screened zone designations and operating directions as well as zone designation strips.

8. The power supply shall be a 120 volt emergency battery back-up; Cornell Model B-5243A or P-512243A or approved equal.

9. The option TAK-4200 Telephone Access Kit will place a call to a designated location via a dedicated public telephone line to notify them of the alarm.

10. Enclosure Requirements:

a. Where flush mounted, a 7-1/2 inch x 7-1/2 inch x 3-1/2 inch deep back box shall be provided by the manufacturer.

b. Where surface mounted, a 9inch x 9 inch x 1-5/8 inch enclosure shall be provided by the manufacturer.

11. Master Station shall be a Cornell Model 4200 Series.

C. Remote Annunciator Panel: The remote annunciator panel shall have a capacity for four zones. Flush mounted unit shall be installed in a 5-gang box located in the Main Office. Verify location prior to installation.

1. Cornell Model A4010M/TG, or approved equal.

D. Remote Call Stations:

1. The remote call station shall be vandal resistant and have one momentary switch with LED and loudspeaker.

2. The station shall have hands-free voice communication with the annunciator. 3. Operation instructions, consistent with ADA requirements for legibility in type, size, and

style shall be engraved onto the coverplate for each area station. 4. The station shall be flush wall mounted on a 2-gang stainless steel plate with large push

button. 5. Unit shall be powered from the Master Station with separate power source for the amplifier. 6. Each area station is to have "ultra-bright" LED indicator lights (one red LED for "Help

Requested" and one red LED for "Help Coming") and shall generate an easily audible alarm tone.

7. The push button on each area station shall be heavy duty stainless steel, vandal-resistant, 3 inches in diameter, domed button with LED light. It shall be easy to push and shall not be obscured by other parts of the enclosure. The push button shall have "Push for Help" lettering engraved in a contrasting color.

a. Cornell Communications #4201B/V or approved equal.

E. Braille Instructional Signs:

1. Provide Braille instructional signage with each area station. Sign will be enclosed in a stainless steel frame with tamperproof screws (hardware). Text is to conform with the Americans with Disabilities Act Requirements 4.30.4 for text size and style. Text is to be in Braille and English, and is to read "FOR ASSISTANCE PUSH 3 INCH HELP BUTTON."

a. Mount adjacent to area station 44 inches above finished floor.

F. Cabling Requirements: Each area station shall be interconnected in conduit or surface metal raceway where exposed. Conceal cabling in all new construction. Each area station up to 200 feet from master shall be connected with 5 twisted pair #20 AWG with overall shield. 200-500


feet shall be connected with 5 twisted pair #18 AWG with overall shield. 500-1000 feet shall be connected with 5 twisted pair #16 AWG with overall shield.

1. Verify all cabling requirements with manufacturer's requirements and confirm on submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLERS

A. Provide experienced and qualified technicians to carry out installation of cable and components.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions:

1. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed. Verify that site conditions are satisfactory for installation of cable and components.

2. Ensure components and conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Pre-Installation Testing:

1. Identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

C. Evaluation and Assessment:

1. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Review Drawings for device locations, vestibules, routings, trunk risers, cable trays, details, and special features. Coordinate requirements with appropriate Divisions.

B. Coordinate cabling installation requirements with installation of all pathways, raceways, outlet boxes, etc.

3.4 PROTECTION OF IN-PLACE CONDITIONS

A. Handle components carefully to avoid breakage, dents, scoring finishes, and impacts.

B. Take precautions to protect any surfaces already in place before continuing with work.

C. Protect everything in existing space from dust and debris in an acceptable manner.

D. Notify Architect/Engineer in writing, of any damage to surrounding areas or surfaces already in place prior to beginning work.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF RESCUE ASSISTANCE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A. Install system and components, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, in compliance with National Electrical Code, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that this system complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.

B. Install all cabling for system in EMT conduit.

C. Use extreme care in handling, fishing, and pulling in cable to avoid damage to cable and shielding. Avoid excessive and sharp bends. Ensure manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions are not exceeded.

D. Each raceway must have one spare nylon pull string left in the raceway for future use.

E. All cables to be labeled at both ends with permanent labels.


F. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway.

G. Avoid splices in cable runs.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for system. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

B. Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.

3.7 LABELING

A. Provide a complete labeling convention for this system which shall be coordinated with other systems in the building.

B. Engrave device plates and label all cables and associated termination points. Label all cables and conduits in a neat workmanlike manner.

1. During installation, each cable shall be labeled at either end of the cable to facilitate identification prior to termination.

a. Each cable shall have a different alphanumerical designation indicating floor termination, room termination, and cable termination.

3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Check out final connections to the system shall be made by a factory technician authorized by the manufacturer of the products installed. In addition, factory authorized technicians shall demonstrate operation of the complete system and each major component to the facilities selected staff. Include one (1) 2-hour on-site training session for this purpose.

B. The electrical contractor to test all cables in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations prior to cable terminations and final system energizing.

C. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Touch up scratched and marred surfaces to match original finishes; remove dirt and construction debris.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean all equipment on a day-to-day basis and final cleaning of all communications equipment prior to turning building over to the Owner. All necessary cleaning referred to herein shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative.

B. Equipment:

1. Clean all equipment completely inside and out prior to testing. 2. Furnish cleaning consisting of vacuuming all panels, terminations, enclosures (inside and

out), etc. If equipment is wet or contains moisture, it shall be thoroughly dried before testing.

C. Raceways and Junction Boxes:

1. Blow out and dry all raceways and conduits prior to installation of cabling.

D. Final Cleaning:

1. Clean all devices, device plates, etc. left in "like new" condition to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative prior to Owner occupancy.



A. Site Test (Post Installation Testing): Check out final connections to the system shall be made by a factory technician authorized by the manufacturer of the products installed.

1. Factory authorized technicians shall demonstrate operation of the complete system and each major component to the staff.

2. System field wiring diagrams shall be provided to this subcontractor by the system prior to installation.

B. Inspection: Perform a complete functional test of the system upon completion of the installation and instruct the staff in the operation and maintenance of the system.

C. Provide signed certification from factory technician validating compliance with specifications and manufacturer’s requirements to meet manufacturer’s warranty.

D. Provide Operating Manuals to the Engineer upon completion of system.

E. All equipment shall have one (1) year warranty to be free from manufacturer’s defects.

3.11 CLOSE OUT ACTIVITIES

A. Record device locations with its corresponding label onto project blueprints.

1. Record cable lengths and cable type on a riser diagram supplied with blueprints. 2. Record sizes of pathways, location of cable routings, and system elevations as installed

on the project blueprints.

B. Owner's Instructions:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide approved shop drawings with modifications as required by Engineer's instructions or project progression. Include operating and maintenance instructions, parts inventory listing, purchase source listing, emergency instructions, assembly/disassembly and termination diagrams, and wire administration data as specified herein.

2. Test Reports: Submit results of all tests as specified. 3. Provide any additional information as required per the manufacturer's requirements for

required warranties.

C. Training:

1. Provide on-site training on the use of and operational aspects of the system to the Owner's selected personnel.

a. Provide a minimum of four (4) hours of training to selected personnel for the adjustment, troubleshooting, replacement of components, and preventative maintenance of the system.

b. Schedule training with Owner through Architect with at least seven (7) days advance notice.

c. Record all training to DVD and turn over to Owner for future user training.

3.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Provide service and maintenance of system for warranty period from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Include all costs for service such as travel, mileage, expenses, labor, etc.

3.13 WARRANTIES

A. Provide all required documentation to the system manufacturer to initiate and ascertain the warranty specified.


B. Provide warranty of the system by the system manufacturer and guaranteed for the term of the warranty.

3.14 TURNOVER MEETING

A. Meeting:

1. Upon completion of all work, coordinate a meeting with the Owner and Owner's representative at the site to provide all as-built documentation, certifications, test reports, spare parts, tools, training DVD and additional manuals, etc. This shall be done upon completion of final punch list and without requirement of final payment being processed.

2. Provide in-depth review of all documentation and equipment to Owner for acceptance.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTENSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes an extension of the existing Edwards Fire Alarm System into the

new modular with audible speaker and visual notification appliances.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Owner’s fire alarm representative resource documents.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Programming and testing will be by Division 28.

B. Coordination:

1. Coordinate together with the Owner’s representative and other Divisions, their

operational voltages and controls for proper system operation and interface

requirements. Provide any necessary auxiliary equipment for system interfaces.

The auxiliary equipment shall provide for, but not be limited to:

a. Interfaces to existing fire alarm system and associated sequencing and

scheduling.

b. Elevator controllers and smoke detection interface.

c. Elevator contactor interfaces.

d. 120 volt power connections.

e. Exact waterflow and tamper switch locations and quantities in fire protection

system.

f. Breaker handle clips and signage at panelboards servicing fire alarm

equipment.

g. Power supplies battery back-up and extender components to support the

additional equipment.

2. Nameplates shall be per Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."

3. All information for the system wiring shall be supplied by the Owner’s

representative. The sizes of the different wires shall be those specified by the

manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


Results for Electronic Safety and Security."


A. Product Data: Submit new system equipment and cabling.

B. Layout Drawings: Depict the following:

1. Routing, number, size, and type of conductors.




2. Conduit size and fill percentage.

3. Terminal-to-terminal wiring connections showing all individual circuits and circuit

and associated conduit routing.

C. Load power supply and battery capacity calculations and load distribution requirements.

Include battery calculations for both alarm and supervisory modes. Identify remaining

spare capacities.

D. Software Data:

1. Device address list.

2. Control by event table depicting new devices programming functions using matrix

style form in NFPA 72.


A. Field and quality control test reports.


A. Documentation:

1. Record of Completion Documents: Provide, in coordination with the Owner’s

representative, the "Permanent Records" according to NFPA 72 to Owner,

Engineer, and Authority Having Jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Proprietary Edwards to match existing system.

2.2 FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Audibility and Intelligibility Requirements:

1. Suitable per NFPA 72 and local requirements.

2. Be responsible to meet requirements using manufacturer specific notification

appliances whose tap settings are generally set at the lower (1/2 watt) of their

associated range and main power supplies and amplifiers with 25 percent minimum

spare capacity above sum of all devices at maximum tap settings. Contract

Drawing layouts depict generic industry solution approaches. Add notification

appliances at no cost to Owner to meet these requirements. Submit design

compliance per Pre-Installation Shop Drawing Submittal requirements.

3. Design compliance to acknowledge the following minimum acoustical layout

criteria:

a. Published anticipated average ambient room sound levels.

b. Loss of dBA for barriers:

1) Stud/Drywall Walls: 35-50

2) Doors: 15-20

3) Drywall: 15-20

4) Wall Coverings: 3-5




c. Space acoustical characteristics.

d. Speakers set at lower tap settings generally provide better intelligibility and

more uniform sound levels.

e. Speakers in equipment rooms shall be set at minimum 2 watt tap setting.

f. Maximum occupant distance from a speaker is 50 feet.

B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24V DC, under-dome type; with provision for housing the

operating mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94

dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the bell. Dome shall be 10-inch (254-mm) size.

C. Voice/Tone Speakers:

1. UL 1480 listed.

2. General Type Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.

3. Horn Type High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.

4. Mounting: Flush, semi-recessed, or surface mounted; bidirectional as shown on

Drawings. Flush ceiling speakers shall have round white grill. Surface ceiling

speakers shall have backbox sized larger that grill.

5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the

speaker location.

D. Visible Alarm Devices: System synchronized xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971,

with clear polycarbonate lens mounted on faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in

minimum 1-inch (25-mm) high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output: As shown on Drawings.

2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

3. Synchronization of strobes shall be accomplished via software programming

systems that required field modules and synchronization circuits will be not

considered acceptable.

E. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Extender Panel: The NAC extender panel shall

function as a wiring termination and data collection point on each floor.

1. Provide additional notification appliance circuit capacity and synchronization for

new visible alarm devices. Size panel as required.

2. The NAC extender panel may be mounted close to the host FACU or can be

remotely located and shall connect to the host panel via a communications channel.

Each output NAC can be individually controlled for general alarm or selective area

notification as required by the area and function.

3. Alarms from the host fire panel shall signal the NAC power extender panel to

activate. The panel shall monitor itself and each of its NACs for trouble conditions

and shall report trouble conditions to the host panel.

4. Provide additional addressable signal, synchronization and relay modules to meet

Boston Fire Department’s high rise evacuation requirements. Refer to Paragraph

1.4E for additional requirements.




2.3 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with

NFPA 70, Article 760.

1. Limit circuit voltage drop to 10 percent maximum.

B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG size as

recommended by system manufacturer.

C. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted pair, NFPA 70 Article 760, Classification CI, for power-

limited fire alarm signal service. UL listed as Type FPL, and complying with

requirements in UL 1424 and in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

1. Notification appliance circuits passing through a separate fire zone shall be 2-hour

rated per UL 2196.

2. Backbone communication circuits between FACUs shall be 2-hour rated per UL

2196.

D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600 V rated, 75 degrees C,

color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 18 AWG, minimum.

2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire alarm system is operational

before making changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to the existing FACU.

B. Install equipment mounting heights in accordance with State, Local Fire Alarm Codes,

and Handicapped Codes.

C. Install devices being conscious of exact placement requirements per NFPA 72. The

Drawings are diagrammatic.

D. Install device boxes of size and type recommended by manufacturer’s representative to

suit device and location shown on Drawings. Paint boxes per Division 26 Section "Boxes

and Cabinets." Install FACU cabinets at 5 feet above floor to center, unless otherwise

noted, supported independently from stud partitions.

E. Provide a dedicated fused disconnect switch on power line to FACU complete with

nameplate "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM." Disconnect location shall be identified with

appropriate nameplate at the FACU. Assure breaker handle clips in on position and

"FIRE ALARM SYSTEM" nameplate at all panelboard breakers serving the fire alarm

equipment.




3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring according to the following:

1. NECA 1.

2. TIA/EIA 568-A.

B. Wiring Method:

1. Provide interconnecting wire and cable between the various system devices for

proper system operation as recommended by the manufacturer’s representative.

2. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring

associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

3. Fire Rated Cables: Provide 2-hour fire rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70 Type MI,

NFPA 70 Type CI with associated metallic conduit to meet 2-hour rating, or 2-hour

enclosure for:

a. Looped backbone FACP communication risers.

b. Notification appliance circuits until they enter the evacuation signaling zone

that they serve.

c. Class A return loop when passing through separate fire zone(s).

4. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in

the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

5. Speaker Circuits: Alternate circuits to local speakers from physically separate

homeruns to associated FACU.

6. T-tapping is not acceptable.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides

and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no

excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure

associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according

to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal

spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

D. Cable Terminations: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes,

cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

E. Color Coding: Color code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building

power wiring. Use one color code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color code for

supervisory circuits. Color code audible alarm indicating circuits differently from alarm

initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire

alarm system raceway couplings, junction boxes and covers red.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26

Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Install framed operating instructions in a location visible from the FACU.

C. Paint power supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."

D. Mark each addressable device with system device address per Owner requirements.




3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground the FACU and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire

from main service ground to the FACU.

B. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize to the

greatest extent possible group loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and

other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record,

and report ground resistance.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to

supervise field assembled components and equipment installation, including

connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the

following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement

using the form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.

a. Include the existing system in tests and inspections.

2. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built

drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly

located, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.

3. Testing: Follow procedure and record results in the form of a record of completion

complying with requirements in NFPA 72.

a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.

4. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including

demonstration of sequences of operation by using the matrix style form in

NFPA 72.

3.6 SYSTEM CERTIFICATION AND TESTING DOCUMENTATION

A. Submit written certification documenting successful completion of all system required

testing. This certification and documentation shall include certification that the system:

1. Has been visually inspected and functionally tested by a manufacturer's certified

representative. Documentation shall include:

a. The date and time of each test.

b. A reference set of record drawings, numerically identifying the individual

components and circuits tested.

c. A description of each test/verification performed.

d. A checklist of each device and circuit test, indicating the results of each test.

Include speaker tap setting list and initiating device time/sensitivity setting

list.




e. A narrative sequence of operations for all associated evacuation signaling and

auxiliary functions, including a verification checklist documenting correct

operation.

f. The names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each

test.

g. A checklist of test results for signaling between related systems including:

1) Division 14 elevator recall.

2) Division 21 fire protection signaling.

2. Is installed entirely in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and

within the limitations of the required listings and approvals.

3. Is in proper working order and in full compliance with Contract Documents.

4. Has latest version of manufacturer's software and graphics. Include appropriate

listing.

B. Multiple tests may be required depending upon approval of suggested Division 28

phasing.

3.7 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Upon completion of the installation, record drawings shall be submitted on each system

before final acceptance of the work. Furnish to the Engineer a set of record drawings

including system diagrams for each system. The record drawing masters shall be on

reproducible Mylar film. Uniformly sizes as required for legibility and reproduction and

on high density compact disks in latest AutoCAD Version format. (Contract Document

drawings are available from the Architect on compact disk for a negotiated fee.) Record

drawings shall illustrate all peripheral device locations including final address, major

equipment locations, zoning, conduit routing, single line riser diagram depicting wiring

characteristics and termination designations for all devices. Also included shall be

documentation of spare raceways, new and existing, either unused or vacated by removal

of existing systems.






WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT SITE CLEARING DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 31 10 00 -1

SECTION 31 10 00

SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing/abandoning site utilities

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utility services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion/sedimentation and storm water pollution control measures.

2. Division 01 Section(s) "Construction Waste Management and Disposal” and "Sustainable Design Requirements" for additional LEED requirements.

3. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" and “Selective Site Demolition” for demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

D. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

E. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.


1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree

or other plants designated to remain.

B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. Provide copy to Engineer of Record.


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.


A. Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place.

1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties, public right-of-way and on Owner's proper-ty.

2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property own-ers. The full width of pavements damaged due to construction access and other construc-tion-related activities shall be replaced with a structural section (pavement and base) at least equal to the adjacent existing section.

3. Protect existing utility lines indicated to remain. Notify Architect immediately of any damage to or encounter with an unknown existing utility line. Immediately repair damage to existing utility lines.

B. Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing.

1. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations.

2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch in diameter that are cut during construction op-erations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt or other acceptable coating formulated to use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to pre-vent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible.

3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construc-tion operations in a manner acceptable to Architect. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damage to trees and shrubs.

4. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by arborist.

C. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.


1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Contractor shall delineate with construction stakes, the property line along the southeast side of the project.

2. Contractor shall document the pre-construction condition and photograph the existing CMU retaining wall along the southeast property line.

3. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.

E. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises per owner’s direction.

F. Utility Locator Service: Notify UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT for area where Project is located before site clearing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

B. Tree Wound Paint: Bituminous based paint of standard manufacture specially formulated for the intended use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE CLEARING

A. Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off-site disposal of stumps and roots.

1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.

2. Unless specifically designated to remain, strip the upper two inches (minimum) of soil con-taining vegetation and root growth within the Limits of Work shown on the Drawings.

B. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings. Removing abandoned underground piping or conduits interfering with construction is included under this Section.

2. Contractor shall refer to the project’s Asbestos Abatement Report for removal of asbestos containing materials and other potential hazardous materials.


C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing.

1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. 3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material,

unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thor-

oughly compact each layer and compact in accordance with the requirements speci-fied in Section 31 “Earthwork” to make the new surface conform with the existing ad-jacent surface of the ground.

4. Trim trees, designated to be left standing within the cleared areas, of dead branches 1-1/2 inches or more in diameter; and trim all branches to heights and in a manner as indicated. Neatly cut limbs and branches to be trimmed close to the bole of the tree or main branch-es. Paint cuts more than 1-1/4 inches in diameter with specified tree-wound paint.

D. Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material.

1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with un-derlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from are-as before stripping.

a. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system.

2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind and sediment erosion.

3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil as specified for disposal of waste material.

E. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

F. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain.

3.2 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Arrange with Owner for disconnecting and sealing of all overhead and underground utilities that serve adjoining existing structures before site clearing.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Arrange with owner scheduling of utilities shut off.

C. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be removed.

D. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

E. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

F. Contractor shall note that various unknown and undocumented underground utilities exist at the project site. Contractor shall ensure that utilities are inactive or shut off prior to removal or


abandonment. Contractor shall document all found underground utilities and notify engineer of record for further direction.

3.3 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT EARTHWORK DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 31 20 00 -1

SECTION 31 20 00

EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements and landscaping 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage and moisture-control fill course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 4. Base course for concrete walks, asphalt and pavements. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and appurtenances outside building lines.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and

support facilities. 2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, and removal of above- and

below-grade improvements and utilities. 3. Division 31 Section "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet

piling of excavations. 4. Division 33 Section "Storm Drainage" for sub-drainage of retaining and planter walls.

1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATION

A. Perform all work in accordance with applicable provisions of "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", 2012 Edition, City of Burbank Ordinances and Amendments, latest editions, and UBC and 20 CBC. Unless otherwise noted, mention herein of section numbers refers to sections of the Reference Specification. Where Reference Specification refers to "Agency", substitute the word "Owner". Where Reference Specification refers to "Engineer", substitute the word "Architect". Where Reference Specification is in conflict with these Specifications, these Specifications shall govern.

B. The recommendations found in the Soils Engineering Investigation Report prepared by Harrington Geotechnical Engineering, Inc., dated April 4th, 2019, apply to this Section.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT EARTHWORK DSA SUBMITTAL, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 31 20 00 -2

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and the surface pavement in paving system.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill when sufficient approved soil material is not available from excavations

E. Drainage Fill: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the re-use or disposal of materials removed.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within building lines.

L. Compaction: Any method of mechanically stabilizing a material by increasing its density at a controlled moisture condition. "Degree of Compaction" is expressed as a percentage of the maximum dry density obtained by the test procedure described in ASTM D 1557 for general soil types abbreviated in this Specification as 95 percent of maximum dry density".

M. Hard Material: Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits or conglomerate materials which are not included in the definition of "rock" but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal

N. Lift: A layer or course of soil placed on top of previously prepared or placed soil in a fill or embankment.

O. Unsatisfactory Material: Soil or other material identified as having insufficient strength or stability to carry intended loads without excessive consolidation or loss of stability.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required: 1. Warning Tape 2. Geotextile 3. Water Quality Filter Media


B. Location of Borrow Materials.

C. Material Test Reports

D. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.

1. Pre-excavation photographs of existing retaining wall along the west side of the property.


A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction

B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing.

C. Pre-excavation Conference: Before commencing earthwork, meet with representatives of the governing authorities, Owner, Architect, consultants, Geotechnical Engineer, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities. Review earthwork procedures and responsibilities including testing and inspection procedures and requirements. Notify participants at least 3 working days prior to convening conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each participant.


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

1. Provide a minimum 48-hours notice to the Architect and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies and owner to shutoff services if lines are active.

C. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.

E. Utility Locator Service: Notify UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.


F. Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion/sedimentation control measures, specified in Division 01 are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil materials imported or excavated on the property determined to be suitable as referenced in the project Geotechnical Investigation Report; and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487 or a combination of these groups.

1. Refer to Geotechnical Investigation Report, for unsuitable materials and disposal methods for unsatisfactory soils.

D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials.

E. Base Material: Shall conform to crushed aggregate base or crushed miscellaneous base, as specified on plan, in accordance with section 200-2.2 or 200-2.4, respectively, of the Reference Specification, and compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM Test Method D 1557.

F. Engineered Fill: Base Materials and compacted fill materials

G. Bedding Material: Shall be base materials with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve; or clean sand classified in accordance with ASTM D 2487.

H. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve

I. Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and natural sand, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 50 sieve.

J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf (700 N); ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf (630 N); ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 56 lbf (250 N); ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf (250 N); ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.


8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. 6. White: Steam systems

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. 6. White: Steam Systems

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Tree protection is specified in the Section 311000 "Site Clearing". Refer to landscape architectural plans for instructions.

D. Prepare subgrade and place base materials in accordance with sections 301-1.2 and 301-2, respectively, of the Reference Specification.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Dewatering shall be done in accordance with NPDES waste discharge requirements. Contractor shall obtain all necessary Dewatering permits from state and local jurisdictions.


C. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. General: Excavation shall be to the contours, elevations and dimensions indicated. Keep excavations free from water and debris while construction is in progress. Notify the Owner immediately in writing where it becomes necessary to remove hard, soft, weak, or wet material to a depth greater than indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, concrete placed below grade will be formed and excavations shall allow for placement and removal of forms. Side cuts shall be cribbed and shored as required.

B. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions as described in the referenced Geotechnical Investigations Report.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

2. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and rocks.

3. Rock fragments greater than 3 inches in diameter shall be taken off-site, or placed in

accordance with the recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineer in areas designated as suitable for rock disposal.

3.5 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS

A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations.

B. Unshored Temporary Excavations: 1. Unshored temporary excavations may be sloped back at 1 to 1 (horizontal to vertical) or

flatter up to a maximum 20 feet in height. Where sloped embankments are used, the tops of the slopes should be barricaded to prevent vehicles and storage loads within seven feet of the tops of the slopes. If the temporary construction slopes will be maintained during the rainy season, construct berms along the tops of the slopes where necessary to prevent run-off water from entering the excavation and eroding the slope faces.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavation Limits: Shall be to a tolerance of plus-or-minus 0.10 foot and shall extend three (3) feet laterally beyond the building limits at the excavation level and three (3) feet below the bottom of the building footing. The excavation side slopes shall not exceed a slope ratio of 1 to 1, horizontal to vertical, up to 20 feet in height, unless they are positively retained by shoring or other approved methods. Over-excavation side slopes may be vertical, as long as they are no higher than allowed


by the State of California Construction Safety Orders, in which case they shall be no steeper than 1 to 1. If cut below depths indicated, excavations shall be filled with concrete when the foundations or footings are placed. Revise first subparagraph below if footings and foundations are placed on engineered fill.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required

lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures:

Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.8 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within two feet of any known utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, use hand or light equipment excavation. Start hand or light equipment excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines and other existing work affected by the excavation work of this Section until approval for backfill is granted by the geotechnical engineer. Immediately report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction to the Owner.

B. Where unidentified existing utilities are encountered, determine whether these are active or abandoned. Remove interfering portions of abandoned utilities and cap or plug open ends of pipe to remain. The cap or plug must seal the opening in such a manner that would permit remaining portions of the utility to be reactivated. Notify Owner for instructions on utilities which are determined to be active. Do not proceed without instructions, except to correct an immediate hazard or emergency condition. Relocation work performed on an active utility without obtaining prior approval from Owner shall be done at the Contractor's expense and liability.

C. In areas where compacted backfill has been placed, additional consolidation may occur after completion due to changes in moisture content and surcharge. Utility connections crossing this backfill, and improvements adjoining the building at the backfill line shall be installed taking into account this additional consolidation, or sufficient time shall be scheduled between backfilling operations and such improvements to allow this consolidation to take place. Damage to utilities or other improvements due to Contractor's negligence in regard to this paragraph shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense

D. Protect newly backfilled areas and adjacent structures, slopes, or grades from traffic, erosion settlement, and any other damage. Repair and re-establish damaged or eroded grades and slopes and restore surface construction prior to acceptance

E. Cutting Pavement, Curbs, and Gutters: Saw cut with neat, parallel, straight lines one foot wider than trench width on each side of trenches and one foot beyond each edge of pits. If an existing


pavement joint or cracked area is within two feet outside of a designated sawcut line shown on the Drawings, removal and resurfacing shall be to that joint, and/or shall include the crack or cracked area, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

F. Contractor shall pothole at all identifiable crossings of existing utilities prior to any trenching operations and provide Architect with a survey of the top elevations (and bottom elevations, if applicable), of possible interferences so that an evaluation of necessary adjustments to the current profile or alignment may be made. Additionally, Architect shall be given the opportunity to view

possible conflicts in the field prior to providing revised designs.

G. Provide a minimum cover from grade of 3 feet for water mains and gas mains. Storm drains and sewers shall be to the depths indicated. Where settlements greater than the tolerance allowed herein for grading occur in trenches and pits due to improper compaction, excavate to the depth necessary to rectify the problem, then backfill and compact the excavation as specified herein and restore the surface to the required elevation.

H. Keep excavations free from water while construction is in progress.

I. Notify the Owner immediately in writing if it becomes necessary to remove rock or hard, unstable, or otherwise unsatisfactory material to a depth greater than indicated. Excavate large rock, boulders, and other unyielding material to an overdepth at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe, conduit, duct and appurtenances, unless otherwise indicated or specified. Over-excavate soft, weak, or wet excavations to an overdepth at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe, conduit, duct or appurtenances unless otherwise indicated or specified.

J. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations.

K. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, except where sloping of sides is allowed. Sides of trenches shall not be sloped from the bottom of the trench up to the elevation of the top of the pipe. See plans for detail.

L. At the option of the Contractor, the excavations may be cut to an overdepth of not less than 4 inches and refilled to required grade as specified.

M. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading.

1. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.

3. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after trench has been graded. Dimension of bell holes shall be as required for properly making the particular type of joint to ensure that the bell does not bear on the bottom of the excavation.

3.9 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE

A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.


B. If and when Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired roller to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for Changes in Work.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.10 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position when acceptable to the Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

3.11 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.12 SOIL TREATMENT

A. All chemical applications used for soil treatment are subject to the approval of the Owner.

B. Recommended termiticide: Chlorpyrifos “ Dursban TC”, or Permetrin “Torpedo” or “Dragnet”, or district approved equal.

C. Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are completed and prior to any membrane being placed beginning concrete placement or other construction activities.

D. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instruction of soil toxicant manufacturer.

E. Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under foundations.

F. Apply soil treatment solution at rates recommended by soil toxicant manufacturer.


G. Allow not less than 12 hours for drying after application, before beginning concrete placement or other construction activities

H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other construction activities following application.

3.13 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage,

dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.14 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL AND COMPACTION

A. Backfilling of exterior utility trenches shall not be undertaken until geotechnical engineer has received 24-hours notice, until required tests and inspections have been completed, and until as-built location notes have been furnished. Remove uninspected backfill in accordance with requirements of this specification. Use hand-operated, plate-type, vibratory, or other suitable hand tampers in areas not accessible to larger rollers or compactors. Avoid damaging pipes and protective pipe coatings.

B. Place backfill material in accordance with Section 306-1.3.2 of the Reference Specifications and achieve at least 95% of the maximum density. The top 12 inches of backfill in the building or paved areas shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density.

C. Compaction by ponding or flooding will not be permitted.

D. Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

E. Concrete backfill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are excavated within 18 inches of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings

F. Provide 4-inch-thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 2'-6" below surface of roadways. After installation and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway base.

G. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or base material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system.


3.15 FILL

A. Preparation: Scarify and remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. 1. The scarified ground shall be brought to optimum moisture, mixed as required, and

compacted as specified. If the scarified zone is greater than 12 inches in depth, the excess shall be removed and placed in lifts restricted to six inches.

2. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.

3. Under steps and ramps, use base materials 4. Under building slabs, use base materials 5. Under footings and foundations, use drainage fill materials.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.16 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material.

3.17 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. Keep rollers and other heavy equipment at least 18 inches from footings, foundations, piers and walls of buildings and accessory construction. Use mechanical and hand tampers weighing at least 90 pounds with a maximum face area of 48 inches square to compact backfill within 18 inches of construction and where access is restricted.

C. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557:

1. For general site fills, compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density.

2. Under structures, building slabs, and steps, scarify and recompact top 36 inches below footing or slab, or 5 feet below the proposed subgrade, whichever is deeper, and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent maximum dry density.

3. Under walkways and paving, scarify and recompact top 12 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent maximum dry density.


4. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent maximum dry density.

3.18 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances. 3. If necessary, the Contractor's selected equipment and construction procedure shall be

altered, changed or modified in order to meet the specified compaction requirements. Flooding and water jetting is prohibited.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Concrete Walks: Plus or minus 0.025 foot. 3. Pavements:

a. Concrete: 0.025 foot minus, with no high spots. b. Asphalt: 0.05 foot minus, with no hight spots.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of ½ inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.

3.19 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Division 33 Section "Storm Drainage."

B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches x12 inches of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.

1. Compact each filter material layer to 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight

C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.

1. Compact each filter material layer to 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight 2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch thick compacted layers to

final subgrade.

3.20 BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Compact base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D 4254 relative density.


2. Shape base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.

3. When thickness of compacted base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer.

4. When thickness of compacted base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.

3.21 PAVEMENT REPAIR

A. Repair or patch asphalt pavement as specified in Section 321216 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING. Repair or patch concrete pavement, curbs and gutters as specified in Section 32`1313 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING. Do not repair pavement until trench has been backfilled and compacted as herein specified. As a minimum, maintain one-way traffic on roads and streets crossed by trenches.


A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements. 1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM

D 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder method), as applicable. a. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according

to ASTM D 2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 3017

b. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect.

B. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

C. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

D. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests along a wall face.

E. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for each 150 feet or less of trench, but no fewer than two tests.

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.23 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.


B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.24 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.

1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT FINISH GRADING DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 31 22 19 -1

SECTION 31 22 19

FINISH GRADING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following: 1. Weeding. 2. Finish grading of lawn and planting areas.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 329000 Section: Landscape Planting 2. 328200: Irrigation System 3. 312000: Earthwork

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish grading: finish grading shall consist of adjusting and finishing soil surfaces with site or imported topsoil, raking grades to a smooth, even, uniform plane. Remove and legally dispose of all extraneous matter off site. Facilitate natural run-off water and establish grades and drainage indicated as part of the contract work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: 1. Refer to Section 32; Landscape Planting.

B. Obtain imported topsoil from approved local sources.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of conditions: Prior to commencing the finish grading, review the installed work of other trades and verify that their work is complete. 1. Rough Grading: Grading in planting areas (except raised planter areas) shall be

established to within plus or minus 0.10 foot prior to beginning of finish grading.

B. Import topsoil only when necessary to supplement site soil to achieve grades shown on drawings, or if site soil is unsuitable for planting.

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT FINISH GRADING DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 31 22 19 -2

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Weeding: Before finish grading, weeds and grasses shall be dug out by the root or sprayed with an herbicide and disposed of off-site. This procedure is outlined under the Landscape Planting Section.

B. Debris: Remove stones and debris 1 inch in diameter and greater and clumps of earth that do not break up. Dispose of off-site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: When rough grading and weeding have been completed, and the soil has dried sufficiently to be readily worked, lawn and planting areas shall be graded to the elevations indicated on the Drawings. 1. Grades indicated on Drawing are grades that will result after thorough settlement and

compaction of the soil. 2. Grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform finish grades and, if required, shall be

made at the direction of the Architect. 3. Finish grades shall be smooth, even, and a uniform plane with no abrupt change of

surfaces. 4. Soil areas adjacent to buildings shall slope away from the building to allow a natural run-off

of water, and surface drainage shall be directed as indicated on the drawings by remodeling surfaces to facilitate the run off water at 2% minimum grade.

5. Low spots and pockets shall be graded to drain properly.

B. Drainage: Finish grade with proper slope to drains. 1. Flow lines, designated or not, shall be graded and maintained to allow free flow of surface

water. 2. If any drainage problems arise during construction period due to Contractor's work (such

as, but not limited to, low spots, slides, gullies and general erosion), the Contractor shall be responsible for repairing these areas to a condition equal to their original condition, and in so doing shall prevent further drainage problems from occurring.

C. Toe of slope: To prevent soil creep or erosion across pavement, where pavement (walk, curb, etc.) is at the toe of a slope, finish grade is to level out or swale slightly at least 6” before reaching pavement.

D. Moisture Content: The soil shall not be worked when the moisture content is so great that excessive compaction occurs, nor when it is so dry that dust may form in the air or that clods do not break readily. Water may be applied, if necessary, to provide moisture content for tilling and planting operations. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to control dust that is spread as a result of grading operations.

E. Grades: The finish grade in areas to be planted with turf shall be 2- inches below grade of adjacent pavement and walks.

F. Compaction: Soils in planted areas shall be loose and friable, yet firm enough that no settling occurs from normal foot traffic or irrigation.

3.4 FIELD OBSERVATION

A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to contact the Architect 48 hours or two working days in advance of each agreed observation or conference.

B. Schedule for On-Site Reviews: at completion of finish grading and prior to any planting operations.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT ASPHALT PAVING DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 32 12 16 -1

SECTION 32 12 16

ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot-mix asphalt overlays. 4. Asphalt surface treatments:

a. Fog seals. b. Slurries.

5. Pavement-marking paint. B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 312000 "Earthwork" for aggregate subbase and base courses and aggregate pavement shoulders.

2. Section 321313 “Concrete Paving” for pavement marking on portland cement concrete pavement and herbicide treatment under portland cement concrete paving.

3. Section 321723 "Painted Pavement Marking" for pavement marking requirements. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other

applicable requirements of the standard specifications of the state or of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Reference Specification: Perform all work in accordance with applicable provisions of

"Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", Latest Edition. Unless otherwise noted, mention herein of section numbers refers to sections of the Reference Specification. Where Reference Specification refers to "Agency", substitute the word "Owner". Where Reference Specification refers to "Engineer", substitute the word "Architect". Where Reference Specification is in conflict with these Specifications, these Specifications shall govern.

2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in Reference Specifications do not apply to this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product specified. Include technical data and tested physical and

performance properties. B. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix

proposed for the Work. C. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. D. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces.

Indicate dedicated handicapped spaces with international graphics symbol. E. Samples: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm) minimum, of paving fabric.


F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

G. Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of materials with

requirements indicated. H. Material Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that each material

complies with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt

paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt

similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Firm shall be a registered and approved paving mix manufacturer with authorities

having jurisdiction or with the DOT of the state in which Project is located. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on Architect's

evaluation of criteria conforming to ASTM D 3666, that the independent testing agency has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable standards of authorities having jurisdiction

for asphalt paving work on public property. E. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI's "The Asphalt Handbook," except where more

stringent requirements are indicated. F. Preinstallation Conference: Review methods and procedures related to asphalt paving

including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of

plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt. 2. Review condition of substrate and preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during

installation period and for remainder of construction period. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule for paving and related work. Verify

availability of materials, paving Installer's personnel, and equipment required to execute the Work without delays.

5. Review inspection and testing requirements, governing regulations, and proposed installation procedures.

6. Review forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions.


A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken

and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature

range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively

damp or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.5 deg C).


2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910. 3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and rising

at time of placement. 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.5 deg C) at

time of placement. B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at

a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) for oil-based materials, 50 deg F (10 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous

installations. B. Coarse Aggregate: Sound; angular crushed stone; crushed gravel; or properly cured, crushed

blast-furnace slag; complying with ASTM D 692. C. Fine Aggregate: Sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone; gravel, properly

cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof; complying with ASTM D 1073. 1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total

aggregate mass. D. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with

ASTM D 242. 2.2 ASPHALT PAVEMENT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Pavement Leveling Course: Conform to Viscosity Grade B-PG 64-10 in section 203-

1.2 and section 203-6 of the Reference Specification. B. Asphalt Pavement Wearing (Surface) Course: Conform to Viscosity Grade III C2-PG 64-10,

C3-PG 64-10 in section 203-1.2 and section 203-6 and section 400-4 to be used with Class III asphalt of the Reference Specification.

C. Prime Coat: Grade SC-70 liquid asphalt conforming to section 203-2 of the Reference

Specification. D Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt grade SS-1h conforming to section 203-3 of the Reference

Specification. E. Asphalt Paint: Conform to ASTM D41 or D43 per section 203-8 of the Reference

Specification. F. Slurry Seal: Emulsified asphalt grade [SS-1h] [CSS-1h] and aggregate conforming to section

203.5 of the Reference Specification. G. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration-

graded material. H. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material. I. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141, pumping consistency. J. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027; medium-curing cutback asphalt; MC-30, MC-70, or MC-250. K. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime conforming to state DOT requirements. L. Prime Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt,

slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.


M. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt,

slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. N. Fog Seal: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow

setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. O. Water: Potable.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA). Provide granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. B. Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3. C. Paving Geotextile: Nonwoven polypropylene, specifically designed for paving applications,

resistant to chemical attack, rot, and mildew. D. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-115, Type I,

or AASHTO M-248, Type N. E. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, water-base emulsion, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-

1952. 1. Color: As indicated. 2. Color: White (for parking stalls, other than handicapped). 2. Color: Yellow (for parking stalls, other than handicapped). 3. Color: Blue (for pavement markings identifying handicap parking) 4. Color: Red (for “No Parking” areas as shown)

F. Glass Beads: AASHTO M-247.

2.4 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities

having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI's "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where

Project is located. 2. Base Course: As indicated. 3. Surface Course: As indicated.

B. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities

having jurisdiction and designed according to procedures in AI's "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types." 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where

Project is located. 2. Provide mixes complying with the composition, grading, and tolerance requirements of

ASTM D 3515 for the following nominal, maximum aggregate sizes: a. Base Course: 1 inch (25 mm). b. Surface Course: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, consisting of emulsified asphalt, fine aggregates,

and mineral fillers and as follows: 1. Composition: Type 1. 2. Composition: Type 2. 3. Composition: Type 3.

PART 3 – EXECUTION


3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Subgrade, Subbase, and Base:

1. Proof-roll prepared subgrade and base using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction.

C. Notify Architect in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving installation until

these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected. 3.2 COLD MILLING

A. Clean existing paving surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold

milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement, including hot-mix asphalt and, as necessary, unbound-aggregate base course, by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated. 1. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling.

B. Cold mill existing asphalt concrete pavement in accordance with section 302-5.2 of the Reference Specification.

3.3 PATCHING AND REPAIRS

A. Patching: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base.

Recompact new subgrade. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. 1. Tack coat faces of excavation and allow to cure before paving. 2. Fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot,

compact flush with adjacent surface. 3. Partially fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and compact while

still hot. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat

concrete pieces firmly. 1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slabs until slab is stabilized or, if

necessary, crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly. 2. Remove disintegrated or badly broken pavement. Prepare and patch with hot-mix

asphalt. C. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of dense-graded, hot-mix

asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) in existing pavements. 1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

D. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4

inch (6 mm). Refill with asphalt joint-filling material to restore watertight condition. Remove excess filler that has accumulated near cracks or joints.

E. Asphalt paint: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or

Portland cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt pavement. Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m) of surface. 1. Allow asphalt paint to cure undisturbed before paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material

from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.


1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and

written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted- aggregate base before applying paving materials. 1. Mix herbicide with prime coat when formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.

C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted-aggregate base at a rate of 0.15 to

0.50 gal./sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum. 1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over

surface to blot excess asphalt. Use just enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving. D. Prime Coat: Comply with section 302-5.3 of the Reference Specification. Apply primer at a

rate of between 0.20 and 0.25 gallons per square yard to top surface of base course prior to asphalt placement.

E. Tack Coat: If a leveling course has been used for construction traffic, apply tack coat to all

leveling course surfaces in accordance with section 302-5.4 of the Reference Specification at a rate of 0.10 gallons per square yard.

F. Asphalt Paint: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or

portland cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt pavement. Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m) of surface. 1. Allow asphalt paint to cure undisturbed before paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt mix on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off.

Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness, when compacted. 1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C). 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of

one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide, except where infill edge

strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to

overlap previous strips. Complete asphalt base course for a section before placing asphalt surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools

to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

D. The asphalt pavement shall be completed in phases; the leveling course during construction

for temporary construction traffic and storage of materials and; the wearing (surface) course just prior to turnover to Owner; unless the entire paving operation is completed just prior to


turnover to the Owner such that no construction traffic or storage of materials shall be allowed on the finished pavement surface after its completion. Contractor shall schedule final surface course paving operations so that the required waiting period specified in the Division 2 Section “Pavement Marking” will allow project completion within the specified time.

E. Construct asphalt pavement in accordance with section 302-5 of the Reference Specification and as shown on the Drawings. F. Two Layer Method: The leveling course shall be installed to elevations which will allow the

future placement of a wearing (surface) course no thinner than 1-1/2 inches. Prior to placing the wearing (surface) course, repair all areas damaged during construction use , thoroughly clean the leveling course of all loose material and place a tack coat pursuant to paragraph 3.4 D. herein.

3.6 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct

joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat. 2. Offset longitudinal joints in successive courses a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 3. Offset transverse joints in successive courses a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm). 4. Construct transverse joints by bulkhead method or sawed vertical face method as

described in AI's "The Asphalt Handbook." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive

displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.7 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without

excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).

B. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and

outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Repair surfaces by loosening displaced material, filling with hot-mix asphalt, and rerolling to required elevations.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling, while hot-

mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to at least 95 percent of the Hveem density (ASTM D 2726-05a).

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still

warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to

proper alignment. Bevel edges while still hot, with back of rake or smooth iron. Compact thoroughly using tamper or other satisfactory method.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials.

Remove paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt, with a thickness one inch greater than the existing, and to match existing finish surface grades such that no local ponding of water will result. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.


G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become

marked. 3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following

tolerances: 1. Leveling Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the

following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Leveling Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.9 SURFACE TREATMENTS

A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.45 to 0.70 L/sq. m) to existing

asphalt pavement and allow to cure. Lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal with a fine sand.

B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to

cure. 1. Roll slurry seal to smooth ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.

C. Slurry seals: Apply in accordance with section 302-4 of the Reference Specification.

3.10 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified

with Architect. B. Allow paving to cure for 30 days before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions

indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm). 1. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal.

(0.72 kg/L). E. Comply with paint manufacturer's maximum drying time requirements to prevent undue

softening of bitumen and pick-up, displacement, or discoloration of pavement marking by vehicular traffic.

F. Paint pavement, curbs and other surfaces, as shown on the Drawings. Painting shall be

straight, uniform, exact and sharp without blobs at the start and finish. Edges shall be even, accurate, symmetrical and free of fuzziness.

G. Apply markings for disabled access symbols in accordance with State of California Building

Code, Part 2, Title 24, CCR. H. Where work consists of modifications of, or additions to existing parking striping, match existing

color and width of lines as closely as possible.



A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field

inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested

Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements. B. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

corrected Work with specified requirements. C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined

according to ASTM D 3549. D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for

compliance with smoothness tolerances. E. Perform flood tests on asphalt paved areas to determine if surface grades allow proper runoff

of surface water and if drainage devices function properly. Such tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect and the Owner. Promptly correct paving work found to be defective due to ponding of water or improper drainage.

F. In-Place Density tests will be performed using nuclear gauge (ASTM D 2950-05) to verify at

least 95 percent relative compaction of the Hveem density has been achieved. Representative samples of the AC will be collected and tested in the laboratory for Hveem density ( ASTM D 2726-05a), theoretical maximum density ( ASTM D 2041-03a), stability ( ASTM D 1560-05), gradation ( ASTM C 136-05), and asphalt content (ASTM D 6307-05).

G. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements

indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT CONCRETE PAVING DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 32 13 13 -1

SECTION 32 13 13

CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior Portland cement concrete paving for the following:

1. Curbs and gutters. 2. Walkways. 3. Driveways 3. Concrete pavement. 4. Concrete wheel stops

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 312000: Earthwork for subgrade preparation, grading and base course.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide concrete pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable

requirements of the following standard specifications: 1. Reference Specification: Perform all work in accordance with applicable provisions of

"Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction" latest edition; and City of Burbank Standard drawings. Unless otherwise noted, mention herein of section numbers refers to sections of the Reference Specification. Where Reference Specification refers to "Agency", substitute the word "Owner". Where Reference Specification refers to "Engineer", substitute the word "Architect". Where Reference Specification is in conflict with these Specifications, these Specifications shall govern.

2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in Reference Specifications do not apply to this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections. B. Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics of

materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Description of Methods and Sequence of Placement. For each type of specially-finished concrete

provide description of methods and sequence of placement.

D. Submit manufacturer's product data for the following: 1. Form release agent. 2. Concrete coloring additive. 3. Prefabricated control joint. 4. Preformed joint filler. 5. Sealants. 6. Slip plane joint. 7. Concrete mix design.



A. Concrete Standards: Comply with provisions of the following standards, except where more

stringent requirements are indicated. 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." 4. Standard specifications for PWC (Green Book) latest edition, section 201-1.

B. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying

with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Paving work, base course etc., shall be done only after excavation and construction work, which

may damage them, have been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance.

D. Existing paving area shall, if damaged or removed during the course of this project, be repaired or

replaced under this section of the specification. Workmanship and materials for such repair and replacement, except as otherwise noted, shall match as closely as possible those employed in existing work.

E. Pavement, base, or subbase shall not be placed on a muddy subgrade. F. Provide control joints as required to construct 100 sq. ft. maximum panel sizes. Provide sawcut

joints. Note on shop drawings. G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform materials

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other

construction activities. 1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. The owner reserves the right to inspect and test paving and associated work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other acceptable panel-type materials

to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a 100-foot or less radius.

B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form-release agent with a maximum of 350

g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Debond Form Coating, L & M Construction Chemicals. b. Crete-Lease 880 VOC, Cresset Chemical Company.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 40 for #3 bars and Grade 60 for bars larger

than #3, deformed. B. Plain, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.


C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

D. Dowel Sleeves: Speed Dowel, Aztec Concrete Accessories, Inc. E. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt joint

assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.

F. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, dowel bar supports and other devices for spacing,

supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support

chair legs.

G. Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM A185. Fabric reinforcement shall be furnished in flat sheets. Fabric reinforcement in rolls will not be permitted.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II

1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4M non-reactive, and as follows. Provide

aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-inch. 2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 3. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete

of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect.

C. Water: Potable. D. Admixtures:

1. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride or chloride ions. 2.4 COLOR ADMIXTURE

A. Color admixture shall be suitable for flatwork concrete and shall meet or exceed the requirements

set by Portland Cement Association (PCA) and ATSM C 494. B. Color admixture shall be of a type and quality which will not adversely affect workability, setting, or

strength of concrete. Color pigments shall consist of chemically inert, non-fading, alkali-fast mineral oxides, finely ground and specially prepared for the use in both cement and mortar. Admixture shall not contain calcium chloride.

C. Color admixture shall be Chromix admixture, manufactured by L.M. Scofield Company, Los Angles,

CA 90040. D. Mix design shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations, and directions of the Architect to

achieve proposed color. Strictly monitor additive / cement ratio throughout job to ensure uniform color.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd.,

complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.

1. Waterproof paper.


2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. Moisture loss not

more than 0.55 kg./sq. meter in 72 hours when applied at a rate of 200 sq. ft./gal. 1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. L & M Cure R, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. b. 1100-Clear, W.R. Meadows, Inc.

3. Do not use sodium silicate type curing agents. D. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab

surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co. b. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Bonding Agent: Acrylic or styrene butadiene, complying with ASTM C 1059, Type 2. B. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for dry or damp surfaces.

Provide material type, grade, and class to suit requirements. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Bonding Agent: b. SBR Latex; Euclid Chemical Co. c. Daraweld C; W.R. Grace & Co. d. Everbond; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. Acryl-Set; Master Builders Inc.

2. Epoxy Adhesive: a. Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co. b. Concresive Standard Liquid; Master Builders, Inc. c. Rezi-Weld 1000; W.R. Meadows, Inc.

D. Concrete Sealer: Water-based, deep penetrating, non-staining, non-darkening silane micro emulsion. 1. Positive chloride-ion screening, prevents water intrusion, minimizes rebar corrosion and

potential concrete spalling, and protects against damaging effects of alkalis and other contaminants.

2. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L. 3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:: a. Pentane WB, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. This product is intended to

establish the characteristics and level of quality intended for this Project.

D. Expansion and Isolation Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, cellulosic fiber. 2.7 CONCRETE MIX

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete by either laboratory

trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 1. Do not use the Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing

agency. B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:


1. Compressive Strength (28-Day): 2500 psi for concrete for sidewalks; 3250psi for concrete for traffic areas, curbs and gutters.

2. The minimum cement content shall be 5-1/4 sacks per cubic yard. 3. The maximum concrete slump shall be 3 inches, plus or minus 1/2 inch, for all walks; and 4

inches, plus or minus 1 inch for all other Portland cement concrete paving. 4. Water/Cement Ratios:

a. 0.5 maximum for concrete for pavement and site flatwork. b. 0.45 maximum for all other concrete.

C. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when

characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.

D. Admixtures:

1. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride or chloride ions. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2.9 GROUT

A. Grout shall be mixed in the proportions of one part Portland cement to two parts sand, by volume. Only sufficient water shall be used to enable grout to barely hold its shape when squeezed into a ball in the hand. Sand for grout shall be "Fine Aggregate", conforming to ASTM C 33.

B. Non-shrink grout shall be pre-mixed non-shrinking, high strength grout. Compressive strength in 28 days shall be 5,000 psi minimum, but in no case less than the specified strength of the adjacent concrete. Manufacturer shall provide evidence that the material meets the requirements of the COE CRD-C 621 (558). Grout permanently exposed to view shall be non-oxidizing; metallic grout may be used in other locations. 1. Non-shrink grout shall be one of the following or approved equal: Manufacturer Product Gifford-Hill Co. Supreme Master Builders Co. Embeco U.S. Grout Corporation Five Star Grout

2.10 SANDBLASTING MATERIAL

A. Material for sandblasting shall be 16/20 mesh sand. 2.11 HERBICIDE TREATMENT

A. Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection Agency. Provide

granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ciba-Geigy Corp. b. Dow Chemical U.S.A. c. E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Inc. d. FMC Corp. e. Thompson-Hayward Chemical Co. f. U.S. Borax and Chemical Corp.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Areas to be paved shall be compacted and brought to subgrade elevation per soils report before work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of areas to receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section.

B. Existing subgrade material which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material conforming to this Section.

C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be re-compacted per soils report.

D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in completed subgrade, base, or pavement, subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed per soils report.

E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction. Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as required, and re-compacted before placing pavement.

F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.

G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated under this section, and material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this section shall be disposed of off-site.

H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by Soils Engineer. Subgrade shall be approved before installation of gravel base course. Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this section of the specification.

I. Proof-roll subgrade or base surface prepared by others to check for unstable areas and verify need

for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.

J. Herbicide Treatment: Apply chemical weed control agent in strict compliance with manufacturer's

recommended dosages and application instructions. Apply to compacted, dry subgrade prior to installation of base course.

3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to

required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances:

1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from

concrete without damage. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for

"Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.


B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, or other bond-reducing materials. Where

there is delay in placing concrete after reinforcement is in place, bars shall be re inspected and cleaned when necessary.

C. Any bar showing cracks after bending shall be discarded. D. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during

concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and

free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats.

F. After forms have been coated with form release agent, but before concrete is placed, reinforcing

steel anchors shall be securely wired in the exact position called for, and shall be maintained in that position until concrete is placed and compacted. Chair bars and supports shall be provided in a number and arrangement satisfactory to the Architect.

3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct contraction, construction, and isolation joints true to line with faces

perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise. 1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints,

unless indicated otherwise. 2. Make joints, including sawed joints, full depth required and from edge to edge of paving.

B. Contraction Joints: Provide weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as

shown on Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Tooled Joints: Form contraction joints in fresh concrete by grooving and finishing each edge

of joint with a radiused jointer tool. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive

or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into hardened concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before development of random contraction cracks.

3. Inserts: Form contraction joints by inserting pre-molded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strips into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with paving surface. Radius each joint edge with a jointer tool. Carefully remove strips or caps of two-piece assemblies after concrete has hardened. Clean groove of loose debris.

C. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations

where paving operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour, unless paving terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless indicated otherwise. Do not

continue reinforcement through sides of strip paving unless indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete.

D. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch

basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch

below finished surface where joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface when no joint sealant is required.

3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.

4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.


E. Installation of joint fillers and sealants is specified in Section "Joint Sealants." F. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one

half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. G. Where spacing is not shown, locate expansion joints at 10-foot maximum spacing. H. Where plastic "zip strips" are used to construct concrete joints, cut and remove, as a minimum, the

top 1/4 inch of these strips after concrete has cured, and coordinate installation of joint filler, if shown on the Drawings, as specified in Section “ Joint Sealants”.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel,

and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Moisten subgrade or base to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

C. Comply with requirements and with ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing

concrete. D. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or

drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. E. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially

hardened concrete surfaces. F. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding,

or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete complying with ACI 309R. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal

vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.

G. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to form a

smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

H. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement,

submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete.

I. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete

work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly

heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. J. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified when hot

weather conditions exist. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to

control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.


2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface

has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10-foot-long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular texture. 1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across concrete, perpendicular to line

of traffic, to provide a uniform gritty texture finish. 2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across concrete surface

perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform fine line texture finish. 3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating surface 1/16

inch to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. 4. Do not use troweling machines within 12 inches of electrical junction and outlet boxes which

are set to finish flush with concrete slabs. Float and trowel such areas by hand with wood floats and steel trowels, taking care to see that concrete is finished flush with box cover and matches adjacent surfaces.

B. Slip-Resistant Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate finish on

pavement surface in accordance with manufacture’s written instructions 1. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate

manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. 2. After Curing, lightly work surface with a steell wire brush or abrasive stone and water to

expose non-slip aggregate C. Finishing formed surfaces:

1. Curb forms shall leave a smooth face. 2. Remove all fins.

D. Provide steel trowel finish on tops of curbs and flow lines of curbs, gutters and integral curb and

gutters. E. Final Tooling: Tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints formed in fresh concrete with a

jointing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1. Radius: 1/4 inch. 2. Radius: 3/8 inch.

F. Finish surfaces to produce a uniform appearance throughout area involved and throughout adjacent areas with the same treatment.

G. Sandblast finish shall be consistent finish throughout and match approved mock-up. H. Where concrete finishing occurs adjacent to finished metal or other surfaces, particularly where

serrated or indented surfaces occur, remove all traces of cement film before allowing to harden.

I. Apply integral wood float and broom finish to the all concrete pavements and walkways, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 1. After screeding and compacting, finish with a wood float using a circular motion to produce

a uniform texture and finish throughout. 2. For vehicular traffic areas, the finish shall be coarse enough to provide a non-slip surface with a minimum static friction coefficient of 0.6.


3. For pedestrian traffic areas, finish shall be a non-slip surface with a minimum static coefficient of friction of 0.6. a. For ramps, the static coefficient of friction shall be a minimum of 0.8. Ramps are

defined as any sloping path of travel with a slope in the direction of travel of 5.0%, or greater.

4. Tests for coefficient of friction shall be either ASTM C-1028 (field test) or ASTM D-2047 (laboratory test).

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protection and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss

before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete

surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing

compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the

following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with a 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for

curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

E. Spray-apply concrete sealer to all concrete pavement. Comply with sealer manufacturer's

application instructions. 3.8 CURING COLORED CONCRETE

A. Colored concrete shall not, under any circumstances, be cured using water fog misting or ponding, burlap, plastic sheeting, or other wet covering.

B. Curing material and method shall be in strict conformance with manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations.

C. Only if additional protection is absolutely required, the surface should remain uncovered for at least 4 days, after which time new and unwrinkled non-staining reinforced waterproof kraft curing paper may be used.


3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. The Owner will employ a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform

tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include the following: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C

94. a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength

test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes.

b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

d. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless directed otherwise. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.

e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. Test one specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 28 days, and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required.

2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., Architect may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

4. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

B. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24

hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in paving, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests.

C. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be

permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. D. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete when test results

indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: When placing integral colored concrete, arrange for the services of a

qualified technical representative of the color pigment manufacturer, equipped with wet-batch color control test devices to ensure concrete of uniform color and matching approved mock-up.

3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet the

requirements of this Section. Concrete which is not true to line and plane, which is not


thoroughly troweled and properly surfaced as required, which varies in excess of 1/4-inch along a 10-foot straight edge, which is scuffed or has a rough top surface, except where required, or which does not connect properly to adjoining work, does not slope as required for drainage or is not properly cured, will be deemed defective.

1. General: Patch defective areas immediately following form removal. Remove defective concrete to a width and depth necessary for proper patching, but in no case less than 1 inch deep. Make the walls of the cut area perpendicular to the surface and do not feather out the edge. Dampen the patch area and the adjacent area 6 inches around the patch area.

2. Exposed concrete: Prepare a patching mortar of one part Portland cement, adjusted to match the color of the surrounding concrete, and 2-1/2 parts sand with the least water required to produce a workable mass. Re-work this mortar until it is the stiffest consistency that will permit placing. Brush the patch area with a bond of neat cement and water paste and apply patching mortar when the water sheen is off the bond. Strike off the mortar slightly higher than the surrounding surface, let set for 1 hour and finish flush with the surrounding surface.

B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or

defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with Portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement.

When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep

concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKING DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 32 17 23 -1

SECTION 32 17 23

PAINTED PAVING MARKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field application of pavement marking on hot-mix asphalt paving and portland cement concrete paving.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: For each product specified. Include technical data and tested physical and

performance properties. Provide recommended dry film and wet film thickness for each paint product type.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces.

Indicate dedicated handicapped spaces with international graphics symbol. D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that their products comply with the specified

requirements. E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate

their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

F. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling

use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of pavement marking material from one source and by a single manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed pavement marking

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and

bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store pavement-marking materials in a covered, clean, dry, protected location and within

temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a

minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) for oil-based materials, 50 deg F (10 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C).

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 32 18 16.13-1

SECTION 32 18 16.13

PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for the complete installation of a playground protective synthetic grass surfacing system that meets the requirements of ASTM F 1292-09 and IPEMA Certification of conformance as a safe public play surface as indicated on the plans and as specified herein; including components and accessories required for a complete installation, including but not limited to: 1. Acceptance of prepared sub-base. 2. Coordination with related trades to ensure a complete, integrated, and timely installation:

aggregate base course, sub-base material (tested for permeability), grading and compacting, piping and drain components (when required); as provided under its respective trade section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 00 00 00 – Site Preparation

B. Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill

C. Section 31 23 16 – Excavation

D. Section 31 23 23 – Fill

E. Section 32 13 23 – Aggregate Base Course

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials. 1. D1577 - Standard Test Method for Linear Density of Textile Fiber. 2. D5848 - Standard Test Method for Mass Per Unit Area of Pile Yarn Floor Covering. 3. D1338 - Standard Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor Covering. 4. D1682 - Standard Method of Test for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics. 5. D5034 - Standard Test Method of Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab

Test). 6. D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. 7. F1292-09 - Standard Test Method for Impact Attenuation or Critical Fall Height of Surfacing

Materials Under and Around Playground Equipment. 8. D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering

Materials.

B. IPEMA – International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association 1. Public Play Surfacing Certified to ASTM F1292-09 - Standard Test Method for Impact

Attenuation or Critical Fall Height of Surfacing Materials Under and Around Playground Equipment.


A. Completed playground protective synthetic grass surfacing system shall be capable of meeting the following performance requirements:


1. IPEMA Public Play Surfacing Certified.

2. ASTM F1292-09: Impact attenuation. Playground protective surface shall meet performance requirements for the impact attenuation of playground surfacing materials installed within the use zone of playground equipment, as specified by Architect.

3. ASTM D4491: Water permeability test. Synthetic grass surface shall drain at a rate of 250 inches or more, of water per hour.

4. ASTM D1338: Tuft bind. Synthetic grass surfacing shall have a tuft bind, without infill material of 8 pounds or more.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitutions: Other products are acceptable if in compliance with all requirements of these specifications. Submit alternate products to Architect for approval prior to bidding in accordance Section 01 25 13, Product Substitution Procedures. 1. Provide substantiation that proposed system does not violate any other manufacturer's patents,

patents allowed or patents pending. 2. Provide a sample copy of insured, non-prorated warranty and insurance policy information.

B. Comply with Section 01 33 00, Submittals Procedures. Submit for approval prior to fabrication.

C. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts, material safety data sheets (MSDS), brochures,

specifications; preparation and installation instructions and recommendations. 2. Submit fiber manufacturer's name, type of fiber and composition of fiber. 3. Submit shock absorbing pad manufacturer’s name. 4. Submit data in sufficient detail to indicate compliance with the contract documents. 5. Submit manufacturer's instructions for installation. 6. Submit manufacturer’s IPEMA Certificate to indicate compliance with certified public play

surfacing.

D. Samples: Submit samples, illustrating details of finished product in amounts as required by General Requirements, or as requested by Architect.

E. List of existing installations: Submit list including respective Owner’s representative and telephone number.

F. Warranties: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with approved manufacturer.


A. Comply with Section 01 43 00, Quality Assurance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engaged in manufacturing synthetic grass surfacing products for a minimum of fifteen (15) years. 1. The Manufacturer shall be experienced in the manufacturing and installation of specified type

of playground protective synthetic grass surfacing system. This includes use of a ridged monofilament fiber, texturized monofilament fiber, backing, the backing coating, shock absorbing playground pad and the installation method.

2. The Manufacturer shall own and operate its own manufacturing plant. Manufacturing the fiber, tufting of the fibers into the backing materials and coating of the synthetic grass system must be


done in-house by manufacturer. 3. The Manufacturer must hold ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001 certifications

demonstrating its manufacturing efficiency with regards to quality, environment and safety management systems.

4. The Manufacturer must hold IPEMA certification for specified synthetic grass product.

C. Installer/Contractor Qualifications: Company shall specialize in performing the work of this section. 1. The Company shall provide competent workmen skilled in this specified type of playground

protective synthetic grass system installation. 2. The designated Supervisory Personnel on the project shall be certified, in writing by the

manufacturer, as competent in the installation of specified type of synthetic grass system, including gluing seams and proper installation of the shock absorbing playground pad and infill material.

3. The Company shall be certified by the manufacturer and licensed (if required).

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site at time to be determined by Architect. Review methods and procedures related to installation including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss existing conditions and preparatory work performed under other contracts. 2. In addition to the Contractor and the installer, arrange for the attendance of installers affected

by the Work, The Owner’s representative, and the Architect.

E. The Installer/Contractor shall verify special conditions required for the installation of the playground protective synthetic grass system if required.

F. The Installer/Contractor shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies.


A. Comply with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements.

B. Deliver and store components with labels intact and legible.

C. Store materials/components in a secure manner, under cover and elevated above grade.

D. Protect from damage during storage, handling and installation. Protect from damage by other trades.

E. Inspect all delivered materials and products to ensure they are undamaged and in good condition.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the Work with installation of work of related trades as the Work proceeds.

B. Sequence the Work in order to prevent deterioration of the sub-base and the installed system.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 78 00, Closeout Submittals, for Additional Warranty Requirements.

B. The Installer/Contractor shall provide a warranty to the Owner that covers defects in materials and workmanship of the synthetic grass product for a period of eight (8) years from the date of completion. The synthetic grass manufacturer must verify that their representative has inspected the installation and that the work conforms to the manufacturer's requirements. The manufacturer's warranty shall include general wear and damage caused from UV degradation. The warranty shall specifically exclude vandalism, and acts of God beyond the control of the Owner or the manufacturer. The warranty shall be fully third party insured; pre-paid for the entire 8 year term and be non-prorated. The Installer/Contractor shall provide a warranty to the Owner that covers defects in the installation workmanship, and further


warrant that the installation was done in accordance with both the manufacturer's recommendations and any written directives of the manufacturer's representative. The insurance policy must be underwritten by an “AM Best” A rated carrier and must reflect the following values:

1. Pre-Paid 8-year insured warranty.

2. Maximum per claim coverage amount of $32,000,000.

3. Minimum of thirty-two million dollar ($32,000,000) annual aggregate.

4. Must cover full 100% replacement value of total square footage installed.

5. Policies that include self-insurance or self-retention clauses shall not be considered.

6. Policy cannot include any form of deductible amount.

7. Sample policy must be provided at time of bid to prove that policy is in force. A letter from an agent or a sample Certificate of Insurance will not be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND DISTRIBUTORS

A. Approved Manufacturer: FieldTurf USA, Inc. 175 N. Industrial Blvd, Calhoun, GA 30701

B. Approved Distributor: EasyTurf, Inc. 2750 La Mirada Drive, Vista, CA 92051 Contact: Director of Contracting and Specifications at (573) 356-7355.

2.2 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. Playground Protective Synthetic Grass Surfacing system shall consist of the following: 1. Synthetic grass surfacing made with a combination of ridged monofilament polyethylene fibers

and texturized monofilament fibers, tufted into a fibrous, non-perforated, porous backing. 2. Shock absorbing playground pad. 3. Anchoring device to secure perimeter edge of synthetic grass. 4. Infill: Graded dust-free silica sand that partially covers the synthetic grass. Graded dust-free

acrylic coated silica sand may be substituted for silica sand as requested by Architect. 5. Glue, thread, seaming fabric and other materials used to install and mark the synthetic grass.

B. Synthetic grass surfacing system shall have the following properties:

Standard Property Specification ASTM D1577 Fiber Denier 10800 ASTM D1577 Secondary Fiber Denier 5600 ASTM D5823 Pile Height 1.625” ASTM D5793 Stitch Gauge 3/8” ASTM D5848 Pile Weight 65 oz/square yard ASTM D5848 Primary Backing 7 oz/square yard ASTM D5848 Secondary Backing 20 oz/square yard ASTM D5848 Total Weight 92 oz/square yard ASTM D1338 Tuft Bind (Without Infill) 9 lbs ASTM D4491 Turf Permeability 250 inches/hour N/A Infill Component 2.75 lbs/square foot


C. Synthetic grass surfacing product shall consist of soft spined monofilament fibers and texturized monofilament fibers tufted into a primary backing with a secondary backing.

D. Backing: 1. Primary backing shall be a double-layered polypropylene fabric treated with UV inhibitors. 2. Secondary backing shall consist of an application of porous urethane to permanently lock the

fiber tufts in place. 3. Perforated (with punched holes), backed turf is unacceptable. 4. Turf with attached scrim in lieu of porous urethane is unacceptable.

E. Primary fiber shall be 10,800 denier, low friction, and UV-resistant fiber measuring not less than 1.625 inches high. Secondary fiber shall be 5,600 denier.

F. Shock absorbing playground pad shall be manufactured from recycled, non-contaminated postindustrial cross link, closed cell polyethylene foam. Pad should drain vertically and laterally without absorbing water or other liquids. Shock absorbing pad in 2.125” and a Double Layer of 2.125” pad measuring a total of 4.250” to meet specified use zone critical fall height requirements as requested by Architect.

G. Synthetic grass surfacing shall be anchored into an exterior grade nailer strip: pressure treated lumber or approved composite board.

Infill materials shall be approved by the manufacturer. 1. Infill shall consist of graded dust-free silica sand. Graded dust-free acrylic coated silica sand or

volcanic ash may be substituted for silica sand as requested by Architect.

Glue and seaming fabric, for seaming of synthetic grass shall be as recommended by the synthetic grass manufacturer.

2.3 QUALITY CONTROL IN MANUFACTURING

A. The manufacturer shall own and operate its own manufacturing plant in North America. Both tufting of the fibers into the backing materials and coating of the turf system must be done in-house by the synthetic grass manufacturer. Outsourcing of either is unacceptable.

B. The manufacturer shall have full-time certified in-house inspectors at their manufacturing plant that are experts with industry standards.

C. The manufacturer’s full-time in-house certified inspectors shall perform pre-tufting fiber testing on tensile strength, elongation, tenacity, and denier, upon receipt of fiber spools from fiber manufacturer.

D. Primary backing shall be inspected by the manufacturer’s full-time certified in-house inspectors before tufting begins.

E. The manufacturer’s full-time in-house certified inspectors shall verify “pick count”, yarn density in relation to the backing, to ensure the accurate amount of face yarn per square inch.

F. The manufacturer’s full-time, in-house, certified inspectors shall perform product inspections at all levels of production including during the tufting process and at the final stages before the synthetic grass is loaded onto the truck for delivery.

G. The manufacturer shall have its own, in-house laboratory where samples of synthetic grass are retained and analyzed, based on standard industry tests, performed by full-time, in-house, certified inspectors.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that all sub-base leveling is complete prior to installation.

B. Installer/Contractor shall examine the surface to receive the shock absorbing playground pad and accept the sub-base planarity in writing prior to the beginning of installation. 1. Acceptance is dependent upon the Owner’s test results indicating compaction and planarity are

in compliance with manufacturer’s specifications. 2. The surface shall be accepted by Installer as “clean” as installation commences and shall be

maintained in that condition throughout the process.

C. Compaction of the aggregate base shall be a minimum of 90%, in accordance with ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor procedure); and the surface tolerance shall not exceed 0-1/4 inch over 10 feet and 0-1/2 inch from design grade.

D. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.

E. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

F. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prior to the beginning of installation, inspect the sub-base for tolerance to grade.

B. Sub-base acceptance shall be subject to receipt of test results (by others) for compaction and planarity that sub-base is in compliance with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.

C. When requested by Architect, installed sub-base shall be tested for porosity prior to the installation of the synthetic grass system. A sub base that drains poorly is an unacceptable substrate.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. The finished surface shall appear as mowed grass with no irregularities and shall be required to meet applicable ASTM, CPSC and ADA standards for the maximum fall height, as requested by the Architect.

B. The installation shall be performed in full compliance with approved Shop Drawings.

C. Only trained technicians, skilled in the installation of synthetic grass systems working under the direct supervision of the approved installer supervisors, shall undertake any cutting, sewing, gluing, shearing, top-dressing or brushing operations.

D. The designated Supervisory personnel on the project must be certified, in writing by the manufacturer, as competent in the installation of this material, including gluing seams and proper installation of the Infill material.

E. Install at location(s) indicated, to comply with final shop drawings, manufacturers’/installer’s instructions.

F. The Installer/Contractor shall strictly adhere to specified procedures. Any variance from these requirements shall be provided in writing, by the manufacturer’s on-site representative, and submitted to the Architect and/or Owner, verifying that the changes do not in any way affect the Warranty. Infill materials shall be approved by the manufacturer and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard procedures.


G. Shock absorbing playground pad shall be installed directly over the properly prepared aggregate base. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid disturbing the aggregate base, both in regard to compaction and planarity. 1. Repair and properly compact any disturbed areas of the aggregate base as recommended by

manufacturer.

H. Playground protective synthetic grass system shall be installed directly over the shock absorbing playground pad. 1. Seams shall be flat, tight, and permanent with no separation or fraying.

Anchoring Device: 2. Secure edges around perimeter to nailer board material, and where noted on drawings, at a

maximum of every 12” with staples or spikes per manufacturer’s written instructions.

I. Infill Materials: 1. Infill materials shall be applied in thin lifts. The turf shall be brushed as the material is applied.

The infill material shall be installed to a depth determined by the manufacturer. 2. Infill material shall be installed in a systematic order. 3. Infill materials shall be installed to fill the voids between the fibers and allow the fibers to

remain vertical and non-directional. The Infill installation consists of graded dust-free silica sand. Graded dust-free acrylic coated silica sand may be substituted for silica sand as requested by Architect.

4. The Infill materials shall be installed to a depth of approximately ¾”. Infill density shall consist of 2.75 pounds of graded silica sand per square foot.

5. The Installer/Contractor shall keep area clean throughout the project and clear of debris. Upon completion of installation, the finished project shall be inspected by the installation crew and an installation supervisor.

3.4 PROTECTION

Protect completed playground protective synthetic grass surfacing system throughout construction process until project completed.

END OF SECTION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products specifically formulated for pavement marking by one of the following: 1. Dunn-Edwards Paints (Dunn-Edwards). 2. Sinclair Paint (Sinclair). 3. Sherwin Williams.

2.2 PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIALS

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-115, Type I, or AASHTO M-248, Type N, and suitable for use on both hot-mix asphalt and portland cement concrete paving.

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, water-base emulsion, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-

1952, and suitable for use on both hot-mix asphalt and portland cement concrete paving. Provide material having a volatile organic compound (VOC) content of 250 g/L, or less.

C. Pavement-Marking Paint: Epoxy fortified vinyl/acrylic or acrylic-emulsion water-based traffic paint

suitable for use on both hot-mix asphalt and portland cement concrete paving. Provide material having a volatile organic compound (VOC) content of 250 g/L, or less. 1. Colors:

a. As indicated. b. Color: White (for all parking stalls other than handicapped parking, and for traffic and

lane marking). c. Color: Yellow. d. Color: Red (for "No Parking" areas as shown). e. Color: Blue equal to Color No. 15090 per Federal Standard 595 B (for pavement

markings identifying disabled parking spaces). 2. Gloss: Flat. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dunn-Edwards: Vin-L-Stripe W 801 Series. b. Sinclair: Traffic Paint 160 (white), 161 (red), 162 (yellow), and 166 (blue). c. Sherman Williams: Setfast Latex Traffic Marking Paints and Setfast Acrylic

Waterborne Traffic Marking Paint. d. Sherman Williams: Setfast Quick Dry Latex Traffic Paint.

D. Glass Beads: AASHTO M-247 or California State Specification 8010-71L-22. E. Surface Cleaning Material: Cleaning agent or agents suitable for removing grease, oil, and other

contaminants that will not damage asphalt or portland cement concrete paving and are acceptable to pavement marking paint manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with

Architect. B. Allow paving to cure for a minimum of 30 days before starting pavement marking. Comply with

recommendations of the pavement marking paint manufacturer for longer cure periods. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. Ensure all surfaces indicated to

receive pavement marking are clean and free from grease, oil, concrete sealers and curing agents, and other contaminants that might interfere with paint adhesion. 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for use of special cleaning agents.


2. For removal of substances that would interfere with paint adhesion use methods recommended by the paint manufacturer if applicable, or methods that will completely remove the substance without damaging or discoloring the underlying pavement substrate.

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated

with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm).

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated

with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates based on substrate type and cure conditions. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended application rates. 1. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72

kg/L).

E. Comply with paint manufacturer's maximum drying time requirements before allowing traffic in order to prevent undue softening of bitumen and pick-up, displacement, or discoloration of pavement marking by vehicular traffic.

F. Paint pavement, curbs, and other surfaces as shown on the Drawings. Painting shall be straight,

uniform, exact, and sharp without blobs at the start and finish. Edges shall be even, accurate, symmetrical, and free of fuzziness. 1. Edge Tolerance: 1/2 inch in 20 feet, maximum.

G. Apply markings for disabled access symbols in accordance with State of California Building Code,

Part 2, Title 24, CCR. Painted lines and marking on pavement shall be 3” minimum wide. Parking spaces for the disabled shall be marked according to CBC Section 1129B.5. Tactile warning lines shall be in conformance to CBC Section 1133B.8.3 and 1133B.8.4.

H. Where work consists of modifications of, or additions to existing pavement marking, match existing

color and line width.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Touch up pavement markings not complying with requirements of this Section by painting out the errors with permanently opaque paint of the same color as the substrate pavement. 1. Block out and eliminate all traces of splashed, tracked, and spilled pavement marking paint

from the background surfaces. 2. Paint over deviations in marking edges exceeding allowable tolerance and apply new

marking meeting specified requirements. B. The Owner reserves the right to require sandblast removal of extensive defective pavement

marking and application of new marking meeting specified requirements at no additional cost.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide traffic cones, barricades, and other devices needed to protect the pavement marking until it is sufficiently dry to withstand traffic without damage.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CHAIN LINK FENCES PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT AND GATES GENERAL DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 32 31 13-1

SECTION 32 31 13

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES GENERAL

1.1 General: A. Provide chain link fences and gates as complete units by a single supply source including

necessary erection accessories, fittings, and fastenings. The scope of work includes accessories as needed to complete the work.

B. Submittals: Submit manufacturer’s technical specifications and installation instructions for fence framing, fabric, gates and accessories. Submit samples of fence fabric showing each finish. 1. Submit engineering calculations to justify footing sizes for all fences and gates over 8’

high, including loads imposed by privacy slats, and screen cloth, etc. C. Standards: Comply with the requirements of the following:

1. ASTM A569-Steel, Carbon, Hot –Rolled Sheet and Strip, commercial quality. ASTM F567 practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence.

2. SSPWC-Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition. 3. CLFMI-Chain Link Fence Manufacturer’s Institute. 4. Chapter 19A, California Building Code.

D. Concrete: 1. Mix Designs: Contractor shall submit mix designs stamped and signed by a licensed

engineer in accordance with the specification, for the mix to be used in the project. Submit at least 15 days prior to start of concrete work. Do not begin until mix design is approved by Architect, and/or testing lab.

2. Licensed weighmaster to positively identify materials as to quantity and certify to each load by a batch ticket. Batch tickets with load identified thereon shall be transmitted to the project superintendent, and forwarded to the Architect. Superintendent shall not accept the load without a load ticket identifying the mix and will keep a daily record of placements, identifying each truck, its load and time of receipt, and approximate location of deposit in the structure and transmit a copy of the daily record to the Architect. At the end of the project, the Contractor shall furnish an affidavit signed by the Weighmaster to the Architect certifying that all concrete furnished conforms in every particular to proportions established by mix designs.

E. Warranty: Provide two (2) year warranty against rusting or breakdown of finish. Provide adjustments as needed to assure continued smooth operation of gates.

1.2 Products: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide galvanized steel fencing and

fabric by one of the following or an approved equal. 1. Allied Tube and Conduit Corp 2. Anchor Fence, Inc. 3. Cyclone Fence Div./USX Corp. 4. Master Halco


B. Chain Link Fence Fabric: Conforming to ASTM A 392, Class C2 zinc coating, 2.00 ounces minimum per square foot of uncoated wire surface, hot-dipped galvanized after weaving, and top and bottom edges knuckled.

1. Fabric for perimeter fencing and interior fencing shall be 9 gage woven wire with 1 inch mesh.

2. Fences 12 feet high or less shall be furnished with single width fabric. 3. Installed fence fabric shall be free from barbs, icicles, or other projections and installed fence fabric with such defects will be deemed defective Work.

C. Posts, Top Rails, Brace Rails and Gate Frames: Standard weight, galvanized, welded or seamless steel pipe conforming to ASTM F 1083, with a minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi. Embed posts into footing 6 inches less than the depth of the footing unless noted otherwise on drawings.

D. Post Caps: Malleable iron, ASTM F 626, , designed to fit snugly over posts with a minimum projection of 1-1/2 inches below top of posts. Post caps shall be manufactured with a curved top.

E. Eye Tops: Malleable iron, ASTM F 626, , designed to fit over line posts, and for through passage of top rail.

F. Expansion Sleeve Couplings for Top Rails: Steel, 6 inches long, designed to fit tightly on inside of rail, fitted with raised center.

G. Rail Ends for Top Rails and Brace Rails: Malleable iron, ASTM F 626, , with holes to receive 3/8 inch bolts for securing to rail end bands.

H. Tension Bands and Bands for Securing Rail Ends: Mild steel flats, at least 11 gage x one inch, tension bands in gates shall be 11 gage by 1 inch. Bolts for use with tension bands and rail end bands shall be 3/8 inch by 1 ½-inch.

I. Tension Bars: Mild steel flats at least 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch. J. Tension Wire for Installation at Bottom of Fabric: 6 gage steel spring wire, conforming to

requirements of AISI Steel Products Manual, Carbon Steel Wire, Section 16, merchant quality, galvanized, soft temper with Type I coating. Wavy type wire is not acceptable.

K. Turnbuckles for installation with Tension Wires: Eye and hook type, drop forged steel, right and left hand threads, at least 3/8 inch screw diameter with at least 4 ½-inches of take-up.

L. Tie Wire: Aluminum ties 6 gage for fastening fabric to posts, top rails and brace rails. At bottom tension wire 9 gage galvanized hog rings shall be installed.

M. Finish of Metal Parts: Post caps, couplings, rail ends, tension bands, tension bars, turnbuckles, rivets, bolts, and other metal parts and fittings shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication, except bolts, which may be galvanized or cadmium-plated. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products, and ASTM F 626Specification for Fence Fittings.

N. Paints for Refurbishing Existing Fence Posts, Rails, and Accessories: As required to provide the galvanized color of a new installation.


1.3 Execution: A. Installation: Installation of fencing and gates shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 567

which are not intended to preclude any practice that has a proven performance equal to or better under varying conditions. Nor do they purport to address all of the safety problems involved. It is the responsibility of the contractor to establish the appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations. Also, follow the written instruction of the fencing manufacturer to provide secure, aligned installation.

B. Operation: Proper gate operation and design requires consideration of opening direction, grade clearance, and possible obstructions.

C. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts.

D. Work areas shall be left neat and free of any debris caused by the erection of the fence. All work shall be performed in a safe and orderly fashion.

END OF SECTION

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 32 84 00-1

SECTION 328400

LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. It is the intent of the specifications and drawings that the finished system is complete in every respect and shall be ready for operation satisfactory to the District.

B. The work shall include all materials, labor, services, transportation, and equipment necessary to perform the work as indicated on the drawings, in these specifications, and as necessary to complete the contract.

1.2 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS

A. All offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc. which may be required are not shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting the work and plan the work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc. as may be required to meet such conditions. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting, and architectural features.

B. All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. When an item is shown on the plans but not shown on the specifications or vice versa, it shall be deemed to be as shown on both. The Landscape Architect shall have final authority for clarification.

C. The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect as soon as detected. In the event this notification is not performed, the Irrigation Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary.


A. Provide at least one English speaking person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and who shall direct all work performed under this section.

B. Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturer of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications.

C. All local, municipal, and state laws, rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations of the same. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and drawings shall take precedence.

D. All materials supplied for this project shall be new and free from any defects. All defective materials shall be replaced immediately at no additional cost to District.


E. Secure the required licenses and permits including payments of charges and fees, give required notices to public authorities and verify permits secured or arrangements made by others affecting the work of this section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Water Pressure Test 1. After award of contract and before any irrigation system materials are ordered from suppliers or

delivered to the job site, submit to the District a written verification of the existing water pressure on the project at each of the points of connection shown.

2. The water pressure test shall be performed to measure the dynamic water pressure at the point of connection at the maximum flow rate of the proposed irrigation system as shown on the point of connection note. Dynamic water pressure is when water is flowing through the point of connection. Static water pressure readings when water is not flowing, are not acceptable.

3. Written dynamic water pressure test confirmation shall be made on the contractor’s letterhead and include the flow rate during the test, the recorded water pressure, the date of the test and the time of the test.

B. Material List: 1. After award of contract and before any irrigation system materials are ordered from suppliers or

delivered to the job site, submit to the District a complete list of all irrigation system materials, or processes proposed to be furnished and installed as part of this contract.

2. The submittal materials list shall include the following information: a. A title sheet with the job name, the contractor’s name, contractor’s address and telephone

number, submittal date and submittal number. b. An index sheet showing the item number (e.g. 1,2,3, etc.); an item description (e.g.

sprinkler head); the manufacturer’s name (e.g. Hunter Industries); the item model number (e.g. I-40-ADV/36V); and the page(s) in the submittal set that contain the catalog cuts.

c. The catalog cuts shall be one or two pages copied from the most recent manufacturer’s catalog that indicate the product submitted. Do not submit parts lists, exploded diagrams, price lists or other extra information.

d. The catalog cuts shall clearly indicate the manufacturer’s name and the item model number. The item model number, all specified options and specified sizes shall be circled on the catalog cuts.

e. Submittals for equipment indicated on the legend without manufacturer names, or “as approved”, shall contain the manufacturer, Class or Schedule, ASTM numbers and/or other certifications as indicated in these specifications.

3. Submittal materials list format requirements: a. Submittals shall be provided as one complete package for the project in electronic pdf

format. Multiple partial submittals will not be reviewed. b. Submittal package shall have all pages numbered in the lower right hand corner. Page

numbers shall correspond with submittal index. c. Re-submitted packages must be revised to include only the equipment being re-submitted.

Equipment previously reviewed and accepted shall not be re-submitted in the materials list/index sheet or in the catalog cut sheet package.

C. Substitutions: If the Irrigation Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications, he may do so by providing the following information to the Landscape Architect or District's authorized representative for approval. 1. Provide a written statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. 2. Provide catalog cut sheets, technical data, and performance information for each substitute item. 3. Provide in writing the difference in installed price if the item is accepted.

D. The Landscape Architect or District’s authorized representative will allow no substitutions without prior written acceptance


E. No substitutions of pump manufacturers, distributors or assemblies will be accepted.

F. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of his liability under the guarantee. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee.

G. The Landscape Architect or District’s authorized representative will not review the submittal package unless provided in the format described above.

1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Verify and be familiar with the locations, size and detail of points of connection provided as the source of water and electrical supply connection to the irrigation system.

B. Irrigation design is based on the available static water pressure shown on the drawings. Contractor shall verify static water on the project prior to the start of construction. Should a discrepancy exist, notify the Landscape Architect and District's authorized representative prior to beginning construction.

C. Prior to cutting into the soil, locate all cables, conduits, sewer septic tanks, and other utilities as are commonly encountered underground, and take proper precautions not to damage or disturb such improvements. If a conflict exists between such obstacles and the proposed work, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Landscape Architect and District who will arrange for relocations. The Contractor will proceed in the same manner if a rock layer or any other such conditions are encountered.

D. Protect all existing utilities and features to remain on and adjacent to the project site during construction. Repair, at its own cost, all damage resulting from his operations or negligence.

E. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor for installation of required sleeving as shown on the plans prior to paving operations.

F. Verify and be familiar with the existing irrigation systems in areas adjacent to and within the Project area of work.

G. Protect all existing irrigation systems, in areas adjacent to and within the project area of work, from damage due to his operations.

H. Notify District’s Representative if any existing system is temporarily shut off, capped or modified. Provide 48-hour notice, prior to turning off or modifying any existing irrigation system.

I. Repair or replace all existing irrigation systems, in areas adjacent to and within the project area of work, damaged by the construction of this project. Adjacent irrigation systems shall be made completely operational and provide complete coverage of the existing landscaped areas. All repairs shall be complete to the satisfaction of the District’s Representative.

J. Provide bore holes under any existing pavement or paving encountered for the required lateral, mainline and low voltage control wire sleeving. Bore holes under 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be made with a BulletMole® underground boring tool as manufactured by Dimension Tools, LLC (Contact telephone number (888)-650-5554 or at www.bulletmole.com). Bore holes larger than 2 inches in diameter shall be made with an approved mechanical boring tool. No air jacking or hydraulic boring of any kind shall be allowed.

1.6 INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall permit the Landscape Architect and District's authorized representative to visit and inspect at all times any part of the work and shall provide safe access for such visits.

B. Where the specifications require work to be tested by the Contractor, it shall not be covered over until accepted by the Landscape Architect, District's authorized representative, and/or governing agencies.

http://www.bulletmole.com/


The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect, District, and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance, where and when the work is ready for testing. Should any work be covered without testing or acceptance, it shall be, if so ordered, uncovered at the Contractor's expense.

C. Inspections will be required for the following at a minimum: 1. Final inspection prior to start of maintenance period.

D. Site observations and testing will not commence without the field record drawings as prepared by the Irrigation Contractor. Record drawings must be complete and up to date for each site visit.

E. Work that fails testing and is not accepted will be retested. Hourly rates and expenses of the Landscape Architect, District's authorized representative, and governing agencies for re-inspection or retesting will be paid by the Irrigation Contractor at no additional expense to District.

1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Use all means necessary to protect irrigation system materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installation work and materials of all other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the acceptance of the Landscape Architect and District and at no additional cost to the District.

B. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing plastic pipe and fittings under cover until ready to install. Transport plastic pipe only on a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lay flat to avoid undue bending and concentrated external load.

1.8 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL

A. Dispose of waste, trash, and debris in accordance with applicable laws and ordinances and as prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction. Bury no such waste material and debris on the site. Burning of trash and debris will not be permitted. Remove and dispose of rubbish and debris at frequent intervals or when ordered to do so by the District's authorized representative.

B. At the time of completion the entire site will be cleared of tools, equipment, rubbish and debris which shall be disposed of off-site in a legal disposal area.

1.9 TURNOVER ITEMS

A. Record Drawings: 1. Record accurately on one set of drawings all changes in the work constituting departures from

the original contract drawings and the actual final installed locations of all required components as shown below.

2. The record drawings shall be prepared to the satisfaction of the District. Prior to final inspection of work, submit record drawings to the Landscape Architect or District's authorized representative.

3. All record drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD 2018 drafting software and the original irrigation drawings as a base. No manual drafted record drawings shall be acceptable. The Contractor may obtain digital base files from the Landscape Architect or District's authorized representative.

4. If the Contractor is unable to provide the AutoCAD drafting necessary for the record drawings the irrigation designer does provide record drawing drafting as a separate service.

5. Prior to final inspection of work, submit record drawings plotted onto vellum sheets for review by the Landscape Architect or District's authorized representative. After acceptance by the Landscape Architect, City Inspector or District’s authorized representative re-plot the record drawings onto reproducible Mylar sheets. The Contractor shall also provide record drawing information on a digital AutoCAD Release 2018 drawing file. All digital files shall be provided on a compact disc (CD) clearly marked with the project name, file descriptions and date.


a. Record drawing information and dimensions shall be collected on a day-to-day basis during the installation of the pressure mainline to fully indicate all routing locations and pipe depths. Locations for all other irrigation equipment shall be collected prior to the final inspection of the work.

b. Two dimensions from two permanent points of reference such as buildings, sidewalks, curbs, streetlights, hydrants, etc. shall be shown for each piece of irrigation equipment shown below. Where multiple components are installed with no reasonable reference point between the components, dimensioning may be made to the irrigation equipment. All irrigation symbols shall be clearly shown matching the irrigation legend for the drawings. All lettering on the record drawings shall be minimum 1/8 inch in size.

6. Show locations and depths of the following items: a. Point of connection (including water POC, backflow devices, master control valves, flow

sensors, etc.) b. Routing of sprinkler pressure main lines (dimensions shown at a maximum of 100 feet

along routing) c. Isolation valves d. Automatic remote control valves (indicate station number and size) e. Quick coupling valves f. Drip air relief and flush valves g. Routing of control wires where separate from irrigation mainline h. Irrigation controllers (indicate controller number and station count) i. Related equipment (as may be directed)

B. Controller Charts: 1. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller. Chart shall show the area covered by

the particular controller. The areas covered by the individual control valves shall be indicated using colored highlighter pens. A minimum of six individual colors shall be used for the controller chart unless less than six control valves are indicated.

2. Landscape Architect or District's authorized representative must approve record drawings before controller charts are prepared.

3. The chart is to be a reduced copy of the actual "record" drawing. In the event the controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to a readable size.

4. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils in thickness.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Two individually bound copies of operation and maintenance manuals shall be delivered to the

Landscape Architect or District's authorized representative at least 10 calendar days prior to final inspection. The manuals shall describe the material installed and the proper operation of the system.

2. Each complete, bound manual shall include the following information: 3. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, duration of guarantee period,

list of equipment including names and addresses of local manufacturer representatives. a. Operating and maintenance instructions for all equipment. b. Spare parts lists and related manufacturer information for all equipment.

D. Equipment: 1. Supply as a part of this contract the following items:

a. Two (2) wrenches for disassembly and adjustment of each type of sprinkler head used in the irrigation system.

b. Three 30-inch sprinkler keys for manual operation of control valves. c. Two quick coupler keys with a 1" bronze hose bib, bent nose type with hand wheel and two

coupler lid keys. d. One valve box cover key or wrench. e. Six extra sprinkler heads of each size and type. f. For specified ball valves if required: One (1) 5-foot long valve handle, to fit the specified

ball valves.


2. The above equipment shall be turned over to District's authorized representative at the final inspection.

1.10 COMPLETION

A. At the time of the pre-maintenance period inspection, the Landscape Architect, District's authorized representative, and governing agencies will inspect the work, and if not accepted, will prepare a list of items to be completed by the Contractor. Punch list to be checked off by contractor and submitted to Landscape Architect or District’s authorized representative prior to any follow-up meeting. This checked off list to indicate that all punch list items have been completed. At the time of the post-maintenance period or final inspection the work will be re-inspected and final acceptance will be in writing by the Landscape Architect, District's authorized representative, and governing agencies.

B. The District's authorized representative shall have final authority on all portions of the work.

C. After the system has been completed, the Contractor shall instruct District's authorized representative in the operation and maintenance of the irrigation system and shall furnish a complete set of operating and maintenance instructions.

D. Any settling of trenches which may occur during the one-year period following acceptance shall be repaired to the District's satisfaction by the Contractor without any additional expense to the District. Repairs shall include the complete restoration of all damage to planting, paving or other improvements of any kind as a result of the work.

1.11 GUARANTEE

A. The entire sprinkler system, including all work done under this contract, shall be unconditionally guaranteed against all defects and fault of material and workmanship, including settling of backfilled areas below grade, for a period of one (1) year following the filing of the Notice of Completion.

B. Should any problem with the irrigation system be discovered within the guarantee period, it shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional expense to District within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of written notice from District. When the nature of the repairs as determined by the District constitute an emergency (i.e. broken pressure line) the District may proceed to make repairs at the Contractor's expense. Any and all damages to existing improvement resulting either from faulty materials or workmanship, or from the necessary repairs to correct same, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the District by the Contractor, all at no additional cost to the District.

C. Guarantee shall be submitted on Contractors own letterhead as follows: GUARANTEE FOR SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM We hereby guarantee that the sprinkler irrigation system we have furnished and installed is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse, or neglect excepted. We agree to repair or replace any defective material during the period of one year from date of filing of the Notice of Completion and also to repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the District. We shall make such repairs or replacements within 10 calendar days following written notification by the District. In the event of our failure to make such repairs or replacements within the time specified after receipt of written notice from District, we authorize the District to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense and we will pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. PROJECT NAME: PROJECT LOCATION: CONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS:


TELEPHONE: SIGNED: DATE:

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 SUMMARY

A. Use only new materials of the manufacturer, size and type shown on the drawings and specifications. Materials or equipment installed or furnished that do not meet Landscape Architect's, District's, or governing agencies standards will be rejected and shall be removed from the site at no expense to the District.

2.2 PIPE

A. Pressure supply line between the water meter and the backflow prevention device shall be type K copper, one size larger than backflow device.

B. Backflow prevention assemblies, and all other above grade assemblies, shall be constructed of threaded brass pipe and threaded brass fittings the same size as the backflow device, unless otherwise directed.

C. Pressure supply lines 2 inches in diameter and up to 3 inches in diameter downstream of backflow prevention unit shall be Class 315 solvent weld PVC. Piping shall conform to ASTM D2241.

D. Non-pressure lines 3/4 inch in diameter and larger downstream of the remote control valve shall be SCH 40 solvent weld PVC conforming to ASTM D1785.

E. Recycled water PVC pipe to be color-coded purple in color marked on two sides with recycled water warning statements “Caution-Recycled Water”. Recycled water piping must be accepted by the local recycled water governing agencies.

2.3 METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Brass pipe shall be 85 percent red brass, ANSI, IPS Standard 125 pounds, Schedule 40 screwed pipe.

B. Fittings shall be medium brass, screwed 125-pound class.

C. Copper pipe and fittings shall be Type "K" sweat soldered, or brazed as indicated on the drawings.

2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe shall be marked continuously with manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, schedule or class, PVC type and grade, National Sanitation Foundation approval, Commercial Standards designation, and date of extrusion.

B. All plastic pipe shall be extruded of an improved PVC virgin pipe compound in accordance with ASTM D2672, ASTM D2241 or ASTM D1785.

C. All solvent weld PVC fittings shall be standard weight Schedule 40 (and Schedule 80 where specified on the irrigation detail sheet, all mainline fittings shall be Schedule 80 PVC) and shall be injection molded of an improved virgin PVC fitting compound. Slip PVC fittings shall be the "deep socket"


bracketed type. Threaded plastic fittings shall be injection molded. All tees and ells shall be side gated. All fittings shall conform to ASTM D2464 and ASTM D2466.

D. All threaded nipples shall be standard weight Schedule 80 with molded threads and shall conform to ASTM D1785.

E. All solvent cementing of plastic pipe and fittings shall be a two-step process, using primer and solvent cement applied per the manufacturer's recommendations. Cement shall be of a fluid consistency, not gel-like or ropy. Solvent cementing shall be in conformance with ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855.

F. When connection is plastic to metal, female adapters shall be hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench. Joint compound shall be non-lead base Teflon paste, tape, or equal.

G. All pressure mainlines installed with solvent weld PVC fittings shall be installed with concrete thrust blocking at all directional changes in the mainline routing. Concrete thrust blocking shall not be required when ductile iron fittings and mechanical restraints are specified.

2.5 VALVES

A. Gate Valves: 1. Gate valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. 2. Gate valves shall be constructed of a bronze body, gate and stem. Gate valves shall have

threaded connections. 3. All gate valves shall have a minimum working pressure of not less than 150 PSI and shall

conform to AWWA standards.

B. Quick Coupler Valves: 1. Quick coupler valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. 2. Quick coupler valves shall be brass with a wall thickness guaranteed to withstand normal

working pressure of 150 psi without leakage. Valves shall have 1” female threads opening at base, with two-piece body. Valves to be operated only with a coupler key, designed for that purpose. Coupler key is inserted into valve and a positive, watertight connection shall be made between the coupler key and valve.

3. Vinyl quick coupler cover to be purple in color with the words “Warning-Recycled Water-Do Not Drink” permanently marked on lid.

C. Automatic Control Valves: 1. Automatic control valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. 2. Automatic control valves shall be electrically operated. 3. Provide Christy's valve ID tags for each remote control valve with valve number.

2.6 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes shall be fabricated from a durable, weather-resistant plastic material resistant to sunlight and chemical action of soils.

B. The valve box cover shall be purple in color and secured with a hidden latch mechanism or bolts.

C. Valve box extensions shall be by the same manufacturer as the valve box.

D. The plastic irrigation valve box cover shall be an overlapping type.

E. Automatic control valve, master valve, and flow sensor boxes shall be 17"x11"x12" ‘nominal’ rectangular size. Valve boxes for drip valve assemblies shall be Jumbo valve boxes size as required to fit assemblies. Valve box covers shall be marked "RCV" with the valve identification number, or “MV”, “FS” "heat branded" onto the cover in 1-1/4 inch high letters / numbers.


F. Quick coupler and ball valve boxes shall be 10" circular size. Valve box covers shall be marked with "QCV" or “BV” "heat branded" onto the cover in 1-1/4 inch high letters.

G. Valve box cover shall be purple in color and permanently marked (attached tags are not acceptable) on valve box cover plate with the words “Warning-Recycled Water-Do Not Drink”.

2.7 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER

A. Automatic controller shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

B. Controller enclosure shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

C. Controller shall be grounded according to local codes using equipment of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings; or as required by local codes and ordinances.

2.8 ELECTRICAL

A. All electrical equipment shall be NEMA Type 3, waterproofed for exterior installations.

B. All electrical work shall conform to local codes and ordinances.

2.9 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING

A. Remote control wire shall be direct-burial AWG-UF type, size as indicated on the drawings, and in no case smaller than 14 gauge.

B. Connections shall of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

C. Common wires shall be white in color. Control wires shall be red (where two or more controllers are used, the control wires shall be a different color for each controller. These colors shall be noted on the "Record Drawings" plans located on controller door).

D. Ground wires shall be green in color or bare copper and in no case smaller than 6 gauge.

2.10 IRRIGATION HEADS, DRIP EMITTERS, AND INLINE DRIP TUBING

A. Irrigation heads, drip emitters, and inline drip tubing shall be of the manufacturer, size, type, with radius of throw, operating pressure, and discharge rate indicated on the drawings.

B. Irrigation heads, drip emitters, and inline drip tubing shall be used as indicated on the drawings.

C. Irrigation heads shall have purple recycled water warning cover.

2.11 DRIP IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT

A. Drip tubing equipment such as flush valves, wye strainers, and pressure regulators shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

A. Landscape Fabric: 1. Landscape fabric for valve box assemblies shall be 5.0- oz. weight woven polypropylene weed

barrier. Landscape fabric shall have a burst strength of 225 PSI, a puncture strength of 60 lbs. and capable of water flow of 12 gallons per minute per square foot.

2. Type: DeWitt Pro 5 Weed Barrier or approved equal.


B. Equipment such as flow sensors, flush valves, wye strainers, and master valves shall be of the manufacturer, size and type indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Inspections: 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify

that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that irrigation system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and

regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect or District's authorized

representative. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all discrepancies have been

resolved.

C. Grades: 1. Before starting work, carefully check all grades to determine that work may safely proceed,

keeping within the specified material depths with respect to finish grade. 2. Final grades shall be accepted by the Engineer before work on this section will be allowed to

begin.

D. Field Measurements: 1. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with

the original design. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all irrigation materials with all other work.

2. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions prior to proceeding with work under this section.

3. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities, which are caused by his operations or neglect.

E. Diagrammatic Intent: 1. The drawings are essentially diagrammatic. The size and location of equipment and fixtures are

drawn to scale where possible. Provide offsets in piping and changes in equipment locations as necessary to conform with structures and to avoid obstructions or conflicts with other work at no additional expense to District.

F. Layout: 1. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and location

of sprinkler heads, valves, backflow preventer, and automatic controller. 2. Layout irrigation system and make minor adjustments required due to differences between site

and drawings. Where piping is shown on drawings under paved areas, but running parallel and adjacent to planted areas, install the piping in the planted areas.

G. Water Supply: 1. Connections to, or the installation of, the water supply shall be at the locations shown on the

drawings. Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at no additional expense to District.

H. Electrical Service: 1. Connections to the electrical supply shall be at the locations shown on the drawings. Minor

changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at no additional expense to District. 2. Contractor shall make electrical connections to the irrigation controller. Electrical power source


to controller locations shall be provided by others. 3. Contractor shall make electrical connections to the irrigation controller.

3.2 TRENCHING

A. Excavations shall be straight with vertical sides, even grade, and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on drawings to the depths below finished grade and as noted. Where lines occur under paved area, these dimensions shall be considered below subgrade.

B. Provide minimum cover of 18 inches on pressure supply lines 2 ½ inches and smaller.

C. Provide minimum cover of 18 inches for control wires within planters.

D. Provide minimum cover of 24 inches for control wires within sleeves below paving.

E. Provide minimum cover of 36 inches on pressure supply lines under vehicular travel ways.

F. Provide minimum cover of 12 inches for non-pressure lines.

G. Pipes installed in a common trench shall have a 4-inch minimum space between pipes.

3.3 THRUST BLOCKS

A. Thrust blocks must be constructed of Class “B” concrete.

B. Thrust blocks shall be poured against undisturbed site soil.

C. PVC fitting joints shall be kept free of concrete. Do not encase fitting in concrete.

D. Thrust blocking shall be sized to provide the minimum bearing areas as shown below. Bearing areas indicated have been calculated for Class 200 PVC pipe at a test pressure of 150 PSI in soil with 2,000 PSI bearing capacity. Increase thrust block sizing as necessary for varying soil conditions. 1. Provide a minimum thrust block bearing area of 2.0 square feet on all bends (all degrees) and

tees installed on pressure supply lines 4 inches and smaller.

3.4 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill material on all lines shall be the same as adjacent soil free of debris, litter, and rocks over 1/2 inches in diameter.

B. Backfill shall be tamped in 4-inch layers under the pipe and uniformly on both sides for the full width of the trench and the full length of the pipe. Backfill materials shall be sufficiently damp to permit thorough compaction, free of voids. Backfill shall be compacted to dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil and shall conform to adjacent grades.

C. Flooding in lieu of tamping is not allowed.

D. Under no circumstances shall truck wheels be used to compact backfill.

E. Provide sand backfill a minimum of 4 inches over and under all piping under paved areas.

3.5 PIPING

A. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving. No hydraulic driving is permitted under asphalt pavement.


B. Cutting or breaking of existing pavement is not permitted.

C. Carefully inspect all pipe and fittings before installation, removing dirt, scale, burrs, and reaming. Install pipe with all markings up for visual inspection and verification.

D. Remove all dented and damaged pipe sections.

E. All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 4 inches from each other and 12 inches from lines of other trades.

F. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over each other.

G. In solvent welding, use only the specified primer and solvent cement and make all joints in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended methods including wiping all excess solvent from each weld. Allow solvent welds at least 15 minutes setup time before moving or handling and 24 hours curing time before filling.

H. PVC pipe shall be installed in a manner, which will provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

I. Center load all plastic pipe prior to pressure testing.

J. All threaded plastic-to-plastic connections shall be assembled using Teflon tape or Teflon paste.

K. For plastic-to-metal connections, work the metal connections first. Use a non-hardening pipe dope an all threaded plastic-to-metal connections, except where noted otherwise. All plastic-to-metal connections shall be made with plastic male adapters.

3.6 CONTROLLER

A. The exact location of the controller shall be approved by the Landscape Architect or District's authorized representative before installation. The electrical service shall be coordinated with this location.

B. The Irrigation Contractor shall be responsible for the final electrical hook up to the irrigation controller.

C. The irrigation system shall be programmed to operate during the periods of minimal use of the design area.

3.7 CONTROL WIRING

A. Low voltage control wiring shall occupy the same trench and shall be installed along the same route as the pressure supply lines whenever possible.

B. Where more than one wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped together in a bundle at intervals of 10 feet. Bundle shall be secured to the mainline with tape at intervals of 20 feet.

C. All connections shall be of an approved type and shall occur in a valve box. Provide an 18-inch service loop at each connection.

D. An expansion loop of 12 inches shall be provided at each wire connection and/or directional change, and one of 24 inches shall be provided at each remote control valve.

E. A continuous run of wire shall be used between a controller and each remote control valve. Under no circumstances shall splices be used without prior approval.

3.8 VALVES


A. Automatic control valves, quick coupler, and ball valves are to be installed in the approximate locations indicated on the drawings.

B. Valve shall be installed in shrub areas whenever possible.

C. Install all valves as indicated in the detail drawings.

D. Valves to be installed in valve boxes shall be installed one valve per box.

E. Provide valve ID tags for each remote control valve with valve number.

3.9 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes shall be installed in shrub areas whenever possible.

B. Each valve box shall be installed on a foundation of 3/4 inch gravel backfill, 3 cubic feet minimum. Valve boxes shall be installed with their tops 1/2 inch above the surface of surrounding finish grade in lawn areas and 2 inches above finish grade in ground cover areas.

3.10 IRRIGATION HEADS, DRIP EMITTERS, AND INLINE DRIP TUBING

A. Irrigation heads, drip emitters, and inline drip tubing shall be installed as indicated on the drawings.

B. Spacing of heads and inline drip tubing shall not exceed maximum indicated on the drawings.

C. Riser nipples shall be of the same size as the riser opening in the sprinkler body.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

A. Install all assemblies specified herein according to the respective detail drawings or specifications, using best standard practices.

B. Quick coupler valves shall be set approximately 18 inches from walks, curbs, header boards, or paved areas where applicable.

C. Install devices such as flush valves, master valves, and flow sensors as indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.12 FLUSHING THE SYSTEM

A. Prior to installation of irrigation heads, the valves shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the lines and risers.

B. Irrigation heads shall be installed after flushing the system has been completed.

3.13 ADJUSTING THE SYSTEM

A. Contractor shall adjust valves, align heads, and check the coverage of each system prior to coverage test.

B. If it is determined by the Landscape Architect or District's authorized representative that additional adjustments or nozzle changes will be required to provide proper coverage, all necessary changes or adjustments shall be made prior to any planting.

C. The entire system shall be operating properly before any planting operations commence.


D. Automatic control valves are to be adjusted so that the irrigation heads, drip emitters and inline drip tubing operate at the pressure recommended by the manufacturer.

3.14 TESTING AND OBSERVATION

A. Do not allow or cause any of the work of this section to be covered up or enclosed until it has been observed, tested and accepted by the Landscape Architect, District, and governing agencies.

B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect, District, and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance, where and when the work is ready for testing.

C. When the sprinkler system is completed, the Contractor shall perform a coverage test of each system in its entirety to determine if the water coverage for the planted areas is complete and adequate in the presence of the Landscape Architect.

D. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from the plans, or where the system has been willfully installed as indicated on the drawings when it is obviously inadequate, without bringing this to the attention of the Landscape Architect. This test shall be accepted by the Landscape Architect and accomplished before starting any planting.

E. Areas to be maintained for the formal maintenance period shall start maintenance at the same time, as directed by the Landscape Architect, District, and governing agencies. Partial areas will not be released into maintenance prior to completion of items listed in the pre-maintenance review. The maintenance period may not be phased.

F. If, after the maintenance review, the irrigation systems are not accepted by the Landscape Architect, the contractor shall reimburse the Architect for additional site visits, or additional time required to review work. All additional time will be billed at the Architect’s hourly rate and will be paid for by the contractor at no additional cost to the District.

G. Final inspection will not commence without record drawings as prepared by the Irrigation Contractor.

3.15 MAINTENANCE

A. During the maintenance period the Contractor shall adjust and maintain the irrigation system in a fully operational condition providing complete irrigation coverage to all intended plantings.

3.16 COMPLETION CLEANING

A. Clean up shall be made as each portion of the work progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall be removed from the site, all walks and paving shall be swept, and any damage sustained on the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions.

END OF SECTION

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT LANDSCAPE PLANTING DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 32 90 00-1

SECTION 32 90 00

PLANTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide hydroseeded field as indicated on Drawings, specified, and as required for a complete installation.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Section 31 22 00 - Earthwork.

3. Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing.

4. Section 32 22 19 – Landscape Irrigation.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit complete lists of landscape materials and equipment to be used, including manufacturers name and address, specific trade names, catalog numbers complete with illustrations and descriptive literature and clearly mark or underline proposed items; list sources of landscape topsoil.

C. Shop Drawings: Required for any landscape structure.

D. Material List: Plant materials list.

E. Certification: In addition to other required certification, furnish a certificate with each delivery of bulk material, including topsoil, planter mix soil, bark mulch, stating its source, quantity, type of material furnished and that such item or material conforms to requirements of this section.

F. Sample: Submit topsoil Sample and soil amendments with analysis.

G. Fertilizer analysis: Provide labels of each fertilizer used and quantities used at each applications recommended in Soil Analysis Report.

H. Soil Test: After completing soil rough grading, have soil tested for fertility and agricultural suitability. Soil shall be tested from minimum of (3-4) locations per acre of planted area. Record locations where samples were taken. A copy of soil test


results shall be submitted to District and Architect before landscape work begins. Pay cost of soil test.


A. Workers: Furnish skilled workers thoroughly trained and experienced in required crafts and familiar with specified requirements for proper performance of Work of this section.

B. Codes and Regulations: Materials, fabrication, and installation in this section shall comply with applicable State Codes and Regulations. Deliver permits and testing certifications to Project Inspector.

C. Quality and Size: Comply with current edition of “Horticultural Standards” for number one nursery stock as adopted by “American Association of Nurserymen”.

D. Plants:

1. True to name, with name of plants in accordance with standards of practice of “American Association of Nurserymen.”

2. Botanical names take precedence over common names.

1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Inspector will verify that irrigation systems are operating before starting Work of this section.

B. Existing Utilities and Plant Materials:

1. Protect utilities and plant materials from damage.

a. Perform modifications only as permitted by Architect, in accordance with applicable provisions noted or specified on Drawings, or in other sections of these Specifications.

2. Replace damaged plant material with like type and size material. Architect shall determine cost of irreplaceable plant material according to “square inch” method as described by Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers’ “Manual for Plant Appraisers” handbook, Current Edition, and “Guide for Establishing Values of Trees and Other Plants”.

C. Verification of Dimensions and Quantities:

1. Verify scaled dimensions and quantities before starting landscaping Work.

2. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies between Drawings, Specifications or actual Project site conditions.


F. Pest Management Method and Products:

1. Contractor shall ensure that plants provided are clean, healthy, free of physical damage, and show no symptoms of abiotic injury. Plants must also be free of diseases, arthropod pests, and any other type of plant pests. Before applying pesticides to plants on District property, the following criteria must be met:

a. Individuals who apply pesticides on behalf of contractor’s company must have a Qualified Applicator License in appropriate category of pest control issued by California Department of Pesticide Regulation and registered to conduct pest control for hire as a business by Los Angeles County Agricultural Commissioner’s Office.

b. Products used must be listed on BurbankUSD’s OEHS approved product list.

c. Length of time from date of use of a pesticide products until beneficial occupancy by Owner may not be less than five half lives of products used.

e. Complete written records of pesticide applications made by a contractor and or their representative on District property, must be provided to District’s Pest Management Department within 10 days of applications.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Plants shall be protected in transit and after delivery to Project site. Plants in broken containers and plants with broken branches or injured trunks will be deemed defective Work.

B. Plant materials damaged in planting operations shall be replaced.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: Designated as imported topsoil as specified herein. Soil test will determine suitability of topsoil before installation. Transport topsoil from source to its final position unless stockpiling is specified. Test in compliance with Section 01 45 24.

1. Imported Soil:


a. Shall be from a source outside Project site and in compliance with this section.

b. Architect may make such inspections and perform such tests as deemed necessary to determine material meets all requirements.

c. At least 30 days before scheduled installation, submit proposed source of topsoil and a sample to Architect. Submit a written request for review, accompanied by a written report stating that proposed source complies with these specifications by a testing laboratory registered by State of California for agricultural soil evaluation.

d. Comply with recommendations of soils testing laboratory and provide any soil amendments necessary to achieve proper nutrient levels to support healthy plant growth.

e. Imported topsoil shall be of a uniform composition and structure, fertile and friable sandy loam soil, and be free of roots, decay, subsoil, clods and stones larger than ¼ inch in greatest dimension, pockets of coarse sand, noxious weeds, sticks, brush and other litter and not be infested with nematodes or other undesirable insects and plant disease organisms. Imported topsoil shall meet following additional requirements:

1) Gradation Limits: Sand – 50 to 80 percent, clay – 20 percent maximum, and silt – 30 percent maximum. Sand, clay and silt gradation limits shall be as defined in ASTM D422.

2) Agricultural Suitability and Fertility: Topsoil shall be fertile and friable garden soil suitable for sustaining and promoting growth of specified plants.

3) Electrical conductivity less than 2.0 milliohms/centimeter or DS/m.

4) Boron content maximum of 1.0 part per million.

B. Fertilizers and Conditioning Materials: Comply with applicable requirements of State of California Agricultural Code:

1 General:

a. Fertilizing materials shall be packaged, first grade, commercial quality products identified as to source, type of material, weight and manufacturer’s guaranteed analysis.

b. Fertilizing material shall not contain toxic ingredients and fillers in quantities harmful to animal, human or plant life.


c. Submit a certificate of compliance stating material substantially meets Specifications in accordance with provisions of Article 1.03B.

2. Materials:

a. Bone Meal: Commercial raw bone mean shall be finely ground, steamed dry material with a minimum analysis of 2.5 percent nitrogen and 22 percent phosphoric acid.

b. Gypsum: Hydrated calcium sulfate produce containing 23 percent calcium and 18 percent sulfur with a guarantee analysis of 84 percent calcium sulfate.

c. Soil Sulfur: Guarantee analysis of 99 percent sulfur.

d. Superphosphates: First grade finely ground phosphate rock used for agricultural purpose, containing minimum 18 percent phosphoric acid by volume.

e. Commercial Fertilizer: Pellets or granular product having a chemical analysis of 14-14-14, with a minimum of 68 percent of nitrogen from slow release nitrogen unless otherwise specified in Soil Analysis Report: it should be a free flowing material delivered in unopened bags, do not install material which becomes caked or otherwise damaged.

f. Nitrogen Fortified Wood Product: Derived from redwood, fir or cedar sawdust or from bark of fir or pine treated with a non-toxic agent to quickly absorb water and comply with following requirements:

1). Gradation:

SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING ¼-inch 95 percent minimum #8 80 percent minimum #35 30 percent minimum Nitrogen Content: NITROGEN CONTENT PERCENT DRY WEIGHT Redwood 0.4 to 0.6 percent Fir 0.56 to 0.84 percent Cedar 0.56 to 0.84 percent Fir Bark 0.8 to 1.2 percent Pine Bark 0.8 to 1.2 percent

3) Salinity: Maximum saturation extract conductivity 2.5 milliohms/centimeter at 25 degrees Celsius.


4) Absorption: When one teaspoon of water is applied to 4 cubic inches of air-dried products, material shall be become completely damp in a period of less than 2 minutes. Kellogg KRA, Sequoia Redwood/Cedar Blend or White Fir, Long Beach Soil Preparation, Bandini #101 Redwood Soil Builder of nitrogenized wood amendment.

g. Organic Fertilizer: Treated, relatively dry friable organic compost derived from sewage sludge processed for agricultural use; containing at least 1 percent nitrogen by dry weight, 2 percent phosphoric acid and comply substantially with gradation noted in sub-section 2.1, B6. Milorganic, Kellogg’s Nitrohumus, or equal.

C. Prepared Backfill mix:

1. To be based upon recommendations from soils test performed by a certified laboratory.

2. Mix (for bidding purposes):

a. Seventy percent by volume clean excavated topsoil/import soil.

b. Thirty percent by volume nitrogen stabilizer wood residual.

c. One pound per cubic yard gypsum.

d. Two pounds fertilizer per cubic yard (14-14-14 with a minimum 68 percent of nitrogen from slow release nitrogen. Additional secondary and micronutrients preferred).

D. Plant Material:

1. Hydroseed Mix to be Pro Sportsfield Elite by Stover Seed Company, www.stoverseed.com.

2. Hydroseed mix contains Affinity Perennial Ryegrass, Evening Shade Perennial Ryegrass, Manhattan 4 Perennial Ryegrass, and Sahara Unhulled Bermudagrass.

3. Hydroseed mix is to have 97% minimum purity and 90% minimum germination.

4. Seeding rate should be 10-12 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft. (400-500 pounds/acre).


5. Emergence should occur within 10-14 days with proper irrigation, longer in cool season. First mowing is approximately 30-40 days. First limited use is approximately 45 days.

6. Soil can be sandy to heavy clay, though turf mix is not good for extremely we or shaded areas. The pH should be within 5.5 to 8.5 range.

E. Concrete Header:

1. Concrete items: Standard 2000 psi concrete.

2. 6-inch by 8-inch size, complete with pre-molded expansion joint material 10 ft. apart or as indicated on Drawings.

F. Metal Header:

1.

G. Mulch:

1. Small scale bark residuals, per approved sample.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct detrimental conditions before commencing Work of this section.

3.02 GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION

A. Initial Rough Grading: Specified in Division 32.

B. Earthwork and Topsoil Placement: Shall include excavation and backfilling for irrigation system and preparation for spreading, densification, cultivation, and raking of topsoil, including fertilization and conditioning.

C. Preliminary Grading: Scarify existing soil to a depth of 6 inches before backfilling with topsoil. During preliminary grading operation, remove stones over ¾ inch.

D. In Previously Paved Areas: Remove top 12 inches of existing soil and legally dispose of off Project site. Replace with approved imported topsoil to indicated finish grade.

E. Topsoil Preparation and Conditioning:

1. Type and Thickness: Topsoil shall have a minimum depth of 6 inches above subgrade or as indicated on Drawings, whichever is greater.


2. Before installing topsoil, subgrade shall be cleared of weeds, rock ¾ inch and larger and other extraneous materials from designated planting areas to a depth of 6 inches. The tools acceptable for this cleaning process are a Rock Picker by Harley Enterprise, Track Screener by Cherrington, Screen USA Inc. or other tools or machines designed for the purpose. The finished planting bed preparation is subject to the approval of the Owner’s representative.

3. Do not process topsoil when it is so wet or dry as to cause excessive compaction or forming of hard clods or dust.

4. Existing soil can be used as topsoil only if it meets the requirements of Article 2.01.A of this section.

F. Fertilizing and Conditioning: Provide planting areas to finish grades, including mounds, before installation of specified fertilizer or soil conditioning materials.

1. Mechanically install following amount of fertilizer or soil conditioning materials at a uniform rate per 1,000 square feet of planting area:

a. Three cubic yards of nitrogen fortified wood compost.

b. Two cubic yards of organic fertilizer.

c. One hundred pounds. of gypsum.

d. Thirty pounds of commercial fertilizer.

2. Quantities of required materials for planting areas shall be at Project site. Furnish Project Inspector with delivery tickets before installation to verify source, kind, and quantities delivered.

3. After installation of fertilizer and soil conditioning materials, uniformly cultivate materials into upper 6 inches of soil with suitable equipment operated in at least two directions at approximate at right angles. Process soil until friable.

G. Finish Grading:

1. Provide a finish grade, smooth, uniform, and free of abrupt grade changes and depressions to insure proper surface drainage.

2. Finish grades adjacent to paving curbs or headers shall be 1 inch lower in sod areas and 2 inches lower in shrub or ground cover areas.

3. Irrigate soil after installation of fertilizer and soil conditioning materials. Allow soil to settle. Provide a stable surface. After soil has dried out to a workable condition, re-grade, rake, and smooth to required grades and contours. Finished surfaces to be left clean and suitable for planting.


4. Areas to be planted shall be graded and floated to provide complete surface drainage; water holding depressions and pockets shall be eliminated. Undulations and unsightly variations in grade which will not permit the use of normal mowing equipment without scalping or missing shall be removed so that proper use of mowing equipment can be performed.

5. Areas to be planted shall also be finished graded to meet any walks, paths or other adjoining surfaces so that, after compaction, no water pockets or ridges remain.

6. Areas where sod will interface with other modes of planting at catch basins and paved areas shall be finish shaped so as to counter sink the sod one inch such that once sod is placed, it shall be at grade with adjacent planting bed.

H. Contour mounds: Construct with imported topsoil and specified soil amendments. Install and shape mounds to minimize settlement or erosion and to provide adequate footing for placement of boulders. Referenced dimensions of mound contours refer to height above finish grade.

I. Trenching: After completion of soil conditioning or finish grading operations, backfill upper portion of trench so specified topsoil thickness in trench is restored.

J. Weeding: Once site has been cleared, grubbed and rough graded, landscape areas shall be maintained free of vegetation growth until start of irrigation and planting phase of work.

3.03 HEADER INSTALLATION

A. Install at locations and grades shown on Drawings, before planting.

3.04 PLANTING

A. Backfill Planting Mix: Consists of 70 percent specified topsoil, and 30 percent nitrogen fortified sawdust mulch plus the amendments indicated in soil analysis report.

C. Mulch

1. Mulch watering basins of each tree with 2" layer of mulch.

B. Hydro-Seeding:

1. Mix slurry of seeds and fertilizer to produce a homogeneous slurry mixture in designated proportions. Discharge system shall apply slurry at a continuous and uniform rate.

2. Immediately after application, irrigate seeded areas thoroughly. Application pattern shall conform to irrigation system so that watering can be accomplished in a timely sequence.


3. Program watering so that repeated watering at short application times can be made to prevent excessive runoff and to prevent erosion.

4. Prior to planting, hydro-seeding shall be done. Abutting ground cover beds shall be neatly trimmed to forms and lines shown on drawing.

5. Areas that do not germinate satisfactorily shall be reseeded at 14-day intervals until an overall acceptable stand of vegetation is achieved.

C. Hydroseed slurry: Proportions to be as follows:

Manufacturers Seed mix (see paragraph 2.01) Recommendation Wood Cellulose fiber (dyed green) 2000 pounds per acre M-Binder Soil Stabilizer 100 pounds per acre Triple Super Phosphate 250 pounds per acre Water and Dye As needed

N. Fertilizing: At 30 day intervals after hydroseeding, fertilizer should be 3 to 5 pounds of actual nitrogen per 1000 sq. ft. per year. Use a balanced fertilizer with a 3:1:2 ratio of NPK with sulpher. Thoroughly water area after applying fertilizer. Fertilizer applications shall be performed under observation of Project Inspector.

3.05 MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT

A. Required: Maintain areas on a continuous basis as they are completed during progress of Work and during establishment period. Maintenance shall include continuous operations of watering, weeding, trimming, rodent control, reseeding, planting replacement irrespective of cause or any other operations necessary to assure normal plant growth.

B. Keep planting areas free of debris and weeds. Cultivate at intervals not to exceed 10 days.

C. Turf Maintenance:

1. Perform first mowing of sod areas when grass is 2 1/2 inches high and repeat as often as is necessary to maintain sod at a height of 2 inches. In no case shall sod be cut lower then 1 1/2 inches in height unless otherwise indicated.

2. After each cutting, edge of grass shall be trimmed to a neat and uniform line.

3. Grass clippings shall be removed and legally disposed of off Project site.

D. Final Inspection:


1. If plant establishment period is completed before Substantial Completion, planting areas shall be maintained until Final Completion.

3.06 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Contractor must comply with specifications outlined in paragraph 1.04.F.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Unless noted otherwise, protect Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

3.08 CLEANUP

A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project site.

END OF SECTION

WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 33 10 00 -1

SECTION 33 10 00

SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. NFPA 24 applies to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping and specialties for combined potable and fire protection water

service outside the building.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 312000 - Earthwork for trench excavation and backfill. 2. Drawings for potable and fire protection piping inside the building.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping and

specialties, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Combined Potable Water and Fire Protection Water Service: 200 psig (1380 kPa).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pipe, joint restraints and fittings. 2. Valves and covers 3. Backflow preventer 4. Fire Department Connection

C. Purging and Disinfecting Reports: As specified in "Cleaning" Article in Part 3.


A. Comply with NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances," for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision.

B. Comply with NSF Standard 61, “Drinking Water System Components”, for material, installation,

and testing requirements.

C. Comply with City of Burbank requirements for tapping of water mains. D. Comply with City of Burbank standards for potable water-service piping for testing and

disinfections. E. Comply with City of Burbank Fire Department installation and testing requirements.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.


2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors, unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-

point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to

avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and

handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural

capacity of floor when storing inside. F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.


A. Verify existing utility locations and meters. Contact utility locating service. B. Verify that it is possible to install water service piping to comply with original design and

referenced standards. C. Site Information: Reports on subsurface condition investigations made during design of Project

are available for informational purposes only; data in reports are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions between soil borings. Owner assumes no responsibility for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information.

D. Obtain necessary connection permits with local water company as required. E. Obtain necessary street excavation and encroachment permits from the City of Los Angeles of

Public Works. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate piping materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements with building water distribution piping.

B. Coordinate piping materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements with building fire-

protection water piping. C. Coordinate with other site utility work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES AND TUBES

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping

Applications" Article. B. PVC Plastic, Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40. C. PVC Plastic, Fire Service Pipe: UL 1285 and AWWA C900, Class 200. Include elastomeric seal

according to ASTM F 477.


D. Pipe sizes up to 2 inches shall be copper water tubing, Type K hard, ANSI H23.1, ASTM B 88, IAPMO IS. Muller Brass, Cambridge-Lee Halstead, or equal. an approved protective wrap shall be used to completely isolate and protect all underground copper tubing and extend past the surface a minimum 12 inches. The excess wrapping shall be trimmed down and taped to copper tubing with 10 mill PVC pipe tape at grade level of concrete or asphalt.

B. Ductile-Iron, Push-on-Joint Pipe: AWWA C151, with cement-mortar lining and seal coat

according to AWWA C104. Include rubber compression gasket according to AWWA C111.

2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3

"Piping Applications" Article. B. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22; wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. C. PVC Plastic, Socked Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40. D. Ductile-Iron, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron; or AWWA C153,

ductile-iron, compact type. Include cement-mortar lining and seal coat according to AWWA C104 and rubber compression gaskets according to AWWA C111.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping

Applications" Article. B. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Alloy Sn94, or Alloy E, with 0.10 percent maximum

lead content. C. Primers for PVC Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: ASTM F 656. D. Solvent Cement for PVC Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: ASTM D 2564.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to

prevent galvanic action and corrosion. 1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-

neck end types and matching piping system materials. 2. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, designed for 250-psig (1725-kPa)

minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). Include insulating material isolating dissimilar metals and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

3. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum pressure to suit system pressures.

4. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig

(1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. 5. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel couplings with inert and non-corrosive

thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

6. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples with inert and non-corrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

2.5 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT

A. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, PE film, 0.008-

inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness, tube or sheet.


2.6 VALVES A. All Gate Valves, 4-Inch NPS (DN80) and Larger in size shall conform to AWWA Standard

Specifications C500. All valves, including those over 12”, shall be rated to a minimum working pressure of 200 psi. All valves shall be iron body, bronze mounted, double-disk, parallel scat gate valves. All valves shall open by turning the stem counterclockwise. Buried valves shall be non-rising type with O-ring seal equipped with 2 inch square operating nut, and shall be bituminous coated. End connections shall be flanged or mechanical joint as required for the type of pipe used. Buried valves shall have stem extensions to place operating nut within 6” of top of valve box.

B. Valve Boxes shall be precast concrete with cast iron traffic rated cover with lettering "WATER”,

bottom section with base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter, and adjustable cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve. 1. Provide steel tee-handle operating wrench with each valve box. Include tee handle with

one pointed end, stem of length to operate valve, and socket-fitting valve-operating nut. After installation of valve box cover and after installation of adjacent paving, if any, covers shall be sandblasted or wire-brushed as necessary and painted with bituminous black paint, unless another color is required by the Architect.

C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FM-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench,

extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of bury of valve. Posts above and including connection to riser shall be sandblasted, if necessary, after installation and painted red, unless another color is required by the Architect.

D. Tapping Sleeve and Tapping Valve: Complete assembly, including tapping sleeve, tapping

valve, and bolts and nuts. Use sleeve and valve compatible with tapping machine. 1. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron, 2-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new

branch connection. Sleeve may have mechanical-joint ends with rubber gaskets or sealing rings in sleeve body. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and of outlet flange required for branch connection.

2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. General: Manufactured backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and

maximum pressure loss indicated. B. Working Pressure: 200 psig (1380 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. C. 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. D. Interior Lining: AWWA C550, epoxy coating for backflow preventers with cast-iron or steel body. E. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. F. Strainer on inlet if strainer is indicated. G. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and manual

drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet. Units attached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.

H. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventer: ASSE 1013, with OS&Y gate valves on inlet

and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous-pressure application. 1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum through middle third of flow range. 2. Double Detector Check Assembly: 15 psi (103.75 kPa) entry loss.

I. Exterior Finish: Red or yellow (as directed by Water Purveyor or local Fire Department) alkyd-gloss enamel paint. Entire device above and including connection to riser shall be sandblasted, if necessary, after installation and re-painted.


Manufacturer Model Size

Cia-Val RP-LEX 2",2 1/2",3",4",6",8",10" Cia-Val RP-2 3/4",1",1-1/4",1-1/2" Cia-Val RP4 6 " Febco 825YD2 2-1/2",3",4",6",8",10" Febco 825Y 3/4",1",1-1/4",1-1/2",2" Febco 825YA 3/4",1",1-1/2",2" Febco 845 3/4",1" Mueller H-9506 4",6",8",10" Orion 80-0069 1-1/2" Orion BRP 3/4,1”,3",4" Orion 9-2929 2 " Rain Bird RPA-075-R 3/4" Rain Bird RPA-100-R 1” Rain Bird RPA-125-R 1-1/4" Rain Bird RPA-150-R 1-1/2" Rain Bird RPA-200-R 2" Rain Bird RPA-250-R 2-1/2"

Rain Bird RPA-400-R 4 " Rain Bird RPA-600-R 6" Rain Bird RPA-800-R 8" Rain Bird RPA-1000-R 10" Watts 909 PCQT 3/4"-2" Watts 909HWQT 3/4",1",1-1/4",1-1/2",2" Watts 909 PCRW 2-1/2"-10" Watts 909 RW Bronze 2-1/2",3" Watts 009QT 3/4",1",1-1/4",1-1/2",2" Watts 009SSQT 3/4",1",1-1/4",1-1/2",2" Wilkins 575A 3/4",1 Wilkins 575 3/4",1",1-1/4",1-1/2",2" Wilkins 575 (MOD-III) 2-1/2",3",4",6" Wilkins 575M 8" (4"x4"x8" manifold)

Wilkins 575M 10" (6"x6"x10" manifold)

2.7 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Exposed Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body, with thread inlets according to

NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department hose threads, and threaded bottom outlet. Include lugged caps, gaskets, and chains; lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 18-inch- (460-mm-) high brass sleeve; and round escutcheon plate. 1. Connections: Two 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) inlets and 6-inch NPS (DN150) outlet. 2. Inlet Alignment: Inline, horizontal. 3. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated. 4. Escutcheon Plate Marking: "AUTO SPKR."

2.8 ANCHORAGES

A. Concrete Reaction Backing: Portland cement concrete mix, 3000 psig (20.7 MPa).

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for underground warning tape materials.


B. Arrange for detectable warning tapes made of solid blue film with metallic core and continuously

printed black-letter caption "CAUTION--WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." C. Nonmetallic Piping Label: Engraved, plastic-laminate label at least 1 by 3 inches (25 by 75 mm),

with caption "CAUTION--THIS STRUCTURE HAS NONMETALLIC WATER-SERVICE PIPING," for installation on main electrical meter panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Section 312000 "Earthwork" for excavation, trenching, and backfilling. B. Refer to Section 321216 "Asphaltic Concrete Paving" for cutting and patching of existing paving. C. Refer to Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for cutting and patching of paving.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following

applications: B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure

rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. C. Do not use flanges or keyed couplings for underground piping. D. Fire-Protection Water-Service Piping: Use the following: E. 1. 4- to 8-Inch NPS (DN100 to DN200): UL 1285 and AWWA C900, Class 200. Include

elastomeric seal according to ASTM F 477.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply: 1. Underground Valves, 3-Inch NPS (DN80) and Larger: AWWA, gate valves, non-rising

stem, with valve box. 2. Underground Valves, 4-Inch NPS (DN100) and Larger: UL/FM, gate valves, non-rising

stem, with indicator post. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service Piping: According to UL 194 and AWWA

C600. B. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, OD, and

system working pressure. Refer to "Piping Systems - Common Requirements" Article below for joining piping of dissimilar metals.

3.5 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and arrangement of

piping systems. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved in advance by the Architect or USC.

B. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. C. Install piping free of sags and bends.


D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. G. Piping Connections: Unless otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below:

1. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals. 3.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building water piping

systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. 1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building water piping systems are

installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building water piping systems when those systems are installed.

B. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Drawings. C. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.

Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports. 3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Make connections larger than 2-inch NPS (DN50) with tapping machine according to the

following: 1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. 3. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with AWWA C600. Install valve with stem

pointing up and with cast-iron valve box. 4. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.

Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping.

B. If hot tap is not possible, install cut-in tee with C-110 fittings.

C. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-protection water-service piping materials and installation. D. Install ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600.

1. Encase piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 2. Install encasement per manufacturer's written instructions. Close seams and overlaps in

the polyethylene tubes with polyethylene compatible adhesive tape. The tape shall be approximately two inches wide and shall have the ability to bond securely to a metal surface and the polyethylene material. Repair all rips, tears and other damage with suitable adhesive tape.

E. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches (750 mm) and according to the

following: 1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches (900 mm) cover over top. 2. If trenching before rough grading is completed would result in a lesser depth of cover than

specified above, then trenching for water piping installation shall not be done until the specified minimum cover depth can be effected. If construction traffic will be allowed to pass over completed water piping installations prior to finish paving, then a protective pavement blanket at least equivalent to the final pavement and base thickness shall be constructed within the vehicle access area for a minimum distance of three feet on either side of the pipe. As an alternative to the temporary pavement blanket, the water pipe shall be installed at a minimum of two (2) feet deeper than specified within construction traffic areas.

3.8 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches.

Include anchorages for the following piping systems: 1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Potable-Water Piping: According to AWWA C600.


2. Fire-Service Piping: According to NFPA 24. B. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding material to surfaces of installed

ferrous anchorage devices. 3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for 3-inch NPS (DN80) and larger

underground installation. Use non-rising-stem UL/FM gate valves for installation with indicator posts.

B. AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install underground valves with stem

pointing up and with cast-iron valve box. C. UL/FM-Type Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install underground valves and valves in pits

with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post. 3.10 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install fire department connection of type and features indicated.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back-filling of trench for underground

water-service piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly over piping.


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have

hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for one hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for one more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within above limits.

C. Prepare reports for testing activities.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or as described below: a. Comply with NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean,

potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. 1) Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least

50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

3) Following allowed standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system.


4) Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports for purging and disinfecting activities.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT SITE SANITARY SEWER DISTRIBUTION DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 33 31 00 -1

SECTION 33 31 00

SITE SANITARY SEWER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Sanitary drainage piping, fittings and accessories.

B. Connection of building sanitary sewer drainage system to site sewer systems

C. Cleanout access.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D2751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

B. ASTM D3034 - polyvinyl chloride (PVC), SDR 35, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints.

C. ASTM C700 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated

D. SSPWC - Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, latest Edition.


A. Conform to Section 306, Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, for materials and installation of Work of this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings indicating dimensions, locations and elevations of manholes, cleanouts and sub-surface structures.

B. Product data for pipe and pipe accessories.

C. Inspection and test reports specified

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record location of existing and proposed pipe runs, connections, manholes, cleanouts and invert elevations.

B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS

A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Plastic Pipe: 1. NPS 3: PVC SDR 35 sewer piping. 2. NPS 4: PVC SDR 35 sewer piping. 3. NPS 5 and NPS 6: PVC SDR 35 sewer piping. 4. NPS 8 and NPS 10: PVC SDR 35 sewer piping. 5. NPS 12 and NPS 15: PVC SDR 35 sewer piping.


B. PVC pipe is for outside conditions.

C. Vitrified Clay Pipe (VCP) - pipe shall be “extra strength VCP” and shall comply with Section 207-8 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM C-700 and installed in accordance with ASTM C-12. Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe shall comply with Section 208-2.3 of SSPWC and manufactured in accordance with ASTM C-425. All VCP pipe, fittings and couplings shall be clearly marked at an interval not to exceed 5 feet as follows:

1) Nominal pipe diameter. 2) VCP classification. 3) Company, plant, shift ASTM, and date designation. 4) Service designation or legend.

D. Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C76 (ASTM C76M), Class III, Wall B, for gasketed joints.

1) Gaskets: ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M), rubber.

E. Hub and Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A74, Service class, gray cast iron for gasketed joints. Include ASTM C564, rubber compression-type gaskets.

F. Backwater Valves: Gray iron.

G. Cleanouts: PVC.

H. Corrosion-Protection Piping Encasement: LLDPE film.

I. Manholes: Standard precast concrete. 1. Resilient pipe connectors. 2. Reinforced-concrete grade rings. 3. Protective coating. 4. Manhole frames and covers, with protective coating. 5. Manhole cover inserts.

2.2 PIPE ACCESSORIES

A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal.

B. Fittings: Same material as pipe, molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required "T", bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.

C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D3034, SDR 35, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM F477, Elastomeric seals. 2. Primer: ASTM F 656. 3. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, removable lid, closed checkerboard grill lid design; nominal lid and frame diameter as required for pipe sizes. [SPPWC 204-2]

B. Manholes: SPPWC Standard Drawing 200-3

2.4 FILL MATERIAL


A. Bedding and Fill: As specified in Section 31 20 00 “Earthwork”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that trench cut or excavation base is ready to receive work, excavations, dimensions and elevations are as indicated on Drawings.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Verify that existing invert elevations on site will allow proper tie in to new work with proper positive slope. Ascertain accuracy prior to trenching and installation of sanitary sewer system.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with approved fill material.

B. Remove large stones or other hard matter that could damage sewer pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE

A. Prior to commencing Work, Contractor shall pothole existing utilities at points of connection. Notify Architect in event of discrepancies.

B. Install pipe, fittings and accessories in accordance with Section 306, SSPWC and manufacturer's instructions. Seal joints watertight.

C. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACPA “Concrete Pipe Handbook”. Provide the following seals:

1. Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M), rubber gaskets. 2. Elliptical Pipe: ASTM C877 (ASTM C877M), Type I, sealing bands. 3. Arch Pipe: ASTM C877 (ASTM C877M), Type I, sealing bands.

D. Place pipe on bedding as specified in Section 31 23 33.

E. Lay pipe to slope gradient noted on Drawings with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

F. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting.

G. Connect to site sewer outlet system through installed sleeves.

H. Do not cover joints until lines have been tested and approved.

3.4 INSTALLATION - CLEANOUTS

A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.

B. Establish elevations and pipe inverts.

C. Mount lid and frame level in grout secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.

3.5 PROTECTION


A. Protect pipe cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress.

3.6 TESTING

A. After installation, test each sanitary drain and/or sewer and each section between successive man-holes for either infiltration or exfiltration. Test shall be conducted in accordance with Section 306 - Underground Conduit Construction of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

B. Where excessive ground water is encountered test the pipeline for infiltration.

C. When infiltration or exfiltration exceeds allowable amounts as set forth in the Section 306 formula, perform repairs or replacements as necessary to comply with the required limits.


WALT DISNEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL SITE STORM PERMANENT MODULAR CLASSROOM BUILDING PROJECT DRAINAGE DISTRIBUTION DSA BACKCHECK, SEPTEMBER 28, 2020 33 41 00 -1

SECTION 33 41 00

SITE STORM DRAINAGE DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Reference Specification: Perform all work in accordance with applicable provisions of "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", Latest Edition. Unless otherwise noted, mention herein of section numbers refers to sections of the Reference Specification. Where Reference Specification refers to "Agency", substitute the word "Owner". Where Reference Specification refers to "Engineer", substitute the word "Architect". Where Reference Specification is in conflict with these Specifications, these Specifications shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes gravity-flow, non-pressure storm drainage pipe and drainage structures outside the building.


A. Gravity-Flow, Non-pressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: At least equal to system test pressure

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for the following:

1. Pipe and fittings 2. Storm water quality devices: catch basin insert filters 3. Drains inlets

B. Shop drawings for pre-cast concrete structures. Include frames, covers, and grates.

C. Shop drawings for infiltration swale. Include filter media, piping, overflows, planter soil materials and layering.

D. Shop drawings for cast-in-place concrete or field-erected masonry structures. Include frames, co-

vers, and grates. E. Reports and calculations for design mixes for each class of cast-in-place concrete. F. Coordination drawings showing structures, pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Include details of

underground structures and connections. Show other piping in same trench. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures.


G. Inspection and test reports specified in the "Field Quality Control" Article.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Environmental Agency Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining storm drainage systems. B. Utility Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to storm drainage systems. Include stand-

ards of water and other utilities where appropriate. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of

system components and are based on specific manufacturer types indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Section "Product Requirements."

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic structures in direct sunlight. B. Do not store plastic pipe or fittings in direct sunlight. C. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. D. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's rigging in-

structions.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility loca-

tions. Notify architect of potential utility conflicts prior to installation of pipe system. B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned. C. Prior to commencing construction in public right-of-way and connecting to any public storm drain

systems, contractor shall contact the agency of authority and obtain necessary permits. C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others

except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide ac-ceptable temporary utility services.

1. Notify Architect not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving Architect's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.


2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 and Larger: ASTM F 679, T-1 wall thickness, with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 40 ASTM D 1785 and D 2665 with solvent cement joints conforming to ASTM D 2564.

2.3 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Comply with Section 207-2 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

B Tongue and Groove Piping: ASTM C76 (ASTM C76M), Class III, Wall B, for gasketed joints.

C. Gaskets: ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M), rubber.

2.4 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials: 1. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials

being joined.

C. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. b. Fernco Inc. c. Logan Clay Products Company (The). d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. e. NDS Inc. f. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

D. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. d. Any equivalent manufacturer.

E. Ring-Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Fernco Inc.


b. Logan Clay Products Company (The). c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. d. Any equivalent manufacturer.

2.5 SUB-DRAINAGE MATERIALS

A. Filter Fabric: Supplied by prefabricated drainage structure manufacturer, 4.5 oz/sq. yd. min.

B. Waterproof Sheeting: Polyvinylchloride sheeting, minimum 20 mils thick, with waterproof adhesive supplied or recommended by sheeting manufacturer.

C. Perforated Subdrain Plastic Pipe:

1. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Pipe: ASTM D 2751, with a maximum SDR of

35. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: ASTM D 3034, with maximum SDR of 35 and with

flexible elastomeric seal joint. 3. Perforations: Perforations in ABS and PVC pipe shall be circular, not more than 5/16"

or less than 3/16" in diameter, and arranged in rows parallel to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Perforations shall be approximately 3 inches center-to-center, along rows. The rows shall be approximately 1-1/2" inches apart and arranged in a staggered pat-tern so that all perforations lie at the mid-point between perforations in adjacent rows. The rows shall be spaced over not more than 90 degrees of circumference. The spig-ot or tongue end of the pipe shall not be perforated for a length equal to the depth of the socket and perforations shall continue at uniform spacing over the entire width of the pipe. Manufacturer's standard ABS or PVC pipe essentially meets these require-ments and may be substituted upon approval. Wall thickness as required for earth loads and as approved by Soils Engineer, 4" diameter, Schedule 80, minimum.

4. Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) pipe shall be joined using solvent cement or elastomeric joints and shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2751.

5. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe joints shall be in accordance with ASTM D 3212. 6. Furnish subsoil drainage pipe prewrapped or wrap pipe with Mirafi 140N Filter Fabric,

or Bidim C22 or C28 fabric manufactured by Monsanto; or equal.

2.6 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as

required to prevent flotation. 3. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls

and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 4. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated. 5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated.

Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 bitumen or butyl rubber. 7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe

connection. 8. Steps: Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel

reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches.


9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover.

11. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch- minimum width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording "STORM DRAIN." a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron or ASTM A 48, Class 35 gray iron,

unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3250-psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.

2.8 CATCH BASINS

A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 913, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. Precast units shall meet H-20 traffic loading condtions. 1. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for

walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 2. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless flat-slab-top type is indicated. 3. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.

B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16 (heavy traffic) structural loading unless otherwise indicated. Include 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inch- diameter flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Triton Catch Basin Insert filters by Contech Stormwater Solutions Inc.

2.9 CLEAN OUTS

A. Cleanout Covers: Alhambra Foundry Company, Inc. Model No. A-1240 or A1242, heavy duty lamp pole frame and cover, or equal approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section "Earthwork."


3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installation of green

warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures. 1. Use warning tapes or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground struc-

tures.

3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Include Silt tight joints, except where water tight and soil tight joints are indicated.

B. Pipe Couplings: Use where indicated and where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is specified. Do not use instead of specified joining methods. Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure

storm drain piping, unless otherwise indicated. a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. b. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between

smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general location and arrangement of underground sewerage and drainage systems piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Verify existing elevations prior to extensive excavating and notify Architect of any discrepancies. Contractor shall be liable for any premature construction which must be modified due to unforeseen existing conditions.

C. Install gravity-flow-systems piping at constant slope between points and elevations indicated. Install straight piping runs at constant slope, not less than that specified, where slope is not indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Install manholes for changes in direction if shown on plan, otherwise use fittings. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing storm drain is indicated.

F. Extend drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.

G. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless

otherwise indicated. 2. Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook." 3. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.


4. Install Concrete Pipe and Fittings according to ACPA “Concrete Pipe Handbook” with the following seals. Concrete round pipe and fittings per ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M), rubber gaskets. Elliptical and Arch pipe: ASTM C877 (ATM C877M), Type I, sealing bands.

H. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to the following. B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with final finished surface. C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings: As follows:

1. Join solvent-cement-joint pipe and fittings with solvent cement according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM F 402.

2. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals according to ASTM D 2321. 3. Join profile pipe and ribbed drain pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals according

to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instruction. 4. Install according to ASTM D 2321.

D. System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, except where otherwise

specified. E. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use

couplings that are compatible with and fit both systems' materials and dimensions.

3.6 TRENCH DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. B. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions, ASME

A112.3.1, and as indicated. C. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with final finished surface. D. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, fas-

teners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer. E. Embed channel sections and appurtenances in a 4-inch (100-mm) minimum depth of concrete

around bottom and sides. F. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated. G. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints. H. Embed trench sections and appurtenances in a 4-inch (100-mm) minimum depth of concrete

around bottom and sides. I. Make piping connections and install stainless-steel piping with gasketed joints between system

components.

3.7 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.


B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. Ensure catch basin walls are properly sealed at the drain pipe penetrations.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's storm building drains specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."

B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. 1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section

of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3250 psi.


A. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test storm drain according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction and the following: a. Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile of pipe,

during 24-hour period. b. Close openings in system and fill with water. c. Purge air and refill with water. d. Disconnect water supply. e. Test and inspect joints for leaks.

6. Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, "Hydrostatic Testing" Section. Use test pressure of at least 10 psig.

7. Air Tests: Test storm drainage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417.

B. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

C. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.


DSA 103-16: LISTING OF STRUCTURAL TESTS & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, 2016 CBCApplication Number:03-119964





DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


2016 CBCIMPORTANT: This form is only a summary list of structural tests and some of the special inspections required for the project.

Generally, the structural tests and special inspections noted on this form are those that will be performed by the Geotechnical Engineer of Record, Laboratory of Record, or Special Inspector. The actual complete test and inspection program must be performed as detailed on the DSA approved documents. The appendix at the bottom of this form identifies work NOT subject to DSA requirements for special inspection or structural testing. The project inspector is responsible for providing inspection of all facets of construction, including but

not limited to, special inspections not listed on this form such as structural wood framing, high-load wood diaphragms, cold-formed steel framing, anchorage of non-structural components, etc., per Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 17A. (2016 CBC)

**NOTE: Undefined section and table references found in this document are from the CBC, or California Building Code.

KEY TO COLUMNS1. TYPE 2. PERFORMED BY

Continuous – Indicates that a continuous special inspection is required Periodic – Indicates that a periodic special inspection is required Test – Indicates that a test is required

GE – Indicates that the special inspection is to be performed by a registered Geotechnical Engineer (GE) or his or her authorized representative LOR – Indicates that the test or inspection is to be performed by a testing laboratory accepted in the DSA Laboratory Evaluation and Acceptance (LEA) Program Laboratory of Record (LOR). See CAC Section 4-335 PI – Indicates that the special inspection may be performed by a project inspector when specifically approved by DSA. SI – Indicates that the special inspection is to be performed by a Special Inspector (SI)






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


Geotechnical Reports: Project has a geotechnical report, or CDs indicate soils special inspection is required by GE1. GENERAL: Table 1705A.6



✔ a. Verify that: • Site has been prepared properly prior to placement of controlled fill and/or excavations for foundations. • Foundation excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material. • Materials below footings are adequate to achieve the design bearing capacity.

Periodic GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative. (See Appendix for exemptions.)

2. SOIL COMPACTION AND FILL: Table 1705A.6



✔ a. Perform classification and testing of fill materials. Test LOR* * Under the supervision of the geotechnical engineer.

✔ b. Verify use of proper materials, densities and inspect lift thicknesses, placement and compaction during placement of fill.

Continuous GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative. (Refer to specific items identified in the Appendix for exemptions where soils SI and testing may be conducted under the supervision of a geotechnical engineer or LOR's engineering manager. In such cases, the LOR's form DSA 291 shall satisfy the soil SI and test reporting requirements for the exempt items.)






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


✔ c. Compaction testing. Test LOR* * Under the supervision of the geotechnical engineer. (Refer to specific items identified in the Appendix for exemptions where soils testing may be conducted under the supervision of a geotechnical engineer or LOR's engineering manager. In such cases, the LOR's form DSA 291 shall satisfy the soil test reporting requirements for the exempt items.)

3. DRIVEN DEEP FOUNDATIONS (PILES): Table 1705A.7



a. Verify pile materials, sizes and lengths comply with the requirements.


b. Determine capacities of test piles and conduct additional load tests as required.

Test LOR* * Under the supervision of the geotechnical engineer.

c. Inspect driving operations and maintain complete and accurate records for each pile.


d. Verify locations of piles and their plumbness, confirm type and size of hammer, record number of blows per foot of penetration, determine required penetrations to achieve design capacity, record tip and butt elevations and record any pile damage.


e. Steel piles. Provide tests and inspections per STEEL section below.

f. Concrete piles and concrete filled piles. Provide tests and inspections per CONCRETE section below.






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


g. For specialty piles, perform additional inspections as determined by the registered design professional in responsible charge.

* * * As defined on drawings or specifications.

4. CAST-IN-PLACE DEEP FOUNDATIONS (PIERS): Table 1705A.8



✔ a. Inspect drilling operations and maintain complete and accurate records for each pier.


✔ b. Verify pier locations, diameters, plumbness, bell diameters (if applicable), lengths and embedment into bedrock (if applicable); record concrete or grout volumes.


✔ c. Confirm adequate end strata bearing capacity. Continuous GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative. (See Appendix for exemptions.)

✔ d. Concrete piers. Provide tests and inspections per CONCRETE section below.

5. RETAINING WALLS:








DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


✔ a. Placement of soil reinforcement, drainage devices and backfill.

Continuous GE* Placement, compaction and inspection of backfill per Section 1705A.6.1 for fills supporting foundations (Section 2 above). * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative.

b. Segmental retaining walls; inspect placement of units dowels, connectors, etc.

Continuous GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative. See DSA IR 16-3.

✔ c. Concrete retaining walls. Provide tests and inspections per CONCRETE section below.

d. Masonry retaining walls. Provide tests and inspections per MASONRY section below.

6. OTHER SOILS:



a. Soil Improvements Test GE* Submit a comprehensive report documenting final soil improvements constructed, construction observation and the results of the confirmation testing and analysis to CGS for final acceptance. * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative.

b. Inspection of Soil Improvements Continuous GE* * By geotechnical engineer or his or her qualified representative.

c.






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


7. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Table 1705A.3, ACI 318-14 Sections 26.12 & 26.13



Material Verification and Testing:

✔ a. Verify use of required design mix. Periodic SI Table 1705A.3 Item 5, 1910A.1 (1909.2.3 for DSA-CC)

✔ b. Identifiy, sample, and test reinforcing steel. Test LOR 1910A.2 (1909.2.4 for DSA-CC); ACI 318-14 Section 26.6.1.2. DSA IR 17-10.16 (See Appendix for exemptions.)

✔ c. During concrete placement, fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine the temperature of the concrete.

Test LOR Table 1705A.3 Item 6; ACI 318-14 Sections 26.5 & 26.12

✔ d. Test concrete (f'c). Test LOR 1905A.1.16 (1909.3.7 for DSA-CC); ACI 318-14 Section 26.12.

Inspection:

✔ e. Batch plant inspection: Continuous See Notes SI Default of 'Continuous' per 1705A.3.3; If approved by DSA, batch plant inspection may be reduced to 'Periodic' subject to requirements in Section 1705A.3.3.1, or eliminated per 1705A.3.3.2. (See Appendix for exemptions.)

✔ f. Welding of reinforcing steel. Provide special inspection per STEEL, category 19.1(d) & (e) and/or 19.2(g) & (h) below.

8. PRESTRESSED / POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE (in addition to Cast-in-Place Concrete tests and inspections):






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)




a. Sample and test prestressing tendons and anchorages.

Test LOR 1705A.3.4, 1910A.3 (1909.2.5 for DSA-CC)

b. Inspect placement of prestressing tendons. Periodic SI 1705A.3.4, Table 1705A.3 Items 1 & 9.

c. Verify in-situ concrete strength prior to stressing of post-tensioning tendons.

Periodic SI Table 1705A.3 Item 11. Special inspector to verify specified concrete strength test prior to stressing.

d. Inspect application of post-tensioning or prestressing forces and grouting of bonded prestressing tendons.

Continuous SI 1705A.3.4, Table 1705A.3 Item 9; ACI 318-14 Section 26.13

9. PRECAST CONCRETE (in addition to Cast-in-Place Concrete tests and inspections):



a. Inspect fabrication of precast concrete members. Continuous SI ACI 318-14 Section 26.13

b. Inspect erection of precast concrete members. Periodic SI* Table 1705A.3 Item 10;* May be performed by PI when specifically approved by DSA.

10. SHOTCRETE (in addition to Cast-in-Place Concrete tests and inspections):








DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


a. Inspect shotcrete placement for proper application techniques.

Continuous SI 1705A.19, Table 1705A.3 Item 7. See ACI 506.2-13 Section 3.4.

b. Sample and test shotcrete (f'c). Test LOR 1908A.5, 1908A.10 (1909.4 for DSA-CC)

11. POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS:



✔ a. Inspect installation of post-installed anchors See Notes SI* 1616A.1.19, Table 1705A.3 Item 4a (Continuous) & 4b (Periodic) (See Appendix for exemptions). ACI 318-14 Sections 17.8 & 26.13 * May be performed by the project inspector when specifically approved by DSA.

✔ b. Test post-installed anchors. Test LOR 1910A.5 (1909.2.7 for DSA-CC). (See Appendix for exemptions.)

12. OTHER CONCRETE:



a.






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


17. STRUCTURAL STEEL, COLD-FORMED STEEL AND ALUMINUM USED FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES Table 1705A.2.1, AISC 303-10, AISC 360-10, AISC 341-10, AISC 358-10, AISI S100-07/S2-10

Material Verification:



✔ a. Verify identification of all materials and: Mill certificates indicate material properties that comply with requirements, sizes, types and grades comply with requirements.

Periodic * 2203A.1 (2203.1 for DSA-CC), Table 1705A.2.1 Item 3a-3c; AISI S100-07/S2-10 Section A2.1 & A2.2, AISI S200-12 Section A3, AISI S220-11 Section A4. *By special inspector or qualified technician when performed off-site.

✔ b. Test unidentified materials Test LOR 2203A.1 (2203.1 for DSA-CC).

✔ c. Examine seam welds of HSS shapes Periodic SI DSA IR 17-3.

Inspection:

✔ d. Verify and document steel fabrication per DSA-approved construction documents. Periodic SI Not applicable to cold-formed steel light-frame construction, except for

trusses (1705A.2.4).

18. HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTS: RCSC 2009

Material Verification of High-Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers:



✔ a. Verify identification markings and manufacturer's certificates of compliance conform to ASTM standards specified in the DSA-approved documents.

Periodic SI Table 1705A.2.1 Item 1, 2203A.1; RCSC 2009 Section 2.1. DSA IR 17-9






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


✔ b. Test high-strength bolts, nuts and washers. Test LOR 2213A.1 (2212.6.1 for DSA-CC). RCSC 2009 Section 7.2; DSA IR 17-8.16

Inspection of High-Strength Bolt Installation:

✔ c. Bearing-type (“snug tight”) connections. Periodic SI Table 1705A.2.1 Item 2a; RCSC 2009 Section 9.1. DSA IR 17-9

d. Slip-critical connections. * SI Table 1705A.2.1 Item 2b & 2c. RCSC 2009 Section 9.2 & 9.3. * “Continuous” or “Periodic” depends on the tightening method used, DSA IR 17-9 and 1705A.2.1.

19. WELDING: 1705A.2.5, Table 1705A.2.1 Items 4 & 5; DSA IR 17-3, AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8 for structural steel, AWS D1.2 for Aluminum, AWS D1.3 for cold-formed steel, AWS D1.4 for reinforcing steel. (See Appendix for exemptions.)

Verification of Materials, Equipment, Welders, etc:



✔ a. Verify weld filler material identification markings per AWS designation listed on the DSA-approved documents and the WPS.


✔ b. Verify weld filler material manufacturer’s certificate of compliance.


✔ c. Verify WPS, welder qualifications and equipment.







DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


19.1 SHOP WELDING:





✔ b. Inspect single-pass fillet welds ≤ 5/16”, floor and roof deck welds

Periodic SI 1705A.2.2, Table 1705A.2.1 Item 5a.5 & 5a.6. Per AISC 360-10 (and AISC 341-10 as applicable). DSA IR 17-3.

✔ c. Inspect welding of stairs and railing systems. Periodic SI 1705A.2.1. Per AISC 360-10 (and AISC 341-10 as applicable). AWS D1.1 & D1.3. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ d. Verification of reinforcing steel weldability other than ASTM A706

Periodic SI 1705A.3.1; verify carbon equivalent reported on mill certificates. AWS D1.4. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ e. Inspect welding of reinforcing steel. Continuous SI 1705A.3.1, Table 1705A.3 Item 2 and Table 1705A.2.1 Item 5b, 1903A.8. AWS D1.4. DSA IR 17-3.

19.2 FIELD WELDING:





✔ b. Inspect single-pass fillet welds ≤ 5/16” Periodic SI Table 1705A.2.1 Item 5a.5. Per AISC 360-10 (and AISC 341-10 as applicable). DSA IR 17-3.






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


✔ c. Inspect end-welded studs (ASTM A-108) installation (including bend test)

Periodic SI 2213A.2 (2212.6.2 for DSA-CC); per AISC 360-10 (and AISC 341-10 as applicable), AWS D1.1. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ d. Inspect floor and roof deck welds Periodic SI 1705A.2.2, Table 1705A.2.1 Item 5a.6; per AISC 360 (and AISC 341 as applicable) & AWS D1.3. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ e. Inspect welding of structural cold-formed steel Periodic SI* 1705A.2.5; AWS D1.3. * May be performed by the project inspector when specifically approved by DSA. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ f. Inspect welding of stairs and railing systems Periodic SI* 1705A.2.1; Per AISC 360-10 (and AISC 341-10 as applicable). AWS D1.1 & D1.3. DSA IR 17-3. * May be performed by the project inspector when specifically approved by DSA.

✔ g. Verification of reinforcing steel weldability Periodic SI 1705A.3.1; verify carbon equivalent reported on mill certificates. DSA IR 17-3.

✔ h. Inspect welding of reinforcing steel. Continuous SI 1705A.3.1, Table 1705A.3 Item 2 and Table 1705A.2.1 Item 5b, 1903A.8. AWS D1.4. DSA IR 17-3.

20. NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING:

Test or Special Inspection Type Performed By Code References and Notes

✔ a. Ultrasonic Test LOR 1705A.2.1 & 1705A.2.5. AISC 360-10 N5.5, AISC 341-10 J6.2. AWS D1.1 and D1.8. ANSI/ASNT CP-189, SNT-TC-1A. DSA IR 17-2.

✔ b. Magnetic Particle Test LOR 1705A.2.1 & 1705A.2.5. AISC 360-10 N5.5, AISC 341-10 J6.2. AWS D1.1 and D1.8. ANSI/ASNT CP-189, SNT-TC-1A. DSA IR 17-2.

✔ c. Shop Welding - Inspect Welding of Cold Formed Steel Test LOR






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


21. STEEL JOISTS AND TRUSSES:



✔ a. Verify size, type and grade for all chord and web members as well as connectors and weld filler material; verify joist profile, dimensions and camber (if applicable); verify all weld locations, lengths and profiles; mark or tag each joist.

Continuous SI 1705A.2.3, Table 1705A.2.3; AWS D1.1 and DSA IR 22-3 for steel joists only. 1705A.2.4; AWS D1.3 for cold-formed steel trusses.

22. SPRAY APPLIED FIRE-PROOFING:



a. Examine structural steel surface conditions, inspect application, take samples, measure thickness and verify compliance of all aspects of application with DSA-approved documents.

Periodic SI 1705A.14

b. Test bond strength. Test LOR 1705A.14.6

c. Test density. Test LOR 1705A.14.5

23. ANCHOR BOLTS AND ANCHOR RODS:






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)




✔ a. Anchor Bolts and Anchor Rods Test LOR IR 17-11 Sample and test anchor bolts and anchor rods not readily identifiable.

✔ b. Threaded rod not used for foundation anchorage.

Test LOR Sample and test threaded rods not readily identifiable per procedures noted in IR 17-11

Other Steel



a.

DSA 103-16: LISTING OF STRUCTURAL TESTS & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS (Other), 2016 CBCApplication Number:03-119964





DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


26. OTHER:



a. Load test for identified product(s): Test LOR 1709A.2 and 1709A.3. Testing is not required for: 1) a product with a valid evaluation service report per DSA IR A-5, or 2) a product that can be justified by structural calculation.

b. Installation torque for non-HS bolts Continuous SI* Applicable to communication towers identified as Essential Service Facility Projects (ESFP). Calibrated wrench use required, verified by SI during installation. *EXCEPTION: Non-ESFP may use PI without need for notification to DSA.

✔ c. High Strength Threaded Rod Test SI 2212A.1






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


Exempt items given in IR A-22 or the 2016 CBC (including DSA amendments) and those items identified below with a check mark by the design professional are NOT subject to DSA requirements for the structural tests / special inspections noted. Items marked as exempt shall be identified on the approved construction documents. The project inspector shall verify all construction complies with the approved construction documents.

SOILS:

1. Deep foundations acting as a cantilever footing designed based on minimum allowable pressures per CBC Table 1806A.2 and having no geotechnical report for the following cases: A) free standing sign or scoreboard, B) cell or antenna towers and poles less than 35'-0" tall (e.g., lighting poles, flag poles, poles supporting open mesh fences, etc.), C) single-story structure with dead load less than 5 psf (e.g., open fabric shade structure), or D) covered walkway structure with an apex height less than 10'-0" above adjacent grade.

2. Shallow foundations, etc. are exempt from special inspections and testing by a Geotechnical Engineer for the following cases: A) buildings without a geotechnical report and meeting the exception item #1 criteria in CBC Section 1803A.2 supported by native soil (any excavation depth) or fill soil (not exceeding 12" depth per CBC Section 1804A.6), B) soil scarification/recompaction not exceeding 12" depth, C) native or fill soil supporting exterior non-structural flatwork (e.g., sidewalks, site concrete ramps, site stairs, parking lots, driveways, etc.), D) unpaved landscaping and playground areas, or E) utility trench backfill.

CONCRETE/MASONRY:

1. Post-installed anchors for the following: A) exempt non-structural components (e.g., mechanical, electrical, plumbing equipment - see item 7 for "Welding") given in CBC Section 1616A.1.18 (which replaces ASCE 7-10, Section 13.1.4) or B) interior nonstructural wall partitions meeting criteria listed in exempt item 3 for "Welding."

2. Concrete batch plant inspection is not required for items given in CBC Section 1705A.3.3.2 subject to the requirements and limitations in that section.






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


3. Non-bearing non-shear masonry walls may be exempt from certain DSA masonry testing and special inspection items as allowed per IR 21-1.16. Refer to construction documents for specific exemptions accordingly for each applicable wall condition.

4. Epoxy shear dowels in site flatwork and/or other non-structural concrete.

5. Testing of reinforcing bars is not required for items given in CBC Section 1910A.2 subject to the requirements and limitations in that section.

Welding:

1. Solid-clad and open-mesh gates with maximum leaf span or rolling section for rolling gates of 10' and apex height less than 8’-0” above lowest adjacent grade. When located above circulation or occupied space below, these gates are not located within 1.5x gate/fence height (max 8'-0") to the edge of floor or roof.

2. Handrails, guardrails, and modular or relocatable ramps associated with walking surfaces less than 30” above adjacent grade (excluding post base connections per the 'Exception' language in Section 1705A.2.1); fillet welds cannot be ground flush.

3. Non-structural interior cold-formed steel framing spanning less than 15'-0", such as in interior partitions, interior soffits, etc. supporting only self weight and light-weight finishes or adhered tile, masonry, stone, or terra cotta veneer no more than 5/8" thickness and apex less than 20'-0" in height and not over an exit way. Maximum tributary load to a member shall not exceed the equivalent of that occurring from a 10'x10' opening in a 15' tall wall for a header or king stud.

4. Manufactured support frames and curbs using hot rolled or cold-formed steel (i.e., light gauge) for mechanical, electrical, or plumbing equipment weighing less than 2000# (equipment only) (connections of such frames to superstructure elements using welding will require special inspection as noted in selected item(s) 19, 19.1 and/or 19.2 located in the Steel/Aluminum category).

5. Manufactured components (e.g., Tolco, B-Line, Afcon, etc.) for mechanical, electrical, or plumbing hanger support and bracing (connections of such components to superstructure elements using welding will require special inspection as noted in selected item(s) for section 19, 19.1 and/or 19.2 located in the Steel/Aluminum category).






DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


6. TV Brackets, projector mounts with a valid listing (see DSA IR A-5) and recreational equipment (e.g., playground structures, basketball backstops, etc.) (connections of such elements to superstructure elements using welding will require special inspection as noted in selected item(s) for section 19, 19.1 and/or 19.2 located in the Steel/Aluminum category).

7. Any support for exempt non-structural components given in CBC Section 1616A.1.18 (which replaces ASCE 7-10, Section 13.1.4) meeting the following: A) when supported on a floor/roof, <400# and resulting composite center of mass (including component's center of mass) ≤4' above supporting floor/roof, B) when hung from a wall or roof/floor, <20# for discrete units or <5 plf for distributed systems.

DSA 103-16: LISTING OF STRUCTURAL TESTS & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS(SIGNATURE), 2016 CBCApplication Number:03-119964





DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


Name of Architect or Engineer in general responsible charge:

Name of Structural Engineer (When structural design has been delegated):

Signature of Architect or Structural Engineer: Date:

Note: To facilitate DSA electronic mark-ups and identification stamp application, DSA recommends against using secured electronic or digital signatures.

DSA STAMP

11/12/2020

Vincent Petito





SS FLS ACS

DATE:

✔ ✔ ✔

03-119964

11/20/2020

DSA 103-16: LIST OF REQUIRED VERIFIED REPORTS, CBC 2016Application Number:03-119964





DGS DSA 103-16 (Revised 07/16/2020)


1. Soils Testing and Inspection: Geotechnical Verified Report Form DSA 293

2. Structural Testing and Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291

3. Concrete Batch Plant Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291

4. Post-installed Anchors: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291, or, for independently contracting SI, Special Inspection Verified Report Form DSA 292

5. Shop Welding Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291, or, for independently contracting SI, Special Inspection Verified Report Form DSA 292

6. Field Welding Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291, or, for independently contracting SI, Special Inspection Verified Report Form DSA 292

7. High-Strength Bolt Installation Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291, or, for independently contracting SI, Special Inspection Verified Report Form DSA 292

8. Steel Joist Fabrication Inspection: Laboratory Verified Report Form DSA 291, or, for independently contracting SI, Special Inspection Verified Report Form DSA 292

Date post:	11-Mar-2021
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	1 times
Download:	0 times